Acura RL 2008 Manual de Servicio

2008 RL
Owner’s Manual
(Unlinked)
This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is due to changes
in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a
hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
０７／０５／１７０８：３８：３１３１ＳＪＡ６３００００１
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be

considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the
vehicle when it is sold.
ADDRESS
STREET This owner’s manual covers all
models of the Acura RL. You may
find descriptions of equipment and
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ features that are not on your
POSTAL CODE particular model.
V. I. N.
The information and specifications
DELIVERY DATE included in this publication were in
(Date sold to original retail purchaser) effect at the time of approval for
printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications
ADDRESS or design at any time without notice
STREET and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
０７／０５／１７０８：３８：３７３１ＳＪＡ６３００００２
Introduction
Congratulations on your selection of the 2008 Acura RL. We are certain you As you read this manual, you will
will be pleased with your purchase of one of the finest luxury vehicles in the find information that is preceded by
world. a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to avoid damage to your vehicle, other
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and property, or the environment.
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the

instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
i
０７／０５／１７０８：３８：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００００３
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
ii
０７／０５／１７０８：３８：５７３１ＳＪＡ６３００００４
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
iii
０７／０５／１７０８：３９：００３１ＳＪＡ６３００００５
０７／０５／１７０８：３９：１４３１ＳＪＡ６３００００６
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 4
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 7
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ........ 59
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink, and other convenience items) ................ 197
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 327
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 345
Maintenance (minders, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage) ................................................ 385
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses) ................................................ 431
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) .............................................. 461
Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ........................ 477
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 481
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
INDEX
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ................................................... last page
1
０７／０５／１７０８：３９：１７３１ＳＪＡ６３００００７
2
０７／０５／１７０８：３９：３９３１ＳＪＡ６３００００８
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Technical Information

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load and technical information.
luggage and other cargo.
Your Vehicle at a Glance Warranty and Client Relations
A quick reference to the main Driving (U.S. and Canada only)
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, A summary of the warranties
shift the transmission, and park; plus covering your new vehicle, and how
Driver and Passenger Safety what you need to know if you’re to contact us for any reason. Refer to
Important information about the planning to tow a trailer. your warranty manual for detailed
proper use and care of your vehicle’s information.
seat belts, an overview of the Maintenance
supplemental restraint system, and The maintenance minder shows you Authorized Manuals
valuable information on how to when you need to take your vehicle (U.S. only)
protect children with child restraints. to the dealer for maintenance service. How to order manuals and other
There is also a list of things to check technical literature.
Instruments and Controls and instructions on how to check
Explains the purpose of each them. Index
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the Taking Care of the Unexpected Service Information Summary
dashboard and steering column. This section covers several problems A summary of the information you
motorists sometimes experience, need when you pull up to the fuel
Features and details how to handle them. pump.
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.
3
０７／０５／１７０８：３９：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００００９
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER’S FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL CEILING MIRROR CONTROL

AIRBAG (P.11, 26) INDICATORS (P.62) CONSOLE＊1 AUTO BUTTON
DRIVING POSITION (P.158)
MEMORY SYSTEM
(P.160) PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG
(P.11, 26)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
POWER DOOR (P.198)
LOCK MASTER
SWITCH
(P.152) AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.207)
INTERFACE DIAL
POWER WINDOW (P.199, 207, 243)
SWITCHES COMPASS SYSTEM＊2
(P.181) (P.242)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.349)
＊1:
HOMELINK BUTTONS (P.295) ACCESSORY
MOONROOF SWITCH (P.184) TRUNK RELEASE POWER SOCKETS
POWER REAR BUTTON (P.192)
SUNSHADE BUTTON (P.194) (P.153)
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HOOD RELEASE LEVER
TILT BUTTON (P.157) BUTTON (P.331)
＊2: RL models (P.329)
4
０７／０５／１７０８：３９：５６３１ＳＪＡ６３０００１０
PADDLE SHIFTERS INSTRUMENT WINDSHIELD HAZARD WARNING

(P.351) PANEL BRIGHTNESS WIPER/WASHER BUTTON PASSENGER AIRBAG

(P.145) (P.137) (P.145) OFF INDICATOR
HEADLIGHTS/ (P.35)
TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS REAR WINDOW
(P.140, 142) DEFOGGER BUTTON
(P.146)/
COLLISION MITIGATION HEATED MIRROR
BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) BUTTON (P.159)
OFF SWITCH＊2
(P.364) CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.277)/
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) ADAPTIVE CRUISE
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH CONTROL (ACC)
(P.378) BUTTONS＊2 (P.281, 285)
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING MULTI-INFORMATION
SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH＊2 BUTTONS (P.71)
(P.144) SEAT HEATER
HEADLIGHT WASHER SWITCHES (P.178)/
SWITCH＊3 (P.138) SEAT HEATER AND
HORN＊1 SEAT VENTILATION
BLUETOOTH DISTANCE
MIRROR CONTROLS HANDSFREELINK BUTTONS＊2 (P.179)
BUTTON＊2
(P.159) BUTTONS (P.309) (P.289, 294)
STEERING WHEEL STEERING WHEEL AUDIO VOICE CONTROL
ADJUSTMENTS (P.147) CONTROLS (P.239) BUTTONS＊4 (P.265)
＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : If equipped.
＊3 : Canadian models only
＊4 : Refer to the navigation system manual.
5
０７／０５／１７０８：３９：５９３１ＳＪＡ６３０００１１
6
０７／０５／１７０８：４０：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３０００１２
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 39
yourself and your passengers. It Tensioners ................................ 23 If You Must Drive with Several
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt E-pretensioners ........... 24 Children .................................... 41

explains how your airbags work. And Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 25 If a Child Requires Close
it tells you how to properly restrain Additional Information About Attention ................................... 41
infants and children in your vehicle. Your Airbags ............................ 26 Additional Safety Precautions .... 41
Airbag System Components ....... 26 Protecting Infants and Small
How Your Front Airbags Children .................................... 43
Work.......................................... 29 Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32 Protecting Small Children .......... 44
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 9 How Your Side Curtain Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 Airbags Work ........................... 34 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34 With LATCH ................................ 47
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 14 How the Side Airbag Off With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 49
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 15 Indicator Works ....................... 35 With a Tether ............................... 51
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 16 How the Passenger Airbag Protecting Larger Children ............ 52
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Off Indicator Works ................ 35 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 52
Belts ...................................... 17 Airbag Service .............................. 36 Using a Booster Seat ................... 53
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Additional Safety Precautions .... 37 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Position ................................. 18 Protecting Children − General Front .......................................... 54
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19 Guidelines ................................. 38 Additional Safety Precautions .... 55
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20 All Children Must Be Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56
Additional Information About Restrained ................................ 38 Safety Labels .................................... 57
Your Seat Belts ........................ 21 All Children Should Sit in a
Seat Belt System Components ... 21 Back Seat .................................. 39
7
０７／０５／１７０８：４０：１８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００１３
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety (see pages 38 − 55 ). Control Your Speed

recommendations throughout this Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. Be Aware of Airbag Hazards crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page While airbags can save lives, they the higher the speed, the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the can cause serious or fatal injuries to risk, but serious injuries can also
most important. occupants who sit too close to them, occur at lower speeds. Never drive
or are not properly restrained. faster than is safe for current
Always Wear Your Seat Belt Infants, young children, and short conditions, regardless of the
A seat belt is your best protection in adults are at the greatest risk. Be maximum speed posted.
all types of collisions. Airbags are sure to follow all instructions and
designed to supplement seat belts, warnings in this manual. Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
not replace them. So even though Condition
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, Don’t Drink and Drive Having a tire blowout or a
make sure you and your passengers Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even mechanical failure can be extremely
always wear your seat belts, and one drink can reduce your ability to hazardous. To reduce the possibility
wear them properly (see page 17 ). respond to changing conditions, and of such problems, check your tire
your reaction time gets worse with pressures and condition frequently,
Restrain All Children every additional drink. So don’t drink and perform all regularly scheduled
Children age 12 and under should and drive, and don’t let your friends maintenance (see page 387 ).
ride properly restrained in a back drink and drive, either.
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
8
０７／０５／１７０８：４０：２７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００１４
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(8) (9) (3) (4) features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
(10) (6) (9) during a crash.

(1) Some features do not require any
(7) action on your part. These include a
(6) strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
(8) seat belts in a crash.
(2)
(7) (11) However, you and your passengers
(5) can’t take full advantage of these
(1) Safety Cage features unless you remain sitting in
(2) Crush Zones a proper position and always wear
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column features can contribute to injuries if
(6) Seat Belts they are not used properly.
(7) Front Airbags
(2) (8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags The following pages explain how you
(10) Door Locks can take an active role in protecting
＊ : On model with Collision Mitigation (11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/ yourself and your passengers.
Brake System (CMBS) Seat Belt E-pretensioners＊
9
０７／０５／１７０８：４０：４３３１ＳＪＡ６３０００１５
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and What You Should Do:
In addition, most states and all rollovers. Always wear your seat belt, and
Canadian provinces require you to make sure you wear it properly.
wear seat belts.
10
０７／０５／１７０８：４０：５２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００１６
Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
restraint system (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger,
chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear
passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 32 for more seating positions during a moderate
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags to severe side impact (see page
29 for more information on how work). 34 for more information on how
your front airbags work). your side curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
11
０７／０５／１７０８：４１：０１３１ＳＪＡ６３０００１７
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
impacts, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.

To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
12
０７／０５／１７０８：４１：１３３１ＳＪＡ６３０００１８
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Your vehicle has door monitor

The following pages provide indicators on the multi-information
instructions on how to properly display to indicate when a specific
protect the driver, adult door or the trunk is not tightly closed.

passengers, and teenage children You will see the appropriate indicator
who are large enough and mature and the message for each condition.
enough to drive or ride in the front.
See pages 38 − 42 for important

guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
When the trunk is not tightly closed,
1. Close and Lock the Doors the ‘‘TRUNK OPEN’’ indicator will
After everyone has entered the stay on.
vehicle, be sure the doors are
closed and locked.
When one or more doors are not

tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’
indicator will stay on.
CONTINUED
13
０７／０５／１７０８：４１：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００１９
Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats

chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent

an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page 152 for how to lock the

When both the trunk and one or doors.
more doors are not tightly closed, Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
the ‘‘DOOR & TRUNK OPEN’’ rear as possible while allowing you to
indicator will stay on. maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
14
０７／０５／１７０８：４１：３４３１ＳＪＡ６３０００２０
If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious

wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to See page 155 for how to adjust the
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the front seats.
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 147 ). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
If you cannot get far enough away leaving ample space between your
from the steering wheel and still chest and the airbag cover in the
reach the controls, we recommend center of the steering wheel.
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
CONTINUED
15
０７／０５／１７０８：４１：４３３１ＳＪＡ６３０００２１
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their
death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are
back in the seat. in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints
rests against the occupant’s chest will help protect occupants from
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance the center of the back of your head
of sliding under the belt in a crash rests against the center of the See page 156 for how to adjust the
and being seriously injured. The restraint. head restraints.
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury. Have passengers with adjustable
head restraints adjust their restraints
See page 155 for how to adjust the properly as well. Taller persons
seat-backs. should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.
16
０７／０５／１７０８：４１：５３３１ＳＪＡ６３０００２２
5.Fasten and Position the Seat This spreads the forces of a crash
Belts over the strongest bones in your
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, upper body.
then tug on the belt to make sure the

belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious Improperly positioning the seat
injuries in a crash. belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of If the seat belt touches or crosses
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. your neck, or if it crosses your arm
This lets your strong pelvic bones instead of your shoulder, you need to
take the force of a crash and reduces adjust the seat belt anchor height.
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again

to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
CONTINUED
17
０７／０５／１７０８：４２：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３０００２３
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting

RELEASE
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
BUTTON behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
If a seat belt does not seem to work important that they continue to sit
properly, it may not protect the upright, well back in their seats, with
occupant in a crash. their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
No one should sit in a seat with an off.
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can Sitting improperly can increase the
result in serious injury or death. chance of injury during a crash. For
The front seats have adjustable seat Have your dealer check the belt as example, if an occupant slouches,
belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible. lies down, turns sideways, sits
an anchor, press and hold the release forward, leans forward or sideways,
buttons, and slide the anchor up or See page 21 for additional or puts one or both feet up, the
down as needed (it has four information about your seat belts chance of injury during a crash is
positions). and how to take care of them. greatly increased.
18
０７／０５／１７０８：４２：１２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００２４
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding

vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries

to both you and your unborn child
Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an
position can result in serious inflating front airbag.
injury or death in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
Always sit upright, well back in your doctor if it’s okay for you to
the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
floor. protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
19
０７／０５／１７０８：４２：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３０００２５
Additional Safety Precautions Keep your hands and arms away

Two people should never use the from the airbag covers. If your
same seat belt. If they do, they hands or arms are close to an
could be very seriously injured in a airbag cover, they could be injured
crash. if the airbag inflates.
Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on

belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper
reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
the belt and increase the chance of propelled inside the vehicle and
serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or

between yourself and a front near a door. If a side airbag or a
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object
a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.
20
０７／０５／１７０８：４２：３１３１ＳＪＡ６３０００２６
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components The seat belt system If either the driver or a front
Your seat belt system includes lap/ includes an indicator on the passenger does not fasten their seat
shoulder belts in all five seating instrument panel and a beeper to belt while driving, the beeper will
positions. The front seat belts are remind you and your passengers to sound and the indicator will flash

also equipped with automatic seat fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals.
belt tensioners and, on models with
collision mitigation brake system This system monitors the front seat You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
(CMBS), seat belt e-pretensioners. belts. If you turn the ignition switch BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
to the ON (II) position before your SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
This system uses the same sensors seat belt is fastened, the beeper will information display (see page 79 ).
as the front airbags to monitor sound and the indicator will flash. If
whether the front seat belts are your seat belt is not fastened before When no one is sitting in the front
latched or unlatched, and how much the beeper stops, the indicator will passenger’s seat, or a child or small
weight is on the front passenger’s stop flashing but remain on. adult is riding there, the indicator
seat (see pages 31 and 32 ). should not come on and the beeper
If a front passenger does not fasten should not sound.
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
CONTINUED
21
０７／０５／１７０８：４２：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００２７
If the indicator comes on or the Lap/Shoulder Belt To unlock the belt, press the red
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat The lap/shoulder belt goes over PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
belt is latched and there is no front your shoulder, across your chest, the belt across your body so that it
seat passenger and no items on the and across your hips. retracts completely. After exiting the
front seat, something may be vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
interfering with the monitoring To fasten the belt, insert the latch way and will not get closed in the
system. Look for and remove: plate into the buckle, then tug on the door.
belt to make sure the buckle is
Any items under the front latched (see page 17 for how to All seat belts have an emergency
passenger’s seat. properly position the belt). locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
Any object(s) hanging on the seat your seat while it keeps some
or in the seat-back pocket. tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
Any object touching the rear of automatically locks the belt to help
the seat-back. restrain your body.
If no obstructions are found, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer.
22
０７／０５／１７０８：４２：５３３１ＳＪＡ６３０００２８
The seat belts in all positions except Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to
the driver’s have a lockable retractor activate in any collision severe
that must be activated to secure a enough to cause the front airbags to
child seat (see page 49 ). deploy.

If the shoulder part of the belt is If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
pulled all the way out, the lockable deploys during a side impact, the
retractor will activate. The belt will tensioner on that side of the vehicle
retract, but it will not allow the will also deploy.
passenger to move freely.
The tensioners can also be activated
To deactivate the lockable retractor, during a collision in which the front
unlatch the buckle and let the seat airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
belt fully retract. To refasten the airbags would not be needed, but the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as For added protection, the front seat additional restraint could be helpful.
needed. belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated, When the tensioners are activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten the seat belts will remain tight until
the belts to help hold the driver and they are unbuckled.
a front passenger in position.
23
０７／０５／１７０８：４３：０２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００２９
Seat Belt e-pretensioners If your vehicle gets too close to the The e-pretensioners do not activate
vehicle ahead of it in your lane, the when the seat belts are not worn or
driver’s e-pretensioner slightly when the vehicle stability assist
retracts the seat belt to alert the (VSA) off indicator on the
driver of the approaching vehicle. If instrument panel is on.
a collision with the vehicle in front of
you is likely, the e-pretensioners on If the automatic seat belt tensioners
both front seats retract the seat belts are activated by a collision, both
with enough force to properly front seat belts and all related
restrain you and your front components must be
passenger. After they activate, the replaced (see page 25 ). If only the
e-pretensioners release the retracted e-pretensioners were activated, no
seat belts. components need to be replaced.
On models with Collision Mitigation To get the full benefit of the In addition, the front passenger’s
Brake System e-pretensioners, you and your front e-pretensioner does not activate
For added safety, the front seat belts passenger must sit normally in your when the passenger’s airbag is
are equipped with e-pretensioners seats and wear your seat belts automatically turned off because the
that work in combination with the properly (see page 17 ). weight sensor detects a child in the
collision mitigation brake system front passenger’s seat.
(CMBS) (see page 361 ) and the
brake pedal assist function (see page
358 ).
24
０７／０５／１７０８：４３：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３０００３０
Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A
condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious

Pull each belt out fully, and look for of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check do not work properly when
that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the needed.
the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace
not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
415 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Acura provides a limited warranty on

seat belts. See your Acura Warranty
Information booklet for details.
25
０７／０５／１７０８：４３：１７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００３１
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(8) (2)
(1) (10)
(5)
(1) Driver’s Airbag

(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit (9) (4)
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/
Seat Belt E-pretensioners＊ (3)
(5) Side Airbags (7)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor (5)
(7) Front Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors (6)
(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (9)
(9) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors (4)
＊ : On models with CMBS
26
０７／０５／１７０８：４３：２６３１ＳＪＡ６３０００３２
Your airbag system includes:

(14) Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s

(13) airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 29 ).
Two side airbags, one for the

driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
(12) backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 32 ).
(11)
Two side curtain airbags, one for
(13) each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
(11) E-pretensioner Control Unit＊ and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
(12) Front Impact Sensors CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second) (15) 34 ).
(14) Rear Safing Sensor
(15) Side Curtain Airbags
CONTINUED
27
０７／０５／１７０８：４３：３９３１ＳＪＡ６３０００３３
On models with CMBS, front seat A driver’s seat position sensor that An indicator on the instrument
belt e-pretensioners (see page 24 ). monitors the distance of the seat panel that alerts you to a possible
from the front airbag. If the seat is problem with your airbags,
Automatic front seat belt too far forward, the airbag will sensors, seat belt tensioners (see
tensioners (see page 23 ). inflate with less force (see page page 34 ), or, on models with
31 ). CMBS, seat belt e-pretensioners
Sensors that can detect a (see page 24 ).
moderate to severe front impact or Weight sensors that monitor the
side impact. weight on the front passenger’s An indicator on the instrument
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs panel that alerts you that the
Sensors that can detect whether a (29 kg) or less (the weight of an passenger’s side airbag has been
child is in the passenger’s side infant or small child), the turned off (see page 35 ).
airbag path and signal the control passenger’s front airbag will be
unit to turn the airbag off (see turned off (see page 31 ). An indicator on the dashboard that
page 33 ). alerts you that the passenger’s
A sophisticated electronic system front airbag has been turned off
Sensors that can detect whether that continually monitors and (see page 35 ).
the driver’s seat belt and the front records information about the
passenger’s seat belt are latched sensors, the control unit, the Emergency backup power in case
or unlatched (see page 21 ). airbag activators, the seat belt your vehicle’s electrical system is
tensioners, and driver and front disconnected in a crash.
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
28
０７／０５／１７０８：４３：５１３１ＳＪＡ６３０００３４
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags will
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front The total time for inflation and
inflate the driver’s and front seat, or if the advanced airbag deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
passenger’s airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger’s fast that most occupants are not
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 31 ). aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED
29
０７／０５／１７０８：４４：００３１ＳＪＡ６３０００３５
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
looks like smoke. This is actually Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
powder from the airbag’s surface. airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
Although the powder is not harmful, inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
people with respiratory problems sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
may experience some temporary depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of wearing a seat belt or not.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do In a more severe crash, both stages
so. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
ignite first, then the second stage protection.
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
30
０７／０５／１７０８：４４：１３３１ＳＪＡ６３０００３６
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work

properly: DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION PASSENGER’S
Occupants must sit upright and SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
wear their seat belts properly. SENSOR
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any objects or metal items sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Acura does
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will not encourage carrying an infant or
inflate with less force, regardless of small child in front, if the sensors
Back-seat passengers should not the severity of the impact. detect the weight of an infant or
put their feet under the front seats. small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29
If there is a problem with the sensor, kg), the system will automatically
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS indicator will come on, and turn the passenger’s front airbag off.
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal
them from working properly. manner regardless of the driver’s Be aware that objects placed on the
seating position. passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off. CONTINUED
31
０７／０５／１７０８：４４：２４３１ＳＪＡ６３０００３７
When the airbag is turned off, a Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in back against cargo on the seat or
the center of the dashboard comes floor behind it.
on (see page 35 ).
Hanging heavy items on the front
If the weight sensors detect there is passenger seat, or placing heavy
no passenger in the front seat, the items in the seat-back pocket.
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will Also, make sure the floor mat behind
not come on. the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
To ensure that the passenger’s 416 ). If it is not, the mat may
advanced front airbag system will interfere with the proper operation
work properly, do not do anything of the sensors and operation of the
that would increase or decrease the seat. If you ever have a moderate to
weight on the front passenger’s seat. severe side impact, sensors will
This includes: detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
A rear passenger pushing or either the driver’s or the passenger’s
pulling on the back of the front side airbag and activate the seat belt
passenger’s seat. tensioner on the affected side.
32
０７／０５／１７０８：４４：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３０００３８
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 35 ), have the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s system designed primarily to protect passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger’s passenger is out of the airbag’s

is no passenger. seat. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Acura does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the
should wear their seat belts and sit position sensors detect a child has There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. leaned into the side airbag’s the moment the passenger moves
deployment path, the airbag will shut into or out of the airbag deployment
off. path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a A front seat passenger should not
larger adult slouches and leans use a cushion or other object as a
sideways into the airbag’s backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
deployment path. system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front

passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
33
０７／０５／１７０８：４４：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００３９
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s How the SRS Indicator Works
Work side, the passenger’s side curtain The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags, seat belt
tensioners, and, on models with
To get the best protection from the CMBS, seat belt e-pretensioners.
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit When you turn the ignition switch to
upright and well back in their seats. the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG If the indicator comes on at any

other time, or does not come on at all,
In a moderate to severe side impact, you should have the system checked
sensors will detect rapid acceleration by your dealer. For example:
and signal the control unit to If the SRS indicator does not come
instantly inflate the side curtain on after you turn the ignition
airbag and activate the seat belt switch to the ON (II) position.
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or

flashes on and off while you drive.
34
０７／０５／１７０８：４４：５８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００４０
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK How the Side Airbag Off How the Passenger Airbag Off
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the Indicator Works Indicator Works
multi-information display (see page U.S. Canada
78 ).

If you see any of these indications, This indicator alerts you that the
the airbags and seat belt tensioners passenger’s side airbag has been
U.S. Canada
may not work properly when you automatically shut off. It does not
need them. mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to

Ignoring the SRS indicator can the ON (II) position, the indicator
result in serious injury or death should come on briefly and go out PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
if the airbag systems or (see page 63 ). If it does not come on,
tensioners do not work properly. stays on, or comes on while driving This indicator alerts you that the
without a passenger in the front seat, passenger’s front airbag has been
Have your vehicle checked by a you will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER shut off because weight sensors
dealer as soon as possible if SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
the SRS indicator alerts you to multi-information display. Have the (the weight of an infant or small
a possible problem. system checked (see page 79 ). child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
35
０７／０５／１７０８：４５：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３０００４１
Be aware that objects placed on the If the indicator comes on with no Airbag Service
front seat can cause the indicator to front seat passenger and no objects Your airbag systems are virtually
come on. on the seat, or with an adult riding maintenance free, and there are no
there, something may be interfering parts you can safely service.
If no weight is detected in the front with the weight sensors. Look for However, you must have your
seat, the airbag will be automatically and remove: vehicle serviced if:
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on. Any items under the front An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
passenger’s seat. that has deployed must be
The passenger airbag off indicator replaced along with the control
may come on and off repeatedly if Any object hanging on the seat or unit and other related parts. Any
the total weight on the seat is near in the seat-back pocket. seat belt tensioner that activates
the airbag cutoff threshold. must also be replaced.
Any object touching the rear of
If an adult or teenage passenger is the seat-back. Do not try to remove or replace
riding in front, move the seat as far any airbag by yourself. This must
to the rear as possible, and have the If no obstructions are found, have be done by an authorized dealer or
passenger sit upright and wear the your vehicle checked by a dealer as a knowledgeable body shop.
seat belt properly. soon as possible.
36
０７／０５／１７０８：４５：２１３１ＳＪＡ６３０００４２
The SRS indicator alerts you to a Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat-
problem. Take your vehicle to an Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting
authorized dealer as soon as airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing
possible. If you ignore this seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers

indication, your airbags may not protection. can prevent your side airbags from
operate properly. inflating during a side impact.
Do not tamper with airbag
If your vehicle has a moderate to components or wiring for any Do not expose the front passenger’s
severe impact. Even if your reason. Tampering could cause seat-back to liquid. If water or
airbags do not inflate, your dealer the airbags to deploy, possibly another liquid soaks into the seat-
should inspect the driver’s seat causing very serious injury. back, it can prevent the side airbag
position sensor, the front cutoff system from working
passenger’s weight sensors, the Do not remove or modify a front properly.
front seat belt tensioners, and all seat without consulting your
seat belts worn during a crash to dealer. This could make the
make sure they are operating driver’s seat position sensor or the
properly. front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Acura
Client Services at 800-382-2238.
37
０７／０５／１７０８：４５：３１３１ＳＪＡ６３０００４３
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 52 − 55 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 43 − 51 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
38
０７／０５／１７０８：４５：４４３１ＳＪＡ６３０００４４
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
aged 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system that
restrained in a back seat. Some automatically turns the passenger’s Larger Children
states have laws restricting where front airbag off (see page 35 ), Children who have outgrown child
children may ride. please follow these guidelines: seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
Children who ride in back are less Infants front airbag. Whenever possible,
likely to be injured by striking Never put a rear-facing child seat in larger children should sit in the back
interior vehicle parts during a the front seat of a vehicle equipped seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
collision or hard braking. Also, with a passenger’s front airbag. If be properly restrained with a seat
children cannot be injured by an the airbag inflates, it can hit the back belt (see page 52 for important
inflating front airbag when they ride of the child seat with enough force information about protecting larger
in the back. to kill or very seriously injure an children).
infant.
CONTINUED
39
０７／０５／１７０８：４６：００３１ＳＪＡ６３０００４５
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models DASHBOARD

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISORS
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
40
０７／０５／１７０８：４６：１４３１ＳＪＡ６３０００４６
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions
Children Attention Never hold an infant or child on
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put your lap. If you are not wearing a
children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front seat belt in a crash, you could be

If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the thrown forward and crush the
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child against the dashboard or a
front: attention. seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat from your arms and be seriously
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a hurt or killed.
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 52 ). attention to a child distracts the Never put a seat belt over yourself
driver from the important tasks of and a child. During a crash, the
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk. belt could press deep into the child
rear as possible (see page 155 ). and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If a child requires close physical
Have the child sit upright and well attention or frequent visual contact, Never let two children use the
back in the seat (see page 18 ). we strongly recommend that another same seat belt. If they do, they
adult ride with the child in a back could be very seriously injured in a
Make sure the seat belt is properly seat. The back seat is far safer for a crash.
positioned and secured (see page child than the front.
17 ).
41
０７／０５／１７０８：４６：２３３１ＳＪＡ６３０００４７
Use the childproof door locks to Make sure any unused seat belt Lock all doors and the trunk when
prevent children from opening the that a child can reach is buckled, your vehicle is not in use. Children
rear doors. This can prevent the lockable retractor is activated, who play in vehicles can
children from accidentally falling and the belt is fully retracted and accidentally get trapped inside.
out (see page 154 ). locked. If a child wraps a loose Teach your children not to play in
seat belt around their neck, they or around vehicles. Know how to
Do not leave children alone in a can be seriously or fatally injured. operate the emergency trunk
vehicle. Leaving children without (See pages 49 and 50 for how to opener and decide if your children
adult supervision is illegal in most activate and deactivate the should be shown how to use this
states and Canadian provinces, lockable retractor.) feature (see page 154 ).
and can be very hazardous.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
For example, infants and small transmitters out of the reach of
children left in a vehicle on a hot children. Even very young
day can die from heatstroke. A children learn how to unlock
child left alone with the key in the vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
ignition switch can accidentally set switch, and open the trunk, which
the vehicle in motion, possibly can lead to accidental injury or
injuring themselves or others. death.
42
０７／０５／１７０８：４６：３６３１ＳＪＡ６３０００４８
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-

facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly moving their seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking their
child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least It could also interfere with proper
one year old. operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
43
０７／０５／１７０８：４６：４９３１ＳＪＡ６３０００４９
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small
strongly recommend that you install child use the child seat until the child
the child seat directly behind the reaches the weight or height limit
front passenger’s seat, move the seat for the seat.
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get Child Seat Placement
a smaller rear-facing child seat. We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat Placing a forward-facing child seat in

in the front seat can result in the front seat of a vehicle equipped
serious injury or death during a with a passenger’s airbag can be
collision. hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type far forward, or the child’s head is
Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least 1 year old, and thrown forward during a collision, an
seat in the back seat, not the who fits within the child seat maker’s inflating airbag can strike the child
front. weight and height limits, should be with enough force to cause very
restrained in a forward-facing, serious or fatal injuries.
upright child seat.
Even with advanced front airbags
Of the different seats available, we that automatically turn the
recommend those that have a five- passenger’s front airbag off (see
point harness system as shown. page 31 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
44
０７／０５／１７０８：４７：００３１ＳＪＡ６３０００５０
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forward- Selecting a Child Seat In seating positions and vehicles not
facing child seat in the front, move When buying a child seat, you need equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as to choose either a conventional child compatible child seat can be installed
possible, and be sure the child seat is seat, or one designed for use with using a seat belt.

firmly secured to the vehicle and the the lower anchors and tethers for
child is properly strapped in the seat. children (LATCH) system. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
Conventional child seats must be seat should meet three
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, requirements:
Placing a forward-facing child whereas LATCH-compatible seats
seat in the front seat can result are secured by attaching the seat to 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
in serious injury or death if the hardware built into the two outer Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
front airbag inflates. seating positions in the back seat. Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
If you must place a forward- Since LATCH-compatible child seats
facing child seat in front, move are easier to install and reduce the 2. The child seat should be of the
the vehicle seat as far back as possibility of improper installation, proper type and size to fit the child.
possible, and properly restrain we recommend selecting this style. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
the child. facing for small children.
CONTINUED
45
０７／０５／１７０８：４７：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３０００５１
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3. The child seat should fit the Installing a Child Seat movement can be expected and
vehicle seating position (or After selecting a proper child seat should not reduce the child seat’s
positions) where it will be used. and a good place to install the seat, effectiveness.
there are three main steps in
Before purchasing a conventional installing the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try
child seat, or using a previously installing it in a different seating
purchased one, we recommend that 1. Properly secure the child seat to position, or use a different style of
you test the seat in the specific the vehicle. All child seats must be child seat that can be firmly secured.
vehicle seating position or positions secured to the vehicle with the lap
where the seat will be used. part of a lap/shoulder belt or with 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
the LATCH (lower anchors and Make sure the child is properly
tethers for children) system. A strapped in the child seat
child whose seat is not properly according to the child seat maker’s
secured to the vehicle can be instructions. A child who is not
endangered in a crash. properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child The following pages provide
seat, push and pull the seat guidelines on how to properly install
forward and from side-to-side to a child seat. A forward-facing child
verify that it is secure. seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
A child seat secured with a seat belt facing child seats.
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
46
０７／０５／１７０８：４７：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００５２
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with

BUTTON
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers

for children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH. LOWER
ANCHORS REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Push the rear head restraint tilt
anchor point. seat: button on the ceiling console to
pivot the head restraints down.
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
47
０７／０５／１７０８：４７：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３０００５３
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE
4. Place the child seat on the vehicle Other LATCH-compatible seats 6. Route the tether strap over the
seat, then attach the seat to the have a flexible-type connector as head restraint, then attach the
lower anchors according to the shown above. tether strap hook to the anchor,
child seat maker’s instructions. making sure the strap is not
5. Whatever type you have, follow twisted.
Some LATCH-compatible seats the child seat maker’s instructions
have a rigid-type connector as for adjusting or tightening the fit. 7. Tighten the strap according to the
shown above. seat maker’s instructions.
8. Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
48
０７／０５／１７０８：４７：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００５４
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
49
０７／０５／１７０８：４７：４９３１ＳＪＡ６３０００５５
To deactivate the lockable retractor

and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
50
０７／０５／１７０８：４７：５８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００５６
Installing a Child Seat with a 2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach
Tether the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS TETHER STRAP HOOK not twisted.

3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
COVER
ANCHOR ANCHOR
A child seat with a tether can be 1. After properly securing the child
installed in any seating position in seat with the lap/shoulder belt
the back seat, using one of the (see page 22 ), pivot the head
anchorage points shown above. restraint down (see page 156 ) and
route the tether strap over the
Since a tether can provide additional head restraint.
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
51
０７／０５／１７０８：４８：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００５７
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger’s front
belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
52
０７／０５／１７０８：４８：１９３１ＳＪＡ６３０００５８
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat to drive.

between the child’s neck and arm?
Booster seats can be high-back or
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as low-back. Whichever style you select,

possible, touching the child’s make sure the booster seat meets
thighs? federal safety standards (see page
45 ) and that you follow the booster
5. Will the child be able to stay seat maker’s instructions.
seated like this for the whole trip?
If a child who uses a booster seat
If you answer yes to all these must ride in front, move the vehicle
questions, the child is ready to wear seat as far back as possible and be
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If sure the child is wearing the seat
you answer no to any question, the belt properly.
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a A child may continue using a booster
back seat and use a booster seat seat until the tops of their ears are
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them even with the top of the vehicle’s or
properly without the booster. booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
Some states and Canadian provinces the lap/shoulder belt without a
also require children to use a booster booster seat.
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
53
０７／０５／１７０８：４８：３２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００５９
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely
Front while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to:
The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
Administration and Transport there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual,
Canada recommend that all children should consider. and make sure you understand all
age 12 and under be properly seat belt instructions and all safety
restrained in a back seat. Physical Size information.
Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 17 and 52 ). If most position.
frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a Have the child sit up straight, back
unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit against the seat, and feet on or
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front. near the floor.
of position.
Maturity Check that the child’s seat belt is
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must properly and securely positioned.
part of a larger child’s body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat Supervise the child. Even mature
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride. children sometimes need to be
injuries. reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
54
０７／０５／１７０８：４８：４０３１ＳＪＡ６３０００６０
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a

Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a

crash. seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the

same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
55
０７／０５／１７０８：４８：５０３１ＳＪＡ６３０００６１
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the trunk open, airflow can pull
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill trunk open, open all the windows and
follow the information on this page. you. set the climate control system as
shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the climate
change. control system as follows:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
underside. vehicle out of the garage.
56
０７／０５／１７０８：４９：１７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００６２
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels

carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard

to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
HOOD
U.S. models
RADIATOR CAP
Canadian models
CONTINUED
57
０７／０５／１７０８：４９：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３０００６３
Safety Labels
SUN VISORS
U.S. models
DOORJAMBS
Canadian models U.S. models Canadian models
58
０７／０５／１７０８：４９：４１３１ＳＪＡ６３０００６４
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations ............................ 60 Trunk............................................... 153
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel ............................. 61 Emergency Trunk Opener ....... 154
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 62 Childproof Door Locks ................. 154
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges .............................................. 70 Seats ................................................ 155
controls are within easy reach. Temperature Gauge .................... 70 Mirrors ............................................ 159
Fuel Gauge ................................... 70 Driving Position Memory

Multi-Information Display .............. 71 System......................................... 160
Controls Near the Steering Keyless Access System................. 163
Wheel .......................................... 136 Seat Heaters ................................... 178
Windshield Wipers and Seat Heaters and Seat
Washers ...................................... 137 Ventilation .................................. 179
Turn Signals and Headlights ........ 140 Power Windows ............................. 181
Fog Lights .................................. 142 Moonroof ........................................ 184
Daytime Running Lights .......... 142 Parking Brake ................................ 187
Automatic Lighting Off Interior Convenience Items .......... 188
Feature .................................... 142 Glove Box ................................... 189
Adaptive Front Lighting System Beverage Holders ...................... 190
(AFS) ........................................... 143 Console Compartment .............. 191
Hazard Warning Button ................ 145 Sun Visors ................................... 192
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 145 Accessory Power Sockets......... 192
Rear Window Defogger ................ 146 Rear Ashtrays ............................ 193
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 147 Front Door Pockets ................... 193
Keys and Locks.............................. 149 Power Rear Sunshade ............... 194
Immobilizer System....................... 150 Integrated Sunshades ............... 195
Ignition Switch ............................... 151 Interior Lights ................................ 196
Door Locks ..................................... 152
59
０７／０５／１７０８：４９：４８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００６５
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL CEILING CONSOLE＊1 MIRROR CONTROL

INDICATORS (P.62) AUTO BUTTON
GAUGES (P.70) (P.158) CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
DRIVING POSITION (P.198)
MEMORY SYSTEM
(P.160)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.207)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH INTERFACE DIAL
(P.152) (P.199)
COMPASS SYSTEM＊2
(P.242)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.181) AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.349)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKETS
(P.192)
＊1 :
HOMELINK BUTTONS (P.295)
MOONROOF SWITCH (P.184)
POWER REAR TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
SUNSHADE BUTTON (P.194) (P.153) HOOD RELEASE LEVER
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE (P.331)
TILT BUTTON (P.157) BUTTON
＊2 : RL models (P.329)
60
０７／０５／１７０８：４９：５８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００６６
Instrument Panel
KEYLESS ACCESS VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.65) /
SYSTEM INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.65, 377) ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
(P.68) INDICATOR＊ (P.66, 280)
VSA HIGH BEAM
CHARGING SYSTEM ACTIVATION INDICATOR ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.65) SYSTEM (AFS) INDICATOR＊ (P.69, 143)
(P.62, 447) (P.377)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.64) SYSTEM (ABS)
INDICATOR (P.64, 359)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.65) SIDE AIRBAG OFF
MESSAGE INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.35, 63)
(P.68) ELECTRONICALLY
SECURITY SYSTEM CONTROLLED
INDICATOR (P.69) POWER STEERING
SYSTEM (ECPS)
MULTI-INFORMATION INDICATOR (P.68)
DISPLAY (P.71) PARKING BRAKE
AND BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.63, 449)
COLLISION MITIGATION SEAT BELT REMINDER

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) INDICATOR (P.21, 62)
LAMP (P.62, 448) INDICATOR＊ (P.69) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
LOW OIL PRESSURE LOW FUEL INDICATOR (SRS) INDICATOR (P.34, 63)
INDICATOR (P.62, 447) (P.66)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
SH-AWD INDICATOR (P.66) LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.64)
(P.67, 371)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
＊ : If equipped.
61
０７／０５／１７０８：５０：１２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００６７
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many If your front passenger does not Low Oil Pressure
indicators to give you important fasten their seat belt, the indicator Indicator
information about your vehicle. comes on about 6 seconds after the The engine can be severely damaged
ignition switch is turned to the ON if this indicator flashes or stays on
Seat Belt Reminder (II) position. when the engine is running, or if a
Indicator ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’
This indicator comes on when you If either of you do not fasten your message is on the multi-information
turn the ignition switch to the ON seat belt while driving, the beeper display. For more information, see
(II) position. It reminds you and your will sound and the indicator will flash page 447 .
passenger to fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals. For more
A beeper also sounds if you have not information, see page 21 . Charging System
fastened your seat belt. Indicator
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT If this indicator comes on when the
If you turn the ignition switch to the BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER engine is running, the battery is not
ON (II) position before fastening SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi- being charged, and you will also see
your belt, the beeper sounds and the information display (see page 79 ). a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’
indicator flashes. If you do not fasten message on the multi-information
your seat belt before the beeper display. For more information, see
stops, the indicator stops flashing page 447 .
but remains on.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 448 .
62
０７／０５／１７０８：５０：２６３１ＳＪＡ６３０００６８
U.S. Canada system. You will also see a Supplemental Restraint

‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or System Indicator
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’ This indicator comes on briefly when
Parking Brake and Brake System message on the multi-information you turn the ignition switch to the
Indicator display. For more information, see ON (II) position. If it comes on at
This indicator has two functions: page 449 . any other time, it indicates a

potential problem with your front
1. It comes on when you turn the U.S. Canada airbags. This indicator will also alert
ignition switch to the ON (II) you to a potential problem with your
position. It is a reminder to check side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
the parking brake. Driving with Side Airbag Off Indicator automatic cutoff system, side curtain
the parking brake not fully This indicator comes on when you airbags, automatic seat belt
released can damage the rear turn the ignition switch to the ON tensioners driver’s seat position
brakes, axles, and tires. (II) position. If it comes on at any sensor, the front passenger’s weight
If you drive without releasing the other time, it indicates that the sensors, or, on models with ACC,
parking brake, a beeper will sound, passenger’s side airbag has seat belt e-pretensioners. You will
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE automatically shut off. You will also also see a ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
the multi-information display (see OFF’’ message on the multi- information display (see page 78 ).
page 78 ). information display (see page 79 ). For more information, see page 35 .
For more information, see page 35 .
2. If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, it can
indicate a problem in the brake
63
０７／０５／１７０８：５０：３８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００６９
Lights On Indicator If you use the remote, this indicator SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
blinks several times when you turn information display (see page 78 ).
This indicator reminds you that the the ignition switch from For more information, see page 359 .
exterior lights are on. It comes on ACCESSORY (I) to the LOCK (0)
when the light switch is in either the position. Turn Signal and
or position. This indicator Hazard Warning
will also come on when the light If you use the built-in key, this Indicators
switch is in AUTO and the lights indicator blinks several times when The left or right turn signal indicator
turn on automatically. If you turn the you turn the ignition switch from ON blinks when you signal a lane change
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (II) to the ACCESSORY (I) position. or turn. If the indicator does not
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without blink or blinks rapidly, it usually
turning off the light switch, this Anti-lock Brake System means one of the turn signal bulbs is
indicator will remain on. A reminder (ABS) Indicator burned out (see page 410 ). Replace
chime will also sound when you open This indicator normally comes on for the bulb as soon as possible, since
the driver’s door. a few seconds when you turn the other drivers cannot see that you are
ignition switch to the ON (II) signaling.
Immobilizer System position, and when the ignition
Indicator switch is turned to the START (III) When you press the hazard warning
This indicator comes on for a few position. If this indicator comes on at button, both turn signals blink. All
seconds when you turn the ignition any other time, there is a problem in turn signals on the outside of the
switch to the ON (II) position. It will the ABS. If this happens, take the vehicle should flash.
then go off if you have a properly- vehicle to your dealer to have it
coded remote. If it is not a properly- checked. With this indicator on, your
coded remote, the indicator will blink vehicle still has normal braking
and the engine will not start (see ability but no anti-lock function. You
page 150 ). will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
64
０７／０５／１７０８：５０：５７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００７０
Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator Fog Light Indicator

(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator has three functions: This indicator comes on when you
a few seconds when you turn the turn on the fog lights. For more
ignition switch to the ON (II) 1. It comes on as a reminder that you information, see page 142 .
position. have turned off the vehicle

stability assist (VSA) system. High Beam Indicator
If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or it does not come on 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see This indicator comes on with the
when you turn the ignition switch to page 377 ). high beam headlights. For more
the ON (II) position, there is a information, see page 140 .
problem with the VSA system. You 3. It comes on along with the VSA
will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA system indicator if there is a This indicator also comes on with
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- problem with the VSA system. reduced brightness when the
information display (see page 78 ). You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA daytime running lights (DRL) are on
Take your vehicle to a dealer to have SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- (see page 142 ).
it checked. Without VSA, your information display (see page 78 ).
vehicle still has normal driving ability, Cruise Main Indicator
but will not have VSA traction and This indicator normally comes on for
stability enhancement. For more a few seconds when you turn the On models without adaptive cruise
information, see page 378 . ignition switch to the ON (II) control (ACC)
position. For more information, see This indicator comes on when you
page 378 . turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel (see page 277 ).
65
０７／０５／１７０８：５１：１０３１ＳＪＡ６３０００７１
Adaptive Cruise Control Low Fuel Indicator Super Handling-All

(ACC) Indicator Wheel Drive (SH-AWD)
On models with adaptive cruise control Indicator
(ACC) This indicator normally comes on for
This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II)
ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If this indicator comes on at
position. any other time, there is a problem in
the SH-AWD system. You will also
When you push the ACC button on see a ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
the steering wheel, this indicator message on the multi-information
comes on green. You will also see display (see page 78 ). Take your
‘‘ACC’’ on the multi-information LOW FUEL INDICATOR vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
display. For more information, see page 356 .
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It If the indicator blinks while driving,
If the indicator comes on orange, comes on as a reminder that you pull to the side of the road when it is
there is a problem with the ACC must refuel soon. You will also see a safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
system. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multi- idle until the indicator goes out.
ACC SYSTEM’’ message on the information display (see page 79 ). If it comes on while driving, it
multi-information display (see page When the indicator comes on, there indicates the differential
79 ). Take your vehicle to your is about 2.69 U.S. gal (10.2 ) of fuel temperature is too high.
dealer to have it checked. For more remaining in the tank before the You will also see a ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF
information, see page 280 . needle reaches E. There is a small TEMP. HIGH’’ message on the
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank multi-information display (see page
when the needle does reach E. 78 ).
66
０７／０５／１７０８：５１：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００７２
Pull to the side of the road when it is You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE If equipped
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine PRESSURE’’ message on the multi- Your vehicle has Michelin PAX tires.
idle until the indicator goes out. information display (see page 79 ). Repair or replacement of PAX tires
must be done by an Acura dealer or
Check the tire pressure monitor on an authorized Michelin PAX system
the multi-information display and dealer. For more information, see

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD determine the cause (see page 373 ). page 426 .
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system. If this happens, pull to the side of the 2. If this indicator begins to flash,
road when it is safe, check which tire there is a problem with the tire
Low Tire Pressure/ has lost pressure on the multi- pressure monitoring system
TPMS Indicator information display, and determine (TPMS). You will also see a
This indicator normally comes on for the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
a few seconds when you turn the have the flat tire repaired as soon as message on the multi-information
ignition switch to the ON (II) possible. If two or more tires are display. The indicator continues to
position. underinflated, call a professional flash for a while (approximately 1
towing service. For more minute), then stays on. If this
This indicator has two functions: information, see page 459 . happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
1. If it comes on while driving, it For more information, see page
indicates that one or more of your 426 .
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
67
０７／０５／１７０８：５１：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３０００７３
Electronically Controlled restart the engine. Message Indicator

Power Steering System
(ECPS) Indicator Keyless Access System This indicator comes on when there
This indicator normally comes on Indicator is a system message on the multi-
when you turn the ignition to the ON This indicator normally comes on for information display. Press the INFO
(II) position and goes off after the a few seconds when you turn the button on the steering wheel (see
engine starts. If it comes on at any ignition switch to the ON (II) page 71 ) to see the message (see
other time, there is a problem with position. If it comes on at any other page 78 ).
the power steering system. You will time, it indicates that there is a
also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER problem with the system. You will Most of the time, this indicator
STEERING SYSTEM’’ message on also see a ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS comes on along with other indicators
the multi-information display (see ACCESS SYSTEM’’ message on the in the instrument panel such as the
page 78 ). If this happens, stop the multi-information display (see page seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
vehicle in a safe place, and turn off 79 ). For more information, see page indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
the engine. Reset the system by 176 .
restarting the engine, and watch this
indicator. If it does not go off or
comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the ECPS is turned off, which
could make the vehicle harder to
steer.
The indicator comes on when you
run the engine while the vehicle is
not moving. To turn the indicator off,
68
０７／０５／１７０８：５１：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００７４
Adaptive Front Lighting Security System Indicator reminder that you have turned off
System (AFS) Indicator the collision mitigation brake system
If equipped (CMBS).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the The CMBS indicator also comes on
ignition switch to the ON (II) if dirt or other debris blocks the

position. radar sensor in the front grille. You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK CMBS
It comes on as a reminder that you RADAR SENSOR’’ message on the
have turned off the adaptive front multi-information display. When you
lighting system (AFS). clean the radar sensor, the indicator
should go off the next time you turn
This indicator blinks when there is a SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR the ignition switch to the ON (II)
problem with the AFS system; you position.
will also see a ‘‘CHECK ADAPTIVE This indicator comes on when the
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM’’ security system is set. For more If the indicator comes on at any
message on the multi-information information, see page 276 . other time, there is a problem with
display (see page 78 ). If this the CMBS. You will also see a
happens, stop the vehicle in a safe Collision Mitigation ‘‘CHECK CMBS SYSTEM’’ message
place, turn the ignition switch to the Brake System (CMBS) on the multi-information display. If
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) Indicator this happens, take your vehicle to a
position, and restart the engine. If If equipped dealer, and have it checked. For
the indicator does not go off or This indicator normally comes on for more information, see page 365 .
blinks again, take your vehicle to a a few seconds when you turn the When this indicator is on, the CMBS
dealer to have it checked. For more ignition switch to the ON (II) is not working.
information, see page 143 . position. It also comes on as a
69
０７／０５／１７０８：５１：５５３１ＳＪＡ６３０００７５
Gauges
Fuel Gauge
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
or less than the actual amount.
The needle returns to the
bottom after you turn off the
ignition.
Avoid driving with an extremely low

f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
U.S. model is shown. FUEL GAUGE
Temperature Gauge upper end of the white section of the

This shows the temperature of the gauge. If it reaches the red (hot)
engine’s coolant. During normal mark, pull safely to the side of the
operation, the pointer should rise road. For more information, see page
from the bottom white mark to about 444 .
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
70
０７／０５／１７０８：５２：０２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００７６
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display in the

instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
position. Some of the messages help INFO (▲/▼)
you operate your vehicle more BUTTONS

comfortably. U.S. CANADA
Others help to keep you aware of the
periodic maintenance your vehicle
needs for continued trouble-free
driving. SEL
RESET
BUTTON
When you open the driver’s door, a
‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on the You can change the display and
multi-information display. When you customize your vehicle control
turn the ignition switch from the ON settings by pressing the SEL/RESET
(II) position to the ACCESSORY (I) or INFO buttons on the right side of
position, a ‘‘Goodbye’’ message is the steering wheel.
shown on the display.
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the lower part of the
multi-information display changes as
shown in the illustration, each time
you press the SEL/RESET button.
71
０７／０５／１７０８：５２：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３０００７７
Odometer Trip Meter When you reset Trip A, average fuel

economy A is reset at the same time.
When you reset Trip B, average fuel
economy B is reset.
In the customizing mode, you can set

Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset at the same time when you
refuel your vehicle (see page 100 ).
ODOMETER TRIP METER
The odometer shows the total This meter shows the number of
distance your vehicle has been miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven. It measures miles in U.S. driven since you last reset it. There
models and kilometers in Canadian are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
models. It is illegal under U.S. B. Each trip meter works
federal law and Canadian provincial independently, so you can keep track
regulations to disconnect, reset, or of two different distances.
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or To reset a trip meter, display it, then
kilometers indicated. press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
72
０７／０５／１７０８：５２：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００７８
Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the Engine Oil Life

front bumper. The temperature
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
U.S. surrounding traffic. This can cause

an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
CANADA your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed. ENGINE OIL LIFE
This shows the outside Fahrenheit You can adjust the outside This shows the remaining life of the
temperature in U.S. models, and temperature display (see page 97 ). engine oil. It shows 100% after the
Centigrade temperature in Canadian engine oil is replaced and the display
models. In certain weather conditions, is reset. The engine oil life is
temperature readings near freezing calculated based on engine operating
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is conditions and accumulated engine
forming on the road surface. revolutions. For more information,
see page 387 .
73
０７／０５／１７０８：５２：２９３１ＳＪＡ６３０００７９
Normal Display Messages

(II) position, the upper part of the
display changes, as shown in the
illustration, each time you press the If ON
U.S. CANADA
▼ button. If you press the ▲ button,
the display returns to the previous
message.
Press ▼ button
Press ▲ button
74
０７／０５／１７０８：５２：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００８０
Trip Computer RANGE AVG. SPEED

Along with the trip meter, the trip This shows the estimated distance This shows the average speed you
computer calculates these values: you can travel on the fuel remaining are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
in the fuel tank. This distance is for U.S. models or kilometers per
Instantaneous fuel mileage estimated from the fuel economy hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
Range you received over the last several

Elapsed Time miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada), When you reset Trip A, AVG.
Average Vehicle Speed so it will vary with changes in speed, SPEED is also reset.
Average Fuel Economy traffic, etc.
AVG. FUEL A/B
INST. MPG (U.S. models)/INST. When the battery is disconnected, or This shows your vehicle’s average
L/100km (Canadian models) you refuel, RANGE is also reset. fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
This shows your current fuel or liter/100 km (Canadian models)
mileage. ELAPSED TIME since you last reset the Trip A or
This shows the time passed traveled Trip B.
When you turn off the engine, INST. since you last reset it. When you turn
MPG or INST. L/100 km is also the ignition switch to the ON (II) You can customize the Trip A and
reset. position, ELAPSED TIME is reset. AVG. FUEL A reset condition on the
multi-information display (see page
You can customize the ELAPSED 99 ).
TIME reset condition on the multi-
information display (see page 101 ). The average fuel mileage will be
reset when you reset the trip meter,
or if the vehicle’s battery goes dead
or is disconnected.
75
０７／０５／１７０８：５２：５８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００８１
SH-AWD Torque Distribution Tire Pressure Monitor Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Monitor
U.S.
Canada
When the tire pressure monitor is You can receive or make phone calls
This monitor shows how much shown on the multi-information from your cell phone through your
torque is being delivered to each display, press the SEL/RESET vehicle’s Bluetooth
wheel. For more information, see button. The display changes as HandsFreeLink (HFL) system
page 356 . shown. without touching your cell phone.
You can see the pressure of each tire
in this monitor. If one or more tires
are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page 371 .
76
０７／０５／１７０８：５３：０８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００８２
To use the system, your cell phone Maintenance Messages Have your dealer do the indicated
and the HFL system must be linked. maintenance as soon as you see this
Not all cell phones are compatible message, and have them reset the
with this system. Refer to page display after completing the service.
308 for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to the HFL and how If you do not perform the indicated

to receive or make phone calls, or maintenance or do not reset the
visit the acura.com/handsfreelink display, the message changes to
website. ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when the
engine oil life becomes 0 %.
These messages appear on the multi-

information display each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
When the engine oil life reaches 15 %, (II) position.
the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ and the code for the For details on engine oil life and
maintenance items to be performed. maintenance messages, refer to page
386 .
When the engine oil life reaches 5 %,
the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUE Also refer to page 386 for important
NOW’’ along with the same maintenance safety precautions.
maintenance items.
77
０７／０５／１７０８：５３：２８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００８３
Message Display
When a problem is detected with See page
your vehicle, a message will be 64, 359
See page
shown on the multi-information
63, 449
display. See page
If this happens, refer to the 65, 377
applicable pages of this owner’s
manual, and follow the instructions. See page See page
449 69, 143
When there are several messages to
be shown, the system switches the See page See page
messages every 5 seconds. 62, 447 68
The message is shown until you
push the INFO (▲ or ▼) button. See page
To see the message again, press the 62, 448
See page
INFO (▲ or ▼) button, 5 seconds
66, 356
after the display disappears. See page
62, 447
Here is a list of messages shown on
the multi-information display: See page See page
348 349
See page See page

446 34, 63
78
０７／０５／１７０８：５３：５０３１ＳＪＡ６３０００８４
See page See page

280 389
See page
142
See page See page
364 375

U.S. See page See page
69, 361 373
See page
Canada 35, 63
See page See page
13 67, 373
See page See page See page

176 62 432

174 62 433

175 331 434
See page See page

404 66
CONTINUED
79
０７／０５／１７０８：５３：５７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００８５
See page
151
See page
151
80
０７／０５／１７０８：５４：１３３１ＳＪＡ６３０００８６
Customized Settings To enter the customizing mode,

With the multi-information display press and hold the INFO (▲/▼)
and the INFO (▲/▼) and SEL/ button for more than 3 seconds while
RESET buttons on the right side of the multi-information display is in its
the steering wheel, you can normal mode.
customize some vehicle control

settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or If you turn the ignition switch to the
‘‘DRIVER 2’’. If ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed, position, or move the shift lever out
customizing is not possible. of Park, the display will change to
the normal screen.
To have the driver’s ID detected,
make sure your remote is linked to You cannot customize the settings
the system (see Memory Position under these conditions: The first customizing menu is:
Link on page 104 ). Then use your When the keyless memory CHG SETTING (see page 87 )
remote to unlock the doors (see settings are off (see page 170 ). DEFAULT ALL (see page 85 )
Keyless Access Setup on page If you disconnect the battery, and
108 ). then do not unlock the door. Refer to the following table for a
When the multi-information brief summary of each customizable
To change the settings, the ignition display does not show the driver’s setting and its default. For more
switch must be in the ON (II) ID. information, refer to the page
position, and the vehicle must be number references in the table.
stopped with the transmission in
Park.
CONTINUED
81
０７／０５／１７０８：５４：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３０００８７
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY CUSTOMIZE GROUP CUSTOMIZE MENU Description CUSTOMIZE SET UP Page
CHG SETTING ACC SETUP PRE-RUNNING CAR Causes the system to beep when a ON＊1 90
(see page 87) (see page 89) DETECT BEEP vehicle ahead of you gets too close. OFF
ACC DISPLAY SPEED Changes the ACC display speed MPH＊2 previous 92
UNIT unit. km/h＊3 setting
METER SETUP LANGUAGE Changes the language used in the ENGLISH＊1 95
(see page 94) SELECTION display. FRENCH
SPANISH
ADJUST OUTSIDE Changes the outside temperature −5°F∼±0°F＊2∼5°F 97
TEMP. DISPLAY reading above or below its current −3°C∼±0°C＊3∼3°C
reading.
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL Causes trip meter A and the ON 99
RESET with REFUEL average fuel economy to reset OFF＊1
when you refuel.
ELAPSED TIME RESET Resets the elapsed time of your IGN OFF＊1 101
current trip. TRIP A
TRIP B
POSITION SETUP MEMORY POSITION Changes the driver’s seat, the ON＊1 104
(see page 103) LINK steering wheel, and the outside OFF
mirror positions to your stored
setting.
AUTO TILT & Moves the steering wheel fully in ON＊1 106
TELESCOPIC and out when the key is removed. OFF
＊1 : Default setting
＊2 : Default setting for U.S. models
＊3 : Default setting for Canadian model
82
０７／０５／１７０８：５４：２９３１ＳＪＡ６３０００８８
CHG SETTING KEYLESS ACCESS DOOR UNLOCK MODE Changes which doors unlock when DRIVER DOOR ＊ 109
(see page 87) SETUP you use the remote or grab the ALL DOORS
(see page 108) driver’s doorhandle.
KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT Causes some exterior lights to ON＊ 111
FLASH blink twice when you unlock the OFF

doors by grabbing the driver’s
door handle.
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP Cause the beeper to sound twice ON＊ 113
when you unlock the doors by OFF
grabbing the driver’s door handle.
LIGHTING SETUP INTERIOR LIGHT Changes how long (in seconds) 60 SEC 116
(see page 115) DIMMING TIME the interior lights stay on after you 30 SEC＊
close the doors. 15 SEC
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF Changes how long (in seconds) 60 SEC 118
TIMER the exterior lights stay on after 30 SEC 0 SEC
you close the driver’s door. 15 SEC＊
AUTO LIGHT Changes the light level that causes MAX 120
SENSITIVITY the headlights to come on. The HIGH MIN
headlight switch needs to be in the MID＊
AUTO position. LOW
DOOR/WINDOW AUTO DOOR LOCK Changes when the doors SHIFT FROM P 123
SETUP automatically lock. WITH VEH SPD＊
(see page 122) OFF
＊: Default setting
CONTINUED
83
０７／０５／１７０８：５４：３９３１ＳＪＡ６３０００８９
CHG SETTING DOOR/WINDOW AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Changes when the doors SHIFT TO P＊ 125
(see page 87) SETUP automatically unlock. IGN OFF
(see page 122) OFF
DOOR LOCK MODE Changes which doors unlock with the DRIVER DOOR ＊ 127
first push of the remote’s unlock ALL DOORS
button.
KEYLESS LOCK The exterior lights flash each time ON＊ 129
ACKNOWLEDGMENT you press the LOCK or UNLOCK OFF
button.
SECURITY RELOCK Changes how long it takes (in 90 SEC 131
TIMER seconds) for the doors to relock and 60 SEC
the security system to set after you 30 SEC＊
unlock the driver’s door without
opening it.
WIPER SETUP WIPER ACTION Changes the wiper operation among INTERMITTENT 134
(see page 133) two settings when the wiper switch is WITH VEH SPD＊
in the INT position.
DEFAULT ALL Changes all settings to the default. SET 85
(see page 85) CANCEL
＊: Default setting
84
０７／０５／１７０８：５４：４８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００９０
If you want the settings as they were DEFAULT ALL

when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on this page.
If you want to change any vehicle

control settings, select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
Use the INFO (▲/▼) button on the

steering wheel to select the settings
and the SEL/RESET button to enter
your selections.
If you want to set the default settings, If you want to cancel DEFAULT
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to ALL, select CANCEL, then press the
select DEFAULT ALL, then press SEL/RESET button. The screen
the SEL/RESET button. goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.
CONTINUED
85
０７／０５／１７０８：５４：５６３１ＳＪＡ６３０００９１
To set the default settings again, When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will If DEFAULT ALL is not set, you will
select DEFAULT ALL, and press the see the above display for several see the above display for several
SEL/RESET button. Then select seconds, then the screen returns to seconds, then the screen goes back
SET, and press the SEL/RESET CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. to the normal message mode. Repeat
button. the procedure to select DEFAULT
ALL.
86
０７／０５／１７０８：５５：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００９２
CHG SETTING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL While CHG SETTING in the

You can customize some of the SETUP CUSTOMIZE ENTRY is shown on
vehicle control settings to your METER SETUP the multi-information display, press
preference. Here are the settings POSITION SETUP the SEL/RESET button. The screen
you can customize: KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP changes to ACC SETUP in the
LIGHTING SETUP CUSTOMIZE GROUP.

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
WIPER SETUP Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown on the next page. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button, until you see
the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
CONTINUED
87
０７／０５／１７０８：５５：１４３１ＳＪＡ６３０００９３
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL SETUP
see page 89
METER SETUP
see page 94
POSITION
SETUP
see page 103
KEYLESS
ACCESS SETUP
see page 108
LIGHTING
SETUP
see page 115
DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP
see page 122
WIPER SETUP
Press the ▲ or ▼ button. see page 133
Press the SEL/RESET button.
88
０７／０５／１７０８：５５：２５３１ＳＪＡ６３０００９４
Adaptive Cruise Control Setup

If equipped
Here are the two custom settings for
adaptive cruise control (ACC):
PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT

BEEP
ACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT see page 90
While the multi-information display

is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP
screen, select ACC SETUP by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/

▼) button, the display changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
CONTINUED
89
０７／０５／１７０８：５５：３２３１ＳＪＡ６３０００９５
Pre-Running Car Detect Beep

When PRE-RUNNING CAR
DETECT BEEP is set to ON, one
beep sounds when the ACC detects a
vehicle in front of you. You also hear
a beep when that vehicle goes out of
the range of your vehicle’s radar
sensor.
While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The

is in the ACC SETUP of the screen changes as shown above.
CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the Select ON or OFF by pressing the
SEL/RESET button. The screen INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
changes to the above display. SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.
90
０７／０５／１７０８：５５：４０３１ＳＪＡ６３０００９６

When your choice is set, the display If you choice is not set, you will see To exit PRE-RUNNING CAR
changes to the screen shown above the above display for several seconds, DETECT BEEP without changing
for several seconds, and then goes then the screen goes back to the current setting, select EXIT by
back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
happens, you need to repeat the pre- then press the SEL/RESET button.
running car detect beep setup. The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.
CONTINUED
91
０７／０５／１７０８：５５：４８３１ＳＪＡ６３０００９７
Adaptive Cruise Control Display

Speed Unit
To change the unit of measurement
from mph to km/h, do this:

is in the ACC SETUP of the screen changes as shown above. The
CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the highlighted unit, mph or km/h, is
SEL/RESET button. The screen the current setting. To change the
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. setting, press the INFO (▲/▼)
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until button until the unit you want is
you see the above display. highlighted, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
92
０７／０５／１７０８：５５：５５３１ＳＪＡ６３０００９８

When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit ACC DISPLAY SPEED
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, UNIT without changing the current
then the screen goes back to then the screen goes back to setting, select EXIT by pressing the
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
happens, you need to repeat the ACC SEL/RESET button. The screen
display speed unit setup. goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
93
０７／０５／１７０８：５６：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３０００９９
Meter Setup
Here are the four custom settings
for the meter setup:
LANGUAGE SELECTION see page 95

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESET
with REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME RESET
see page 97
While METER SETUP is shown in
the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the
multi-information display, press the
SEL/RESET button.

▼) button, the screen changes as see page 99
94
０７／０５／１７０８：５６：１５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１００
Language Selection
There are three language selections
you can make: English, French, and
Spanish. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions:

While METER SETUP is shown in Select the desired language by
the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
multi-information display, press the then enter your selection by pressing
SEL/RESET button. You will see the the SEL/RESET button.
above display.
CONTINUED
95
０７／０５／１７０８：５６：２３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１０１
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit LANGUAGE SELECTION
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, without changing the current setting,
then the screen goes back to then screen goes back to select EXIT by pressing the INFO
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this (▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
happens, you need to repeat the RESET button. The screen goes
All messages on the multi- language selection setup. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
information display will be shown in
the language you selected.
96
０７／０５／１７０８：５６：３１３１ＳＪＡ６３００１０２
Adjust Outside Temp. Display

If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is a few
degrees above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by
following these instructions:

is in the METER SETUP of the screen changes as shown above. The
CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the highlighted number is the current
SEL/RESET button. The screen setting above or below the outside
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. temperature. Press the INFO (▲/
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until ▼) button repeatedly until the
you see the above display. number you want appears, then
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter your selection.
CONTINUED
97
０７／０５／１７０８：５６：３９３１ＳＪＡ６３００１０３
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, DISPLAY without changing the
then the screen goes back to then the screen goes back to current setting, select EXIT by
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
happens, you need to repeat the then press the SEL/RESET button.
adjust outside air temperature The screen goes back to
display setup. CUSTOMIZE MENU.
98
０７／０５／１７０８：５６：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３００１０４
Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset with Refuel

To cause trip A and average fuel
economy A to reset every time you
refuel your vehicle, follow these
instructions:

While METER SETUP is shown in Press the SEL/RESET button. The
the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the screen changes as shown above.
multi-information display, press the Select ON or OFF by pressing the
SEL/RESET button. The screen INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. SEL/RESET button to enter your
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until selection.
you see the above display.
CONTINUED
99
０７／０５／１７０８：５６：５４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１０５
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit TRIP A & AVG. FUEL
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, RESET with REFUEL without
then the screen goes back to then the screen goes back to changing the current setting, select
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this EXIT by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
happens, you need to repeat the trip button, then press the SEL/RESET
A and average fuel reset with refuel button. The screen goes back to
setup. CUSTOMIZE MENU.
100
０７／０５／１７０８：５７：０５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１０６
Elapsed Time Reset

There are three elapsed time reset
choices you can make:
IGN OFF − The elapsed time is

reset when you turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK (0) position.
TRIP A − The elapsed time is reset

when the Trip A is reset.
TRIP B − The elapsed time is reset

when the Trip B is reset.
While METER SETUP is shown in Press the SEL/RESET button. The
the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the screen changes as shown above.
multi-information display, press the Select the desired setting by
SEL/RESET button. The screen pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. then press the SEL/RESET button
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until to enter your selection.
CONTINUED
101
０７／０５／１７０８：５７：１２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１０７
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit ELAPSED TIME RESET
then the screen goes back to then the screen goes back to select EXIT by pressing the INFO
elapsed time reset setup. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
102
０７／０５／１７０８：５７：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１０８
Position Setup
There are two position setups you
can make:
MEMORY POSITION LINK

AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC

see page 104
screen, select POSITION SETUP by
and then press the SEL/RESET
button.


CONTINUED
103
０７／０５／１７０８：５７：３０３１ＳＪＡ６３００１０９
Memory Position Link

When Memory Position Link is set
to ON, the driver’s seat, the steering
wheel, and the outside mirror
positions move to the positions
stored in memory. To cause the
memory to activate, open the driver’s
door with the remote, or grab the
door handle while carrying the
remote.
To set the seat memory position, see

page 160 . For information on using
the remote, see page 170 . While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The
is in the POSITION SETUP screen screen changes as shown above.
of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press Select ON or OFF by pressing the
the SEL/RESET button. The screen INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
changes to the above display. SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.
104
０７／０５／１７０８：５７：３８３１ＳＪＡ６３００１１０

When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit MEMORY POSITION LINK
memory position link setup. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
CONTINUED
105
０７／０５／１７０８：５７：４５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１１１
Auto Tilt & Telescopic

When AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC
is set to ON, the steering wheel
automatically moves fully in and up
when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position and release it,
or when you remove the built-in key
from the ignition switch.

is in the POSITION SETUP screen screen changes as shown above.
of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press Select ON or OFF by pressing the
the SEL/RESET button. The screen INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. SEL/RESET button to enter your
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until selection.
106
０７／０５／１７０８：５７：５３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１１２

When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit AUTO TILT &
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, TELESCOPIC without changing the
happens, you need to repeat the auto then press the SEL/RESET button.
tilt and telescopic setup. The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.
107
０７／０５／１７０８：５８：０３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１１３
KEYLESS ACCESS Setup

There are three settings in the
keyless access setup:
DOOR UNLOCK MODE

KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH see page 109
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

screen, select KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button. see page 111

to enter your selection. see page 113
Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
108
０７／０５／１７０８：５８：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３００１１４
Door Unlock Mode

To select whether the driver’s door
or all doors unlock when you open
the driver’s door with the remote or
by grabbing the door handle (while
carrying the remote), follow these

instructions:

is in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP screen changes as shown above.
screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, Select DRIVER DOOR ONLY or
press the SEL/RESET button. The ALL DOORS by pressing the INFO
screen changes to the above display. (▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button to enter your
selection.
CONTINUED
109
０７／０５／１７０８：５８：１８３１ＳＪＡ６３００１１５
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit DOOR UNLOCK MODE
happens, you need to repeat the door RESET button. The screen goes
unlock mode setup. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
110
０７／０５／１７０８：５８：２７３１ＳＪＡ６３００１１６
Keyless Access Light Flash

When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
FLASH is set to ON, some exterior
lights blink twice when you unlock
the doors by grabbing the driver’s

remote.
The same exterior lights blink once

when you lock the doors by touching
the door lock sensor while carrying
the remote.

screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, Select ON or OFF by pressing the
press the SEL/RESET button. The INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
screen changes to CUSTOMIZE SEL/RESET button to enter your
MENU. Press the INFO (▲/▼) selection.
button until you see the above
display.
CONTINUED
111
０７／０５／１７０８：５８：３４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１１７
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, FLASH without changing the
keyless access light flash setup. The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.
112
０７／０５／１７０８：５８：４４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１１８
Keyless Access Beep

When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP is
set to ON, the beeper sounds twice
when you unlock the doors by
grabbing the drivers door handle
while carrying the remote.

When you lock the doors by
touching the door lock sensor while
carrying the remote, the beeper
sounds once.

press the SEL/RESET button. The INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
screen changes to CUSTOMIZE SEL/RESET button to enter your
display.
CONTINUED
113
０７／０５／１７０８：５８：５２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１１９
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
keyless access beep setup. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
114
０７／０５／１７０８：５９：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１２０
Lighting Setup
There are three settings in the
lighting setup:
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME

HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY see page 116
While CUSTOMIZE GROUP is

display, select LIGHTING SETUP by
then press the SEL/RESET button.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/ see page 118
CONTINUED
115
０７／０５／１７０８：５９：１２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１２１
Interior Light Dimming Time

The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors and the trunk. To
change how long the lights stay on
before they fade out, follow these
instructions:
While LIGHTING SETUP is shown Press the SEL/RESET button. The

in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the screen changes as shown above.
multi-information display, press the Select how long you want the lights
SEL/RESET button. You will see the to stay on before they fade out (60,
above display. 30, or 15 seconds) by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.
116
０７／０５／１７０８：５９：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００１２２

When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit INTERIOR LIGHT
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, DIMMING TIME without changing
then the screen goes back to then the screen goes back to the current setting, select EXIT by
interior light dimming time setup. The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.
CONTINUED
117
０７／０５／１７０８：５９：２７３１ＳＪＡ６３００１２３
Headlight Auto Off Timer

The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you close the driver’s
door and take the remote with you.
To change how long the lights stay
on before they go off, follow these
instructions:

is in the LIGHTING SETUP screen screen changes as shown above.
of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press Select how long you want the lights
the SEL/RESET button. The screen to stay on before they go off (0, 15,
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. 30, or 60 seconds) by pressing the
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
you see the above display. SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.
118
０７／０５／１７０８：５９：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１２４

When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, TIMER without changing the
headlight auto off timer setup. The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.
CONTINUED
119
０７／０５／１７０８：５９：４５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１２５
Auto Light Sensitivity

The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity
from the following five levels:
MAX −
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
HIGH −
somewhat bright. While LIGHTING SETUP is shown Press the SEL/RESET button. The
MID − in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the screen changes as shown above.
The headlights come on when it is as multi-information display, press the Select from five levels of sensitivity
bright as sunset or sunrise. SEL/RESET button. The screen by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
LOW − changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. then press the SEL/RESET button
The headlights come on when it is Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until to enter your selection.
somewhat dark. you see the above display.
MIN −
dark.
120
０７／０５／１７０８：５９：５３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１２６

When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
headlight auto light sensitivity setup. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
121
０７／０５／１７０９：００：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１２７
Door/Window Setup
There are five settings to choose
from in the door/window setup:
AUTO DOOR LOCK see page 123

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER see page 125
While CUSTOMIZE GROUP is

display, select DOOR/WINDOW
see page 127
SETUP by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button, and then press the SEL/
RESET button.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/ see page 129
then press the SEL/RESET button Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
see page 131
to enter your selection. Press the SEL/RESET button.
122
０７／０５／１７０９：００：１５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１２８
Auto Door Lock

There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move

the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEH SPD −

The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
15 km/h).
OFF − While DOOR/WINDOW SETUP is Press the SEL/RESET button. The

The auto door lock is deactivated all shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen changes as shown above.
the time. of the multi-information display, Select the desired setting by
press the SEL/RESET button. You pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
will see the above display. then press the SEL/RESET button
CONTINUED
123
０７／０５／１７０９：００：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１２９
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit AUTO DOOR LOCK without
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, changing the current setting, select
then the screen goes back to then the screen goes back to EXIT by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this button, then press the SEL/RESET
happens, you need to repeat the auto button. The screen goes back to
door lock setup. CUSTOMIZE MENU.
124
０７／０５／１７０９：００：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１３０
Auto Door Unlock

There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT TO P − The driver’s door or

all the doors, depending on the door

lock mode setting ( see page 127 ),
unlock when you move the shift
lever to Park.
IGN OFF − The driver’s door or all

the doors, depending on the door
lock mode setting ( see page 127 ),
unlock when you turn the ignition While DOOR/WINDOW SETUP is Press the SEL/RESET button. The
switch to the LOCK (0) position. shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen changes as shown above.
of the multi-information display, Select the desired setting by
OFF − The auto door unlock is press the SEL/RESET button. The pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
deactivated all the time. screen changes to CUSTOMIZE then press the SEL/RESET button
MENU. Press the INFO (▲/▼) to enter your selection.
display.
CONTINUED
125
０７／０５／１７０９：００：４０３１ＳＪＡ６３００１３１
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
happens, you need to repeat the auto RESET button. The screen goes
door unlock setup. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
126
０７／０５／１７０９：００：４８３１ＳＪＡ６３００１３２
Door Lock Mode

To select whether the driver’s door
unlocks or all the doors unlock when
you unlock the doors with the
remote, follow these instructions.

is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP screen changes as shown above.
screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, Select DRIVER DOOR or ALL
press the SEL/RESET button. The DOORS by pressing the INFO (▲/
screen changes to CUSTOMIZE ▼) button, then press the SEL/
MENU. Press the INFO (▲/▼) RESET button to enter your
button until you see above display. selection.
CONTINUED
127
０７／０５／１７０９：００：５５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１３３
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit DOOR LOCK MODE
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this (▲/▼) button, and then press the
happens, you need to repeat the door SEL/RESET button. The screen
lock mode setup. goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
128
０７／０５／１７０９：０１：０６３１ＳＪＡ６３００１３４
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

When you press the LOCK button
on the remote to lock the doors and
the trunk, and then press the button
again within 5 seconds, a beeper
sounds once and the exterior lights

blink once to verify that the doors
are locked and the security system is
set.
When you press the UNLOCK

button on the remote to unlock the
doors, the exterior lights blink twice
to verify that the doors are unlocked While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The
and the security system is turned off. is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP screen changes as shown above.
To turn this feature on or off, follow press the SEL/RESET button. The INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
these instructions. screen changes to CUSTOMIZE SEL/RESET button to enter your
display.
CONTINUED
129
０７／０５／１７０９：０１：１３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１３５
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit KEYLESS LOCK
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, ACKNOWLEDGMENT without
then the screen goes back to then the screen goes back to changing the current setting, select
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this EXIT by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
happens, you need to repeat the button, then press the SEL/RESET
keyless lock acknowledgment setup. button. The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.
130
０７／０５／１７０９：０１：２１３１ＳＪＡ６３００１３６
Security Relock Timer

When you unlock the doors by
pressing the UNLOCK button on the
remote or by grabbing the driver’s
remote, but do not open any door the

doors relock and the security system
sets within 30 seconds. To change
the relock time, follow these
instructions:

is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP screen changes as shown above.
screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, Select the relock time you want (90,
press the SEL/RESET button. The 60, or 30 seconds) by pressing the
screen changes to CUSTOMIZE INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
MENU. Press the INFO (▲/▼) SEL/RESET button to enter your
button until you see the above selection.
display.
CONTINUED
131
０７／０５／１７０９：０１：２９３１ＳＪＡ６３００１３７
When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit SECURITY RELOCK
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, TIMER without changing the
security relock timer setup. The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.
132
０７／０５／１７０９：０１：３８３１ＳＪＡ６３００１３８
Wiper Setup
The changeable setting under
WIPER SETUP is called WIPER
ACTION. To get into WIPER
ACTION, do this:

screen, select WIPER SETUP by
then press the SEL/RESET button. see page 134

WIPER ACTION, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button.

CONTINUED
133
０７／０５／１７０９：０１：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００１３９
Wiper Action
You can select from these two
settings when the wiper switch is in
the INT (intermittent) position:
INTERMITTENT − The
intermittent operation varies
according to the selection you make
on the wiper lever’s intermittent
control ring.
WITH VEH SPD − The intermittent

operation varies according to vehicle
speed. While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The
is in the WIPER SETUP screen of screen changes as shown above.
the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the Select INTERMITTENT or WITH
SEL/RESET button. The screen VEH SPD by pressing the INFO (▲/
changes to the above display. ▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button to enter your
selection.
134
０７／０５／１７０９：０１：５３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１４０

When your choice is set, you will see If your choice is not set, you will see To exit WIPER ACTION without
the above display for several seconds, the above display for several seconds, changing the current setting, select
then the screen goes back to then the screen goes back to EXIT by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this button, then press the SEL/RESET
happens, you need to repeat the button. The screen goes back to
wiper action setup. CUSTOMIZE MENU.
135
０７／０５／１７０９：０２：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１４１
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
INSTRUMENT WINDSHIELD WIPER/ HAZARD WARNING

PADDLE SHIFTERS PANEL BRIGHTNESS WASHER (P.137) BUTTON
(P.351) (P.145) (P.145)
HEADLIGHTS/ PASSENGER AIRBAG
TURN SIGNAL/FOG OFF INDICATOR
LIGHTS (P.140, 142) (P.35)
COLLISION MITIGATION
BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) REAR WINDOW
OFF SWITCH＊4 (P.364) DEFOGGER BUTTON
(P.146)/
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) HEATED MIRROR
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH BUTTON (P.159)
(P.378) CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.279)/
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH＊4 CONTROL (ACC)
(P.144) BUTTONS＊4 (P.280, 285)
HEADLIGHT WASHER MULTI INFORMATION
SWITCH＊2 (P.138) DISPLAY BUTTONS (P.71)
HORN＊1 SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
MIRROR CONTROLS BLUETOOTH
(P.158) HANDSFREELINK DISTANCE BUTTON (P.178)/
BUTTONS (P.309) (P.289) SEAT HEATER AND
SEAT VENTILATION BUTTONS＊4
STEERING WHEEL STEERING WHEEL VOICE CONTROL
ADJUSTMENTS (P.147) AUDIO CONTROLS (P.239) BUTTONS＊3 (P.265) (P.179)
＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : Canadian models only
＊3 : On models with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.
＊4 : If equipped.
136
０７／０５／１７０９：０２：１６３１ＳＪＡ６３００１４２
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to LO − The wipers run at low speed.
select a position.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.

OFF − The wipers are not activated.
INT − The length of the wipe

interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle speed.
To change the ‘‘WIPER ACTION’’

1. MIST setting, see page 134 .
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent If you turn it to the shortest delay,
4. LO − Low speed the wipers change to low speed
5. HI − High speed operation when the vehicle speed
6. Windshield washers exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
CONTINUED
137
０７／０５／１７０９：０２：２４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１４３
Windshield Washer − Pull back Headlight Washers The headlight washers use the same
and hold the wiper control lever. Canadian models only fluid reservoir as the windshield
The washers spray until you washers.
release the lever. The wipers run
at low speed, then complete one
more sweep after you release the
lever.
When you activate the windshield

washer with the headlight turned on,
the headlight washer will be
activated under certain conditions.
For more information, see Headlight
Washers section in the next column. HEADLIGHT WASHER SWITCH
The headlight washers can be

operated at any time by pressing the
headlight washer button located next
to the steering wheel column. The
headlights must be turned on to use
this button. In addition, the headlight
washer operates without pressing
the button, at the first time you turn
on the windshield washers after you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
138
０７／０５／１７０９：０２：３１３１ＳＪＡ６３００１４４
Wiper Arm Positions WIPER ARMS WIPER ARMS

The windshield wiper arms have two
parked positions: winter and summer.
In the winter position, the arms sit
slightly above the edge of the hood.
This reduces the possibility of

damage to the wiper arms or
windshield wiper motor by a build-up
of snow and ice.
HOLDING HOLDING
Winter position LOCATIONS Summer position LOCATIONS
Adjust the wiper arms to the winter To return to the summer position,
position by holding both arms as push the same area of both arms the
shown in the illustration at the same other direction.
time. Pull on the arm, parallel to the
windshield, until it locks in the
higher position.
A heavy build-up of snow or ice on

the wiper arms will cause them to
automatically park in the winter
position.
139
０７／０５／１７０９：０２：４０３１ＳＪＡ６３００１４５
Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the When the light switch is in the
lever to signal a left turn and up to ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
signal a right turn. To signal a lane lights on indicator comes on as a
change, push lightly on the lever, reminder. This indicator stays on if
and hold it. The lever will return to you leave the light switch on and
center when you release it or turn the ignition switch to the
complete a turn. ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position.
Headlights − The rotating switch
on the left lever controls the lights. High Beams − To switch from low
Turning this switch to the ‘‘ ’’ beams to high beams, push the left
position turns on the parking lights, lever forward until you hear a click.
taillights, instrument panel lights, The blue high beam indicator will
1. Turn signal side-marker lights, and rear license come on (see page 65 ). Pull it back
2. Off plate lights. to return to low beams. To flash the
3. Parking and indicator lights high beams, pull the lever back
4. AUTO Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ lightly, then release it. The high
5. Headlights on position turns on the headlights. If beams stay on as long as you hold
6. High beams you leave the lights on with the the lever back.
7. Flash high beams ignition switch released after turned
8. Fog lights off to the LOCK (0) position or when
9. Fog lights on the built-in key is removed from the
ignition switch, you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.
140
０７／０５／１７０９：０２：４９３１ＳＪＡ６３００１４６
AUTO − The automatic lighting Even with the automatic lighting LIGHT SENSOR
feature turns on the headlights, all feature turned on, we recommend
other exterior lights, and the that you turn on the lights manually
instrument panel lights when it when driving at night or in a dense
senses low ambient light. fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking

To turn on automatic lighting, turn facilities.
the light switch to AUTO at any time.
The lights will come on automatically To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
when the outside light level becomes SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page
low (at dusk, for example). The 120 .
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. The lights and indicator Do not leave the light switch in
will turn off automatically when the AUTO if you will not be driving the The automatic lighting feature is
system senses high ambient light. vehicle for an extended period (a controlled by a sensor located on top
week or more). You should also turn of the dashboard. Do not cover this
The lights will remain on when you off the lights if you plan to leave the sensor or spill liquids on it.
turn off the ignition switch. They will engine idling or off for a long time.
turn off automatically when you open
and close the driver’s door. To turn
them on again, either turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position or turn the light switch to
.
141
０７／０５／１７０９：０３：０３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１４７
Fog Lights If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL The automatic lighting off feature
Turn the fog lights on and off by SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- activates if you leave the headlight
turning the switch next to the information display, there is a switch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’
headlight switch. problem with the daytime running position or if the lights are turned on
light system. Take your vehicle to a by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
You can use the fog lights only when dealer to have it checked. position, turn the ignition switch to
the headlights are on low beam. the LOCK (0) position, then open
With the light switch in the AUTO When the multi-information display and close the driver’s door.
position, you can also use the fog shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the
lights when the headlights turn on daytime running lights are off. If you turn the ignition switch to the
automatically. They will go off when Follow the procedure in the left LOCK (0) position with the
the headlights turn off. column to turn them on. headlight switch on, but do not open
the door and get out, the lights turn
Daytime Running Lights Automatic Lighting Off Feature off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if
With the headlight switch off, the This feature turns off the headlights, the switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’
high beam headlights come on with all other exterior lights, and the position).
reduced brightness when you turn instrument panel lights within 15
the ignition switch to the ON (II) seconds after you turn the ignition The lights turn on again when you
position and release the parking switch to the LOCK (0) position and unlock or open the driver’s door.
brake. They remain on until you turn close the driver’s door. If you unlock the door, but do not
the ignition switch off, even if you open it within 15 seconds, the lights
set the parking brake. To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO go off. With the driver’s door open,
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page 118 . you will hear a lights-on reminder
The headlights revert to normal chime.
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
142
０７／０５／１７０９：０３：１４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１４８
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
If equipped AFS Indicator

The adaptive front lighting system
(AFS) helps to improve visibility If the AFS indicator comes on and
during nighttime driving. The AFS starts blinking while driving, pull to
controls the aiming direction and the side of the road when it is safe,
lighting distribution of the low and turn off the engine. If the AFS

beams according to the amount of indicator keeps blinking, or starts
turn applied to the steering wheel blinking again while driving after
during cornering or turning. Press turning the ignition switch to the ON
the AFS OFF switch to turn the AFS (II) position, the AFS is not working
on and off when the ignition switch properly (see page 69 ). Have the
is in the ON (II) position and the AFS inspected by your dealer.
headlights are turned on. Without AFS, your vehicle still has
normal lighting ability to continue
driving.
When the AFS indicator comes on,

you will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page 78 ).
143
０７／０５／１７０９：０３：２４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１４９
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
AFS Off Switch Here are some operating Automatic Headlight Adjusting
characteristics of the AFS: System
The AFS works with the automatic
The system requires an headlight adjusting system to sense
initialization period. It does not changes in vehicle height due to
begin to operate until you have driving and loading conditions of
driven the vehicle a short distance. passengers and luggage, and adjusts
the vertical aim of the low beam
At a stop, the right headlight turns headlights automatically to
right when you turn the steering compensate for load.
wheel to the right. But the left
headlight does not turn left when If the headlights do not seem to be
AFS OFF SWITCH you turn the steering wheel to the properly aimed, have the automatic
left. This prevents the left headlight adjusting system inspected
This switch is at the right side of the headlight from pointing at by your dealer.
left vent. Press it to turn the AFS on oncoming traffic.
and off. When AFS is off, the AFS
indicator comes on as a reminder AFS is turned off when the shift
when you turn on the headlights. lever is in the R position.

the ON (II) position, the AFS is
turned on if it was on previously.
144
０７／０５／１７０９：０３：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１５０
Hazard Warning Button, Instrument Panel Brightness
Hazard Warning Button Instrument Panel Brightness

U.S. CANADA
ADJUSTMENT BUTTON
Push the button between the center Adjust the brightness of the The level of brightness is shown on
vents to turn on the hazard warning instrument panel by pressing the ＋ the multi-information display while
lights (four-way flashers). This or − button. Press the ＋ button to you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
causes all four outside turn signals increase the brightness and the − after you finish adjusting.
and both indicators in the instrument button to decrease it. You can adjust
panel to flash. Use the hazard the brightness with the headlight
warning lights if you need to park in switch on or off.
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
CONTINUED
145
０７／０５／１７０９：０３：４０３１ＳＪＡ６３００１５１
Instrument Panel Brightness, Rear Window Defogger
To reduce glare at night, the Rear Window Defogger have to turn it on again when you
instrument panel illumination dims restart the vehicle.
when you turn the light switch to REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
or . To cancel the glare Make sure the rear window is clear
reduction function, set the and you have good visibility before
brightness to the highest level, then starting to drive.
press the ＋ button. You will hear a
beep when it is canceled. The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
The rear window defogger clears fog,

frost, and thin ice from the window.
Push the defogger button to turn it
on and off. Pushing this button also
turns the mirror heaters on and off.
The indicator in the button comes on
to show the defogger is on. If you do
not turn it off, the defogger will shut
itself off after 5 to 40 minutes
(depending on the ambient
temperature). It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
146
０７／０５／１７０９：０３：４８３１ＳＪＡ６３００１５２
Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel adjustment

before you start driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel

position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped.
Move the steering wheel in, out, up, Release the switch when the
or down by pushing and holding the steering wheel reaches the desired
adjustment switch in that direction. position. Make sure the steering
wheel points towards your chest, not
toward your face, and that you can
see the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
CONTINUED
147
０７／０５／１７０９：０３：５６３１ＳＪＡ６３００１５３
Steering Wheel Adjustments
When you turn the ignition switch to If your vehicle’s battery is

the LOCK (0) position and release it, disconnected or goes dead, or the
or remove the built-in key from the fuse for the power tilt and telescopic
ignition switch, the steering wheel steering wheel is removed, the
automatically moves fully in and up. power tilt and telescopic steering
wheel system needs to be reset
The steering wheel returns to its when you reconnect the battery or
original position when you push the install the fuse.
ignition switch or insert the built-in
key back in the ignition switch. Push the ignition switch for more
than 1 second and release it, or
Steering wheel movement is also insert the built-in key into the
controlled by the driving position ignition switch, and remove it. The
memory system (see page 160 ). steering wheel automatically moves
fully in and up to let you know the
To change the ‘‘AUTO TILT & system is reset.
TELESCOPIC’’ setting, see page
106 .
148
０７／０５／１７０９：０４：０５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１５４
Keys and Locks
You should have received a key These keys contain electronic

number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
need this key number if you ever immobilizer system. They will not
have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Acura-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy

BUILT-IN KEYS KEY NUMBER TAG objects on them.
The built-in key (see page 177 ) fits Keep the keys away from liquids.
all the locks on your vehicle. If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.

Do not try to take them apart.
149
０７／０５／１７０９：０４：１５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１５５
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects The system may not recognize your As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an key’s coding if another immobilizer This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other key or other metal object (i.e. key FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine will not fob) is near the ignition switch when following two conditions: (1) This device
start. you turn the ignition switch to the may not cause harmful interference, and
ON (II) position. (2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer If the system repeatedly does not interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on for recognize the coding of your remote operation.
a few seconds, then go out. If the or built-in key, contact your dealer.
indicator starts to blink, it means the Changes or modifications not expressly
system does not recognize the Do not attempt to alter this system approved by the party responsible for
coding of the remote or built-in key. or add other devices to it. Electrical compliance could void the user’s
Turn the ignition switch to the problems could result that may make authority to operate the equipment.
LOCK (0) position, release the your vehicle undrivable.
ignition switch and push it, or This device complies with Industry
remove the built-in key, and reinsert If you have lost your remote or Canada Standard RSS-210.
it. Then turn the switch to the ON built-in key and cannot start the Operation is subject to the following two
(II) position again. engine, contact your dealer. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
150
０７／０５／１７０９：０４：２６３１ＳＪＡ６３００１５６
Ignition Switch
BUILT-IN KEY slightly. START (III) − Use this position

only to start the engine. The switch
If the front wheels are turned, the returns to the ON (II) position when
anti-theft lock may make it difficult you let go of the ignition switch.
to turn the ignition switch. Firmly
turn the steering wheel to the left or If you open the driver’s door and

right as you turn the ignition switch. leave the key in the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder beeper, and
ACCESSORY (I) − You can a message appears on the multi-
operate the audio system and the information display according to the
IGNITION SWITCH accessory power sockets in this ignition switch position. When the
COVER position. ignition switch is in the ACC (I)
position, a ‘‘RETURN IGNITION
The ignition switch has four When you turn the ignition switch to SWITCH TO LOCK (0) POSITION’’
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY the ACCESSORY (I) position, an message is shown on the multi-
(I), ON (II), and START (III). ‘‘ACCESSORY (I) POSITION’’ information display. When the
message is shown on the multi- ignition switch is in the LOCK (0)
To use the built-in key, you have to information display. position, a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
remove the cover (see page 177 ). message is shown on the multi-
ON (II) − This is the normal information display.
LOCK (0) − You can insert or ignition switch position when driving.
remove the built-in key only in this Several of the indicators on the The shift lever must be in Park
position. To turn the ignition switch instrument panel come on as a test before you turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position, the shift when you turn the ignition switch knob to the LOCK (0) position or
lever must be in Park, and you must from the ACCESSORY (I) to the ON remove the built-in key from the
push the knob or built-in key in (II) position. ignition switch.
151
０７／０５／１７０９：０４：３８３１ＳＪＡ６３００１５７
Door Locks
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER To lock any door when getting out of When you shift to P after driving, the
SWITCH the vehicle, pull the lock tab and driver’s door unlocks.
close the door.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
All doors can be locked from the UNLOCK’’ setting, see page 125 .
outside by using the built-in key in
the driver’s door. To unlock only the Lockout Prevention
driver’s door, insert the built-in key, With the driver’s door open and the
turn it clockwise, and release it. The built-in key in the ignition, both
remaining doors unlock when you master door lock switches are
turn the built-in key a second time disabled. They are not disabled if the
within a few seconds. driver’s door is closed. Pushing the
switch down on the open front
Each front door has a power door To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCK passenger’s door will lock all doors.
lock master switch. Either switch MODE’’ setting, see page 109 . If you try to lock an open driver’s
locks and unlocks all doors. Push the door by pulling the lock tab rearward
switch down to lock all doors and up When the vehicle speed reaches with the remote inside the vehicle
to unlock them. about 10 mph (about 15 km/h) or and closing the driver’s door, the
more, all the doors lock driver’s door will unlock.
Each door has a lock tab above the automatically.
inside door handle. Pull the tab to
lock the door and push it to unlock. To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
When you pull the tab on the driver’s LOCK’’ setting, see page 123 .
door, all the doors lock.
152
０７／０５／１７０９：０４：４９３１ＳＪＡ６３００１５８
Trunk
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON If the doors are locked, press the TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
trunk release switch on the trunk
lid with the remote in keyless
access operating range.
To close the trunk, press down on

the trunk lid.
You can open the trunk in any of If your vehicle’s battery goes dead or
four ways: is disconnected, you can open the
trunk from the rear seat by pulling
Press the trunk release button on the trunk release handle. Reach the
the driver’s door. handle through the trunk pass-
through.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote. Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
If the doors are unlocked, press lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
the trunk release switch on the getting into the interior. See Carbon
trunk lid. Monoxide Hazard on page 56 .
CONTINUED
153
０７／０５／１７０９：０４：５９３１ＳＪＡ６３００１５９
Trunk, Childproof Door Locks
TRUNK MAIN SWITCH Emergency Trunk Opener Childproof Door Locks
unlock
lock
RELEASE
LEVER LEVER
To protect items in the trunk, you
can disable the trunk-release button As a safety feature, your vehicle has The childproof door locks are
on the driver’s door, the trunk lid, a release lever on the right corner in designed to prevent children seated
and the remote. To do this, turn off the trunk so the trunk can be opened in the rear from accidentally opening
the trunk main switch in the glove from the inside. To open the trunk, the rear doors. Each rear door has a
box, lock the glove box, and lock the push the release lever to the left. lock lever near the edge. With the
trunk pass-through cover with the lever in the LOCK position, the door
built-in key. Parents should decide if their cannot be opened from the inside
children should be shown how to use regardless of the position of the lock
this feature. tab. To open the door, push the lock
tab in, and use the outside door
For more information about child handle.
safety, see page 42 .
154
０７／０５／１７０９：０５：１５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１６０
Seats
Front Seat Power Adjustments

See pages 14 − 17 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.

The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start DRIVER’S SEAT PASSENGER’S SEAT
driving.
Moves the seat forward Moves the whole seat up
and backward. and forward, or down
and backward. The front
Moves the front of the of the seat also tilts up or
seat up or down. (Driver’s down at the same time.
seat only) (Driver’s seat only)
Raises or lowers the seat. Adjusts the seat-back

(Driver’s seat only) angle forward or
backward.
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
155
０７／０５／１７０９：０５：２５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１６１
Seats
Head Restraints They are most effective when you To raise it, pull upward. To lower the
See page 16 for important safety adjust them so the center of the back restraint, push the release button
information and a warning about of the occupant’s head rests against sideways, and push the restraint
improperly positioning head restraints. the center of the restraint. down. To adjust the tilt, pivot the
front head restraint to the desired
FRONT position.
Failure to reinstall the head

restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head

restraints before driving.
RELEASE BUTTON
Your vehicle has adjustable head The head restraints adjust for height.
restraints on the front seats. The tilt of the front head restraints is
also adjustable. You need both hands
The head restraints help protect you to adjust the restraint. Do not
and your passengers from whiplash attempt to adjust it while driving.
and other injuries.
156
０７／０５／１７０９：０５：３４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１６２
Seats
REAR Rear Seat Armrest Trunk Pass-through Cover

KNOB

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT
TILT BUTTON
COVER
You can raise the rear head
restraints by hand. The rear seat armrest is in the Open the cover by pushing the knob
center of the rear seat. Pivot it down and pulling the cover down. To close
To lower the rear head restraints for to use it. the cover, swing it up, and push
better visibility, press the rear head firmly on the top. Make sure it
restraint tilt button on the ceiling latches properly.
console with the ignition switch in
the ON (II) position.
157
０７／０５／１７０９：０５：４３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１６３
Mirrors
Make sure all items in the trunk and Keep the inside and outside mirrors INDICATOR SENSOR
those extending through the pass- clean and adjusted for best visibility.
through are secured. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
For security, this cover can be
locked and unlocked only with the
built-in key. To lock the cover, insert
the key, and turn it clockwise.
Never drive with this cover open and

the trunk lid open.
AUTO BUTTON
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 56 . The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.
158
０７／０５／１７０９：０５：５４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１６４
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. When you finish, move the Power Mirror Heaters
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.

Outside mirror positions can be
stored in the driving position
memory system (see page 160 ).
SELECTOR Reverse Tilt Door Mirror

SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH Depending on the position of the
selector switch, the left or right side
1. Move the selector switch to L mirror will pivot downward slightly The outside mirrors are heated to
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s when you shift the transmission into remove fog and frost. With the
side). reverse. In the left position, the left ignition switch in the ON (II)
mirror pivots. In the right position, position, turn on the heaters by
2. Push the appropriate edge of the the right mirror pivots. This gives pressing the button. The indicator in
adjustment switch to move the you a better view of that side of the the button comes on as a reminder.
mirror right, left, up, or down. vehicle while parallel parking. The Press the button again to turn the
mirror returns to its original position heaters off. Pressing this button also
when you take the transmission out turns the rear window defogger on
of reverse. To turn this feature off, and off.
leave the switch in the center
position.
159
０７／０５／１７０９：０６：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１６５
Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature Storing a Driving Position in MEMORY MEMO BUTTON
for the steering wheel, driver’s seat, Memory BUTTONS
and outside mirror positions. Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.
Two seat, steering wheel, and
outside mirror positions can be 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
stored in separate memories. You (II) position. You cannot add a
select a memorized position by new driving position to the
pushing the appropriate button. memory unless the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position. You can
recall a memorized position with
the ignition switch in any position.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable 3. Press the MEMO button on the

position (see page 155 ). driver’s door. You will hear a beep.
Adjust the steering wheel to a The indicator in the memory
comfortable position (see page buttons (1 and 2) will blink.
147). Immediately press one of the
Adjust the outside mirrors for best memory buttons (1 or 2) until you
visibility (see page 159 ). hear two beeps. The indicator in
the memory button will stay on.
The current positions of the
driver’s seat, steering wheel, and
outside mirrors are now stored.
160
０７／０５／１７０９：０６：１８３１ＳＪＡ６３００１６６
To cancel the storing procedure Selecting a Memorized Position 2. Press the desired memory button
after pressing the MEMO button: (1 or 2) until you hear a beep.
MEMORY BUTTONS
Do not press a memory button The system will move the seat,
within 5 seconds. steering wheel, and outside mirrors
to the memorized positions. The

Readjust the seat or steering indicator in the selected memory
position. button will flash during movement.
When the adjustments are complete,
Readjust the outside mirror you will hear two beeps, and the
position. indicator will remain on.
Each memory button stores only one To change the ‘‘MEMORY

driving position. Storing a new POSITION LINK’’ setting, see page
position erases the previous setting To select a memorized position, do 104 .
stored in that button’s memory. this:
All stored driving positions will be 1. Make sure the shift lever is in
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes Park.
dead or is disconnected.
CONTINUED
161
０７／０５／１７０９：０６：２７３１ＳＪＡ６３００１６７
To stop the system’s automatic You can use the adjustment switches
adjustment, do any of the following: to change the positions of the seat,
steering wheel, or outside mirrors
Press any button on the control after they are in their memorized
panel: MEMO, 1, or 2. position. If you change the
memorized position, the indicator in
Push any of the adjustment the memory button will go out. To
switches for the seat or steering keep this driving position for later
wheel. use, you must store it in the driving
position memory.
Shift out of Park.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
If you select a memorized position

without pushing the ignition switch
knob or inserting the built-in key in
the ignition switch, only the seat and
outside mirrors will adjust. To get
the system to also adjust the steering
wheel, push and turn the ignition
switch or insert the built-in key in
the ignition switch. You will hear two
beeps when it is complete.
162
０７／０５／１７０９：０６：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１６８
Keyless Access System
Your vehicle has a keyless access Protect the remote and the built-in Always keep the remote and the
system. When you carry the remote key from direct sunlight, high built-in key away from any magnetic
with you, you can lock/unlock the temperature, and high humidity. material.
door(s), unlock the trunk, and start
the engine without using the built-in Do not drop the remote or the You should have received a key
key. built-in key, and do not set heavy number tag with your built-in key.

objects on them. You will need this key number if you
The system may not work if: ever have to get a lost key replaced.
The battery of the remote is weak. Keep the remote and the built-in key Use only Acura-approved key blanks.
There is strong electrical current away from liquids. If they get wet,
nearby. dry them immediately with a soft
You carry a cell phone, a laptop cloth.
computer, or other electrical
device near the remote. The built-in keys do not contain
The remote is covered by metal. batteries.
A vehicle is being operated with a
transmitter nearby.
When the remote battery is dead.
When the vehicle battery is dead.
Make sure the driver always carries

the remote/built-in key set.
163
０７／０５／１７０９：０６：５７３１ＳＪＡ６３００１６９
Keys
BUILT-IN KEYS KEYLESS ACCESS
REMOTES
OPERATING
RANGE
KEY NUMBER TAG
The following keys come with your the doors and unlock the trunk. Anyone can lock/unlock a door or
vehicle. Refer to page 177 for how to When you carry the remote, you can open the trunk if the remote is
separate the keys. lock/unlock the doors, unlock the within the operating range of the
trunk, and start the engine without a door or the trunk.
Built-in Key key.
This key is used to lock/unlock the The remote may not work if:
doors, glove box, trunk pass-through You can lock/unlock the doors It is too close to the vehicle.
cover, and to start the engine (after within about 32 inches (about 80 cm) It is above or below the vehicle,
you remove the ignition switch cover, radius from the outside door handle. even when it is within its operating
see page 174 ). You can open the trunk within about range.
Keyless Access Remote 32 inches (about 80 cm) radius from
This remote is used to lock/unlock the trunk release switch.
164
０７／０５／１７０９：０７：１５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１７０
Unlocking the Door(s) All the doors unlock when you grab 131 .
the handle of the front passenger’s
door. If a remote is within operating range
while you wash your vehicle or when
When you unlock the door(s), some it is raining heavily, the door sensors
exterior lights blink twice and the may respond by unlocking the doors.

system beeps twice.
The unlock sensors do not operate
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS when:
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page
111 . The remote is not within the
operating range.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP’’ setting, see page 113 . The remote is too close to the
The handle of each front door has a vehicle.
sensor. That sensor works with the If you wear a glove while grabbing a
remote so you can automatically front door handle, the door sensor When the doors are unlocked.
unlock/lock the door(s). may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors. The remote battery is dead.
By default, only the driver’s door
unlocks when you grab its handle. If you do not open any of the doors The vehicle battery is dead.
within 30 seconds, they will
To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCK automatically relock.
MODE’’ setting, see page 109 .
To change the ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
165
０７／０５／１７０９：０７：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１７１
Locking the Doors system beeps once. When you If you touch the door lock sensor of
cannot set the security system the front door with your hand
because the trunk or hood is open, wearing a glove, the door sensor may
no exterior light blinks and/or no delay to respond or not respond by
beeper sounds. locking the doors.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS The lock sensors do not operate if:
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page
111 . The remote is not within the
operating range.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP’’ setting, see page 113 . The doors are open.
DOOR LOCK SENSOR
Within 2 seconds of touching the The ignition switch is not in the
Each front door has a LOCK/ handle to lock the doors or locking LOCK (0) position.
UNLOCK feature. the doors with remote, pull the
handle to make sure the doors are The built-in key is in the ignition
When you touch the door lock actually locked. The door unlock switch.
sensor of the front door by hand, all sensors do not operate for about 2
the doors and the trunk will lock. seconds after the doors are locked. The remote is too close to the
vehicle.
Before locking the doors, make sure If a remote is within operating range
the remote is not inside the vehicle. while you wash your vehicle or when The remote battery is dead.
it is raining heavily, the door sensors
When you lock the doors, some may respond by locking the doors. The vehicle battery is dead.
exterior lights blink once and the
166
０７／０５／１７０９：０７：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１７２
Door Lock Prevention Locking the Trunk Before closing the trunk, make sure
If you open a door, pull its lock tab, the remote is not in the trunk.
and shut it when the remote is inside
the vehicle, the driver’s door unlock. If you close the trunk when the
Make sure you carry the remote remote is in it, the system beeps, and
with you when you lock the doors. the trunk reopens.

PULL HANDLE
When you close the trunk with all

doors locked, the trunk will lock.
When you unlock all the doors with

the remote, built-in key or power
door lock master switch, the trunk
will unlock.
Use the pull handle when you close

the trunk.
167
０７／０５／１７０９：０７：５６３１ＳＪＡ６３００１７３
Locking and Unlocking the Trunk The trunk cannot be locked if: Keyless Access Remote
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH The remote is too close to the LED LOCK
trunk lid. BUTTON
The remote is on the interior rear
panel.
The remote is too close to the
TRUNK
seatback of the rear seat or the RELEASE
seat cushion. UNLOCK BUTTON
BUTTON
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the PANIC
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from BUTTON
getting into the interior. See Carbon
When the trunk is locked, you can Monoxide Hazard on page 56 . LOCK − Press this button once to
open it in any of these ways: lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash. When you push the LOCK
Press the trunk release button button twice within 5 seconds, you
inside the vehicle. will hear a beep to verify that the
Press the trunk button on the doors are locked and the security
remote. system is set.
Pull the trunk release switch when
carrying the remote (the system
beeps once).
168
０７／０５／１７０９：０８：０６３１ＳＪＡ６３００１７４
You cannot lock the doors if any UNLOCK − Press this button once To change the ‘‘SECURITY
door, the trunk, or the hood is not to unlock the driver’s door. Press it RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
fully closed if the built-in key is in twice to unlock the other doors. 131 .
the ignition switch, or if the ignition Some exterior lights will flash twice
switch is in any position except the each time you press the button. The To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
LOCK (0) position. ceiling light (if the ceiling light ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ setting, see

switch is in the DOOR position) will page129.
When you cannot set the security come on when you press the
system because the trunk or hood is UNLOCK button. If you do not open TRUNK − Press this button for
open, no exterior light blinks and/or any doors within 30 seconds, the about 1 second to open the trunk.
no beeper sounds. ceiling light fades out. If you relock You cannot open the trunk if the
the doors with the remote before 30 built-in key is in the ignition or the
seconds have elapsed, the ceiling ignition switch is in any position
light will go off immediately. except the LOCK (0) position. You
cannot open the trunk with the
To change the ‘‘DOOR LOCK remote if the trunk main switch is
MODE’’ setting, see page 127 . turned off.
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT PANIC − Press this button for

DIMMING TIME,’’ see page 116 . about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound and the exterior
If you unlock the doors with the lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
remote, but do not open any doors To cancel panic mode, press any
within 30 seconds, the doors other button on the remote.
automatically relock and the security
system sets.
169
０７／０５／１７０９：０８：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１７５
Keyless Memory SettingsTM Here are the settings activated with in the remote will blink once. Then
the remote; release the buttons. Doing this
Driving position memory cancels the keyless memory settings
(see page 160 ). for that remote and restores the
default settings.
Customized settings Some of them keep the same
(see page 81 ). settings as they were set previously.
Audio system settings To turn the keyless memory settings

(see page 207 ). back on, repeat this procedure. The
LED will blink twice to indicate the
Climate control settings feature has been turned on.
DRIVER’S ID (see page 199 ).
Remote Transmitter Care
When you unlock the door with your RL model Avoid dropping or throwing the
remote, each remote activates the Compass system preferences transmitter.
keyless memory settings related to (see page 242 ).
that remote. The driver’s ID (Driver Protect the transmitter from
1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back Except RL model extreme temperature.
of each remote. Navigation system preferences
(see the navigation system Do not immerse the transmitter in
manual). any liquid.
To turn off this feature, press and If you lose a transmitter, the
hold the LOCK and UNLOCK replacement needs to be
buttons at the same time. The LED reprogrammed by your dealer.
170
０７／０５／１７０９：０８：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１７６
Replacing the Remote Battery As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Replace the batteries if necessary. Replace the old batteries with new
Battery type: CR2025 batteries. Place the batteries so the This device complies with Industry
＋ side is facing up. Snap the two Canada Standard RSS-210.
Remove the built-in key. halves of the remote case back Operation is subject to the following two
together. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
Remove the upper half by carefully interference, and (2) this device must
prying on the edge with a coin. An improperly disposed of battery accept any interference that may cause
can hurt the environment. undesired operation of the device.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
171
０７／０５／１７０９：０８：４１３１ＳＪＡ６３００１７７
Ignition Switch Operating Range
Make sure you know where the remote

is when you are inside the vehicle.
Remember that you can start the engine

without using the built-in key when the
remote is inside the vehicle.
Make sure you always carry the remote

with you.
The engine may not run, and some The engine may not start if the
malfunctions may occur, if the remote is subjected to strong radio
remote is: waves.
Outside the vehicle.
On the dashboard. Also, the engine may not start if the
On the rear interior panel. remote is too close to the windows.
In the glove box.
In the door pockets.
In the trunk, etc.
172
０７／０５／１７０９：０８：５２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１７８
Ignition Switch the beep, the steering wheel is To turn the ignition switch to the
locked. To unlock the steering wheel, LOCK (0) position, put the
turn it right and left while turning transmission in Park, press the
the ignition switch at the same time. switch in, and turn it to the LOCK
If the remote and the vehicle do not (0) position. When the transmission
recognize each other, turn the is not in Park, you cannot turn the

ignition switch to the LOCK (0) ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position, remove the ignition switch position.
cover, insert the built-in key, and
turn the switch (see pages 151 and Before leaving the vehicle, make
174 ). sure the ignition switch is in the
LOCK (0) position.
If you open the driver’s door with the

When you push the ignition switch, ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
the remote and the vehicle recognize (I) position, a beeper will sound.
each other. After the recognition, You will also see a ‘‘RETURN
the remote indicator flashes, and a IGNITION SWITCH TO LOCK (0)
beeper sounds once. After the beep, POSITION’’ message on the multi-
turn the ignition switch. information display.
When the remote is out of the
operating range, the ignition switch
is locked.
If the ignition switch cannot be
turned from the LOCK (0) position
to the ACCESSORY (I) position after CONTINUED
173
０７／０５／１７０９：０９：０１３１ＳＪＡ６３００１７９
Also, if you close the door when the Removing the Ignition Switch Beeper and Message
ignition switch is not in the LOCK Cover Keyless Remote Not Detected
(0) position and the remote is not
inside the vehicle, the keyless access IGNITION SWITCH COVER
alarm sounds outside the vehicle, a
message appears on the multi-
information display, and the beeper
sounds if the ignition switch is in the
ON (II) position. pull
When the beeper sounds after you

close the driver’s door outside the
push
vehicle, check the position of the
ignition switch and the location of BUILT-IN KEY
the remote.
To remove the ignition switch cover, When you are pressing the ignition
If the engine is running and you insert the built-in key (see page 177 ), switch, or when the ignition switch is
remove the remote from the vehicle, then pull the cover out by pulling the in the ON (II) position, the beeper
it will continue to run. But once built-in key while pushing it. sounds if you take the remote out of
turned to the LOCK (0) position, the the vehicle and close the door.
engine will not restart until a remote
is brought back into the vehicle.
174
０７／０５／１７０９：０９：１０３１ＳＪＡ６３００１８０
The outside beeper sounds when The engine does not restart if you Keyless Remote Low Battery
the ignition switch is in the turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) (0) position when the remote is
position. outside the vehicle. Check where the
remote is. Make sure that you carry
When the ignition switch is in the the remote or built-in key with you

ON (II) position, the multi- when you operate the ignition switch.
information display shows
‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE NOT If you pass the remote through an
DETECTED,’’ and the inside and open window, the system does not
outside beepers sound. respond. Also, even when the remote
The multi-information display is inside the vehicle, the beeper may
message goes away when you sound when the location of the
bring the remote back inside the remote is not detected due to
vehicle, and close the door or surrounding conditions. It is not a The batteries in the remote normally
apply the parking brake. failure. Make sure that you carry the lasts about 2 years. To ensure
remote with you. maximum battery life, do not store
If the engine is running and you the remote close to electrical devices
remove the remote from the such as computers or TVs. When the
vehicle, it will continue to run. multi-information display shows
Once turned to the LOCK (0) ‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE LOW
position, the engine will not restart BATTERY,’’ replace the batteries as
until a remote is brought back into soon as possible (see page 171 ).
the vehicle.
CONTINUED
175
０７／０５／１７０９：０９：１９３１ＳＪＡ６３００１８１
Check Keyless Access System The indicator stays on while you

are driving.
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
INDICATOR
The indicator comes on with the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position.
The multi-information display

shows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
ACCESS SYSTEM.’’
In this case, use the built-in key to

lock/unlock the doors and start the
engine.
The indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Have
your vehicle checked by your dealer
if:
176
０７／０５／１７０９：０９：２８３１ＳＪＡ６３００１８２
Built-in key and Remote The keyless access system uses Valet Function
electric current to identify the The trunk and glove box cannot be
BUILT-IN KEY remote with the vehicle. opened when you turn the trunk
main switch off and lock the glove
If you use medical equipment such box and trunk pass-through cover
as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your with the built-in key. Also, the trunk

doctor if the electric current used by cannot be opened by using the
the remote will affect it. remote.
RELEASE BUTTON
The built-in key can be inserted into

the remote.
As shown above, keep inserting the
built-in key until it is locked. To
remove the built-in key, pull it out
while you press the release button.
To avoid damaging the remote and
the built-in key, never pull on the
built-in key unless you are pressing
the release button.
177
０７／０５／１７０９：０９：３８３１ＳＪＡ６３００１８３
Seat Heaters
Passenger’s
In the LO setting, the heater runs
seat continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
Follow these precautions whenever

you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the

seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
Driver’s battery.
seat
HEATERS SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
If the engine is left idling for an
If equipped The ignition switch must be in the extended period, do not use the
Both front seats are equipped with ON (II) position to use the heaters. seat heaters, even on the LO
seat heaters. The passenger seat Push the top of the switch, HI, to setting. It can weaken the battery,
only has heaters in the seat bottom rapidly heat up the seat. After the causing hard starting.
because of the side airbag cut off seat reaches a comfortable
system. temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off

when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
178
０７／０５／１７０９：０９：５１３１ＳＪＡ６３００１８４
Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation (Canadian models)
passenger’s ▲ BUTTON When you press the ▲ button once,

seat the heater is set to HI. After the seat
reaches a comfortable temperature,
select MID or LOW by pressing the
▼ button. This will keep the seat
warm. To shut down the heater,

press the ▼ button until the
indicators go off.
▼ BUTTON In HI, when the seat gets warm, the

Driver’s heater will change to MID after
HEATERS seat INDICATORS about 5 minutes.
If equipped The ignition switch must be in the In MID, the heater will change to
Both front seats are equipped with ON (II) position to use the heaters LOW after about 60 minutes.
seat heaters and an air ventilation and the air ventilation system.
system. The passenger seat only has In LOW, the heater runs
heaters in the seat bottom because To use the heaters, press the ▲ continuously.
of the side airbag system. button. The indicator (red) next to
the button will come on. There are
three settings in the heaters:
HI − Three indicators on.
MID − Two indicators on.
LO − One indicator on.
OFF − All indicators off.
CONTINUED
179
０７／０５／１７０９：０９：５８３１ＳＪＡ６３００１８５
Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation (Canadian models)
To ventilate the seat, press the ▼ Follow these precautions whenever

button. The indicator (green) next to you use the seat heaters and the seat
the button will come on. The air ventilation:
ventilation system has four settings:
Use the HI setting only to heat or
HI − Three indicators on. to ventilate the seats quickly,
MID − Two indicators on. because it draws large amounts of
LO − One indicator on. current from the battery.
OFF − All indicators off.
If the engine is left idling for an
When you press the ▼ button once, extended period, do not use the
the system is set to HI. To change to seat heaters or the seat ventilation,
the lower mode, press the ▲ button. even on the LO setting. It can
To turn the air ventilation off, press weaken the battery, causing hard
the ▲ button until the indicators go starting.
off.
180
０７／０５／１７０９：１０：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１８６
Power Windows
Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position before operating any of DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
the window switches. To open a Closing a power window on
window, push the switch down and someone’s hands or fingers can
hold it. To close the window, pull the cause serious injury.
switch up and hold it. Release the

switch to stop the window. Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
MAIN SWITCH
If the MAIN switch is pushed down

(OFF), the passenger windows
cannot be raised or lowered. Keep
the MAIN switch off when you have
children in the vehicle so they do not
injure themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
CONTINUED
181
０７／０５／１７０９：１０：１４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１８７
Power Windows
AUTO − To open the window fully, To open or close the window The indicators in the switches come
push the window switch firmly down partially, push down or pull back on on when you turn the ignition switch
to the second detent, then release it. the window switch lightly to the first to the ON (II) position.
The window automatically goes detent, and hold it. The window will
down all the way. To stop the stop when you release the switch. The power windows have a key-off
window from going all the way down, delay. You can still open and close
pull back on the window switch All window switches also have the the windows for up to 10 minutes
briefly. AUTO feature. after you turn off the ignition switch.
The key-off delay cancels as soon as
To close the window fully, pull back Auto Reverse you open either front door. You must
the window switch firmly to the If the window runs into any obstacle then turn the ignition switch to the
second detent, then release it. The while it is closing automatically, it ON (II) position for the power
window automatically goes all the will reverse direction, and then stop. windows to operate.
way up. To stop the window from To close the window, remove the
going all the way up, push down on obstacle, then use the window switch
the window switch briefly. again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the

window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
182
０７／０５／１７０９：１０：２９３１ＳＪＡ６３００１８８
Power Windows
Opening the Windows and UNLOCK BUTTON 2. Turn the key clockwise, then
Moonroof with the Remote release it.
You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof from outside with the 3. Turn the built-in key clockwise
remote. again, and hold it. All four
1. Press the UNLOCK button once windows and the moonroof start to

Open
to unlock the driver’s door. open. To stop the windows and
Close
moonroof, release the built-in key.
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. All the 4. When the windows or moonroof
doors unlock, and all four windows stops before opening fully, to open
and moonroof start to open. To the windows and moonroof further,
stop the windows and moonroof, turn and hold the key again
release the button. Opening/Closing the Windows (within 10 seconds).
and Moonroof with the Built-in
3. To open the windows and Key
moonroof further, press the You can open and close the windows
button again and hold it. If the and moonroof with the built-in key in
windows and the moonroof stop the driver’s door lock.
before the desired position, repeat
steps 1 and 2. To open:
1. Insert the built-in key in the driver’s
You cannot close the windows or the door lock.
moonroof with the remote.
CONTINUED
183
０７／０５／１７０９：１０：４０３１ＳＪＡ６３００１８９
Power Windows, Moonroof
To close: Opening/Closing the Moonroof MOONROOF SWITCH

1. Insert the built-in key in the driver’s with the Ceiling Console Switch
door lock. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position before operating the
2. Turn the key counterclockwise, moonroof switch on the ceiling
then release it. console. To open the moonroof, pull
back the moonroof switch. To close
3. Turn the key counterclockwise the moonroof, push the moonroof
again, and hold it. All four switch forward. Release the switch
windows and the moonroof start to to stop the moonroof.
close. To stop the windows and
the moonroof, release the key.
4. To close the windows and To open the moonroof fully, pull

moonroof further, turn and hold back the moonroof switch firmly.
the key again (within 10 seconds). The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
NOTE: If the windows and the fully, push the switch briefly.
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
184
０７／０５／１７０９：１０：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００１９０
Moonroof
To tilt the moonroof, push the center To open or close the moonroof
of the moonroof switch straight up. partially, pull back or push forward
To stop the moonroof from tilting on the moonroof switch lightly to the Opening or closing the
fully open, push the moonroof switch first detent, and hold it. The moonroof on someone’s hands
forward. moonroof will stop when you release or fingers can cause serious
the switch. injury.

To close the moonroof fully, push Make sure all hands and fingers
the moonroof switch forward to the are clear of the moonroof
second detent, then release it. The before opening or closing it.
moonroof closes all the way. To stop
the moonroof from closing all the
way, push the switch briefly.
185
０７／０５／１７０９：１０：５３３１ＳＪＡ６３００１９１
Moonroof
Auto Reverse The moonroof has a key-off delay. Operating the Moonroof with the
If the moonroof runs into any You can still open and close the Remote Transmitter or the Key
obstacle while it is closing moonroof for up to 10 minutes after You can use the remote transmitter
automatically, it will reverse you turn off the ignition switch. The or the key to operate the moonroof
direction, and then stop. To close the key-off delay cancels as soon as you from the outside. Refer to page
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then open either front door. You must 183 for details.
use the moonroof switch again. then turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position for the moonroof to
Auto reverse stops sensing when the operate.
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it. If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
186
０７／０５／１７０９：１０：５９３１ＳＪＡ６３００１９２
Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes, axles, and tires. A beeper will
sound if the vehicle is put into gear

with the parking brake on.
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the

parking brake pedal down with your
foot. To release the parking brake,
push on the pedal again. The parking
brake indicator on the instrument
panel should go out when the
parking brake is fully released with
the engine running (see page 63 ).
187
０７／０５／１７０９：１１：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３００１９３
Interior Convenience Items
FRONT DOOR POCKET ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
ASHTRAY
GLOVE BOX/OWNER’S MANUAL TRAY
UTILITY POCKET
SEAT-BACK POCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER BEVERAGE HOLDER
SEAT-BACK POCKET
188
０７／０５／１７０９：１１：１２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１９４
Glove Box RELEASE BUTTON

Open the glove box by pulling the
handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the built-in key.

The glove box light comes on only
when the parking lights are on.
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the Your vehicle has an owner’s manual To close the tray, push it up.
passenger is wearing the seat tray inside the glove box. To open
belt. the tray, push the release button up.
Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.
189
０７／０５／１７０９：１１：２１３１ＳＪＡ６３００１９５
Beverage Holders
KNOB
LID Pull up Press
BUTTON
BOTTOM PLATE SEPARATOR BOTTOM PLATE
Be careful when you are using the For a short container, put the bottom For a long container, press the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid plate down, and pull up the knob to button in the beverage holder to
that is very hot can scald you or your use the separator. raise the bottom plate. Stand the
passengers. Spilled liquids can separator up.
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
To use the beverage holder, push

the lid.
190
０７／０５／１７０９：１１：３２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１９６
Console Compartment
LEVER

LEVER
The rear beverage holder is in the To open the console compartment, You can put small items in the tray
rear seat armrest. Open the pull up on the lever and lift the located in the console compartment
beverage holder by pushing the front armrest. lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
of it. lever, and lift the armrest pad.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
The console compartment light is on

when the light switch is in the
or position.
191
０７／０５／１７０９：１１：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００１９７
Sun Visors Do not use the sun visor extension Accessory Power Sockets
feature over the rear view mirror.
Make sure to slide a sun visor

forward to set it to the normal length
before flipping it back in place.
Make sure you put the sun visor

back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
To use a sun visor, pull it down. You There are two accessory power
can also use a sun visor at the side sockets. One is located in the front
window. Remove the support rod of the center console. To use the
from the clip, and swing the sun power socket, push and release the
visor toward the side window. lid, then push it forward until the
You can extend the sun visor further socket comes to the proper position
by pulling it back. to use.
192
０７／０５／１７０９：１１：５５３１ＳＪＡ６３００１９８
Rear Ashtrays Front Door Pockets

TAB LID
The other socket is under the Small, rear ashtrays are located in The interior of each front door has
armrest in the console compartment the armrests of both rear doors. To an extendable pocket for maps and
storage area. To use the power open an ashtray, pivot the lid up. other small, lightweight items. For
socket, pull up the cover. safety, be sure both front door
To remove an ashtray for emptying, pockets are closed while driving.
These sockets are intended to supply open the lid, then carefully pull the
power for 12 volt DC accessories tab inside the ashtray straight up and When the light switch is in the
that are rated 120 watts or less (10 out of the armrest. or position, the front door
amps). pocket light is on.
The rear ashtray light is on when the
They will not power an automotive light switch is in the or
type cigarette lighter element. position.
193
０７／０５／１７０９：１２：００３１ＳＪＡ６３００１９９
Power Rear Sunshade When you shift to reverse, the

sunshade goes down automatically.
POWER REAR
SUNSHADE BUTTON To use it again, shift to another
position, and push the button to raise
it.
If the sunshade stops while moving,
check for and clear any obstacles,
then push the button again.

(II) position, push the power rear
sunshade button on the ceiling
console to raise the rear sunshade.
Push the button again to lower it.
194
０７／０５／１７０９：１２：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２００
Integrated Sunshades The hooks are intended for use only To prevent the integrated sunshades
by the sunshades. Do not hang any from being unhooked due to winds,
HOLDER TAB
other items on the hooks, as that leave the rear windows closed while
could interfere with proper operation driving.
of the side curtain airbags.

HOOK HOLE
Each rear door has an integrated

sunshade. To use a sunshade, hold
the tab on the top, insert the
sunshade into the holder, and pull
the sunshade all the way up. Insert
the holes on the sunshade into the
hooks on the window frame.
195
０７／０５／１７０９：１２：１７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２０１
Interior Lights
Ceiling Lights After pushing the DOOR button, all

the lights come on when you open
any door, unlock the doors with the CEILING LIGHT
BUTTONS
remote or built-in key, or turn the
ignition switch from the ON (II) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position to the
LOCK (0) position. The indicator in
REAR
the button comes on as a reminder.
FRONT
ON DOOR OFF CEILING LIGHT

BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTONS
The front and rear of the ceiling Push each ceiling light button to turn
have ceiling lights. its light on and off.
Push the ON button to turn on all the To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
ceiling lights. Push the OFF button DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
to turn them off. 116 .
196
０７／０５／１７０９：１２：２５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２０２
Features
The climate control system in your Climate Control System ................ 198
vehicle provides a comfortable Audio System ................................. 207
driving environment in all weather Playing the AM/FM Radio....... 208
conditions. AM/FM Radio Frequencies..... 212
AM/FM Radio Reception ......... 212
The standard audio system has Adjusting the Sound .................. 214
many features. This section Playing the XM Satellite
describes those features and how to Radio ....................................... 217
Features
use them. Operating the Disc Changer .... 223
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 234
The climate control system and the Protecting Your Discs ................... 235
audio system have a voice control Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 238
feature. Remote Audio Controls................. 239
Radio Theft Protection.................. 241
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Compass System ............................ 242
system that requires a code number Voice Control Basics ................. 265
to enable it. Setting the Clock ....................... 274
Security System ............................. 276
The security system helps to Cruise Control ................................ 277
discourage vandalism and theft of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ... 280
your vehicle. HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 295
AcuraLink ....................................... 299
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ........ 308
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 326
197
０７／０５／１７０９：１２：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００２０３
Climate Control System
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BARS
DUAL BUTTON WINDSHIELD

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY DEFROSTER BUTTON
AUTO OFF
BUTTON BUTTON
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
MIRROR
HEATER
BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
A/C
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
U.S. models
(Technology package model is shown)
198
０７／０５／１７０９：１２：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００２０４
Interface Dial The selector can be pushed left, Personalization Setting

Many climate control functions can right, up, down, and in. Use the When you unlock the doors with
still be controlled by standard selector to scroll through lists, to your remote, the driver’s ID (Driver
buttons, dials, and knobs, but some select menus, and to highlight menu 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the
functions can only be accessed using items. When you make a selection, climate control settings are turned to
the interface dial. The interface dial push the center of the selector the respective mode automatically
has two parts, a knob and a selector. (ENTER) to go to that selection. when the ignition is turned to the
ON (II) position.
Features
KNOB
ENTER Voice Control System
The climate control system can also
be operated by voice control.
On models with navigation system

See the Navi section in your Quick
Start Guide for an overview of this
system, and the Navigation System
manual for complete details.
SELECTOR
On models without navigation system
The knob turns left and right. Use it Refer to Voice Control Basics for
to make selections or adjustments to complete details (see page 265 ).
a list or menu on the screen.
199
０７／０５／１７０９：１２：５６３１ＳＪＡ６３００２０５
Fan Control Temperature Control Bars Air Conditioning (A/C)

To select the desired temperature, Press the A/C button to view the
push the temperature control bar up climate control display. Pushing
or down. ENTER on the interface selector
turns the air conditioning on and off.
To set the driver’s and passenger’s You will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in
temperature separately, press the the display.
DUAL button. The indicator in the
button will come on. The driver and When you turn the A/C off, the
passenger can each set the system cannot regulate the inside
temperature to the desired setting. temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
To make the driver’s and passenger’s outside temperature.
temperature the same, push the
Press the A/C button to view the DUAL button again. The indicator in
climate control display, then turn the the button goes out, and the
interface knob to increase or passenger’s temperature is set to the
decrease the fan speed and airflow. driver’s temperature.
200
０７／０５／１７０９：１３：１３３１ＳＪＡ６３００２０６
Recirculation Button Windshield Defroster Button Mode Control

When the indicator in the button is This button turns the windshield
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is defrost on and off.
sent throughout the system again. When you push this button, air flows
When the indicator is off, air is from the defroster vents at the base
brought in from the outside of the of the windshield, and the system
vehicle (fresh air mode). automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. When
Features
The outside air intakes for the the indicator in the button is on, the
climate control system are at the passenger’s temperature cannot be
base of the windshield. Keep this set separately from the driver’s.
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Rear Window Defogger Button
The system should be left in fresh This button turns the rear window
air mode under almost all conditions. defogger on and off (see page 146 ). You can select the vents air flows
Keeping the system in recirculation Pushing this button also turns the from. Some air will flow from the
mode, particularly with the A/C off, power mirror heaters on and off. dashboard corner and side vents in
can cause the windows to fog up. all modes.
Switch to recirculation mode when Press the A/C button to view the
driving through dusty or smoky climate control display, then push
conditions, then return to fresh air the interface selector down. Select
mode. any of the modes by turning the
interface knob.
CONTINUED
201
０７／０５／１７０９：１３：２７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２０７
Air flows from the center

and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between

the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor

vents.
Airflow is divided between

the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
When is selected, you can
increase or decrease the
temperature of airflow from the
dashboard vent for the driver’s side
and the passenger’s side without
changing the temperature of airflow
from the floor vent.
Push the interface selector right or

left, then turn the interface knob to
select the desired temperature.
202
０７／０５／１７０９：１３：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２０８
Dual Button Using the Heater 1. Press the A/C button to view
You can set the temperature for the The heater uses engine coolant to the climate control display.
driver’s side and the passenger’s side warm the air. If the engine is cold, it 2. Turn on the A/C by pushing
separately when this button is will be several minutes before you ENTER on the interface selector.
pressed (indicator on). When the feel warm air coming from the You will see A/C ON in the display.
indicator in the DUAL button is off, system. 3. Make sure the temperature is set
you can adjust both sides to the to maximum cool.
same temperature with the driver’s 1. Press the A/C button to view 4. Push the interface selector down,
Features
side temperature control bar. the climate control display. then select by turning the
2. Turn the interface knob to set the interface knob.
Ventilation fan to the desired speed. 5. If the outside air is humid, select
The flow-through ventilation system 3. Push the interface selector down, recirculation mode. If the outside
draws in outside air, circulates it then select and fresh air air is dry, select fresh air mode.
through the interior, then exhausts it mode. 6. Push the interface selector down,
through vents near the rear window. 4. Adjust the warmth of the air with then set the fan to the desired
the temperature control bars. speed by turning the interface
1. Set the temperature to the lower knob.
limit. Using the A/C
2. Make sure the A/C is off. Air conditioning places an extra load If the interior is very warm, you can
3. Select and fresh air mode. on the engine. Watch the engine cool it down more rapidly by partially
4. Set the fan to the desired speed. coolant temperature gauge (see page opening the windows, turning on the
70 ). If it moves near the red zone, air conditioning, and setting the fan
turn off the A/C until the gauge to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
reading returns to normal.
203
０７／０５／１７０９：１３：５７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２０９
Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes To remove fog from the inside of the From the Windows
moisture from the air. When used in windows: 1. Select . The system
combination with the heater, it automatically switches to fresh air
makes the interior warm and dry. 1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or mode and turns on the A/C.
high for faster defrosting. 2. Select .
1. Switch the fan on. 2. Select . The system 3. Set the fan and temperature
2. Turn on the air conditioning. automatically switches to fresh air controls to maximum level.
3. Select and fresh air mode. mode and turns on the A/C.
4. Adjust the temperature to your 3. Adjust the temperature so the To clear the windshield faster, you
preference. airflow feels warm. can close the dashboard corner vents
4. Select to help clear the by rotating the wheel next to it. This
This setting is suitable for all driving rear window. sends more warm air to the
conditions whenever the outside 5. To increase airflow to the windshield defroster vents. Once the
temperature is above 32°F (0°C). windshield, close the corner vents. windshield is clear, select the fresh
air mode to avoid fogging the
When you switch to another mode windows.
from , the A/C setting
returns to the previous setting (on or For your safety, make sure you have
off). Select A/C, then press ENTER a clear view through all the windows
on the interface selector to turn the before driving.
A/C off if it is on.
204
０７／０５／１７０９：１４：０９３１ＳＪＡ６３００２１０
Automatic Climate Control The system automatically selects the Semi-automatic Operation
The automatic climate control proper mix of conditioned and/or You can manually select various
system adjusts the fan speed and heated air that will, as quickly as functions of the climate control
airflow levels to maintain the interior possible, raise or lower the interior system when it is in fully automatic
temperature you select. temperature to your preference. mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interior When you set the temperature to its manual selection causes the word
temperature is independently lower or its upper limit, the system AUTO in the display to go out.
Features
regulated for the driver and runs at full cooling or heating only. It
passenger. If the driver’s side of the does not regulate the interior To Turn Everything Off
vehicle is getting too much sun, the temperature. Press the OFF button. However, a
system will adjust to a lower lack of airflow can cause the
temperature. When you change the fan speed, the windows to fog up. You should keep
fan is taken out of AUTO mode and the fan on at all times so stale air and
1. Press the AUTO button. starts to run at the selected speed. moisture do not build up in the
2. Set the desired temperature with interior and cause fogging.
the temperature control bars.
You will see AUTO in the display
if the climate mode is selected.
205
０７／０５／１７０９：１４：１４３１ＳＪＡ６３００２１１
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight and Temperature

Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The climate control system has two

sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
206
０７／０５／１７０９：１４：２８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２１２
Audio System
Interface Dial The knob turns left and right. Use it Personalization Setting
Most audio system functions can still to make selections or adjustments to When you unlock the doors with
be controlled by standard buttons, a list or menu on the screen. your remote and turn the audio
dials, and knobs, but some functions system on, the driver’s ID (Driver 1
can only be accessed using the The selector can be pushed left, or Driver 2) is detected, and the
interface dial. The interface dial has right, up, down, and in. Use the radio preset memory (see page 210 ),
two parts, a knob and a selector. selector to scroll through lists, to the auto select preset memory (see
select menus, and to highlight menu page 211 ), and the volume and
Features
KNOB items. When you make a selection, sound level settings (see page 214 )
ENTER push the center of the selector are turned to the respective
(ENTER) to go to that selection. memorized mode automatically.
Voice Control System

The audio system can also be
operated by voice control.
On models with navigation system

See the Navi section in your Quick
SELECTOR Start Guide for an overview of this
system, and the Navigation System
manual for complete details.
On models without navigation system

Refer to Voice Control Basics for
complete details (see page 265 ).
207
０７／０５／１７０９：１４：３７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２１３
Audio System
Playing the AM/FM Radio
UPPER DISPLAY
U.S. models (Technology package model is shown) Canadian and Hawaiian models
FM BUTTON
POWER/ POWER/
VOLUME AM/FM VOLUME AM BUTTON
KNOB BUTTON KNOB
TUNE
SEEK TUNE SEEK BUTTONS
BUTTONS BUTTONS BUTTONS
SCAN AUTO
SCAN SELECT
BUTTON BUTTON
BUTTON
AUDIO AUDIO
DISPLAY DISPLAY
BUTTON BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL PRESET BUTTONS INTERFACE DIAL PRESET BUTTONS
208
０７／０５／１７０９：１４：４８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２１４
Audio System
The band and frequency that the

STEREO ICON BAND
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button (AM or FM
button on Canadian and Hawaiian
models). You can also change bands
by pushing the interface selector up.
Each time you push it up, the band
Features
will change to FM1, FM2, or AM. On
the FM bands, STEREO will be
shown on the navigation screen and
ST on the upper display, if the TUNE ICON
station is broadcasting in stereo.
The ignition switch must be in the Stereo reproduction on AM is not TUNE − Use the TUNE button to
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) available. tune the radio to a desired frequency.
position. Press the AUDIO button to Press the button to tune to a
view the audio control display. Turn To Select a Station higher frequency, or the button
the system on by pressing the You can use any of five methods to to tune to a lower frequency. To tune
power/volume knob or the AM/FM find radio stations on the selected with the interface dial, push the
button (AM or FM button on band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the selector down, and turn the knob to
Canadian and Hawaiian models). preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT . TUNE. Then press ENTER on the
Adjust the volume by turning the selector, and turn the knob to the
power/volume knob. desired frequency. To exit the
TUNE mode, press ENTER on the
selector.
CONTINUED
209
０７／０５／１７０９：１５：００３１ＳＪＡ６３００２１５
Audio System
SEEK − The SEEK function To scan with the interface dial, push Preset − Each preset button or
searches up and down from the the selector down, and then push it preset icon can store one frequency
current frequency to find a station to the right. You will see SCAN on AM and two frequencies on FM.
with a strong signal. To activate it, flashing on the screen and the upper To store a preset memory location:
press the or SEEK button, display. 1. Select the desired band, AM or
then release it. You can also activate FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
SEEK by pushing the interface The system will scan for a station two sets of FM frequencies with
selector to the right or left. with a strong signal. When it finds the preset buttons (on-screen
one, it will stop and play that station icons).
for about 10 seconds. If you do
SCAN ICON
nothing, the system will then scan 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
for the next strong station and play it function to tune the radio to a
for 10 seconds. When it plays a desired station.
station that you want to listen to,
press the scan button again, or push 3. Press the preset button, and hold
the interface selector to the right it until you hear a beep. You can
again. also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
SCAN − The SCAN function it for more than 2 seconds.
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
activate it, press the SCAN button, total of six stations on AM and
then release it. twelve stations on FM.
210
０７／０５／１７０９：１５：１０３１ＳＪＡ６３００２１６
Audio System
U.S. models (except Hawaiian) You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
AUTO SEL ICON Push the interface selector down to select cannot find a strong station for
scroll down the screen, highlight every preset button.
A.SEL, then press ENTER on the If you do not like the stations auto
interface selector. You will see select has stored, you can store
A.SEL on the upper display and other frequencies on the preset
AUTO SEL on the screen, and the buttons (icons) as previously
system goes into scan mode for described.
Features
several seconds.
To turn off auto select, press
Canadian and Hawaiian models ENTER on the interface selector
Press the A.SEL button. You will see (press the A.SEL button) again. This
A.SEL on the upper display AUTO restores the presets you originally
AUTO SELECT − If you are SEL on the screen, and the system set.
traveling far from home and can no goes into scan mode for several
longer receive your preset stations, seconds. The system stores the
you can use the auto select feature to frequencies of six AM and twelve
find stations in the local area. FM stations in the preset buttons.
211
０７／０５／１７０９：１５：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００２１７
Audio System
AM/FM Radio Frequencies AM/FM Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
Stations must use these exact and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
frequencies. It is fairly common for Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
stations to round-off the frequency in go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
their advertising, so your radio could completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
display a frequency of 100.9 even the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
though the announcer may identify are close to.
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
212
０７／０５／１７０９：１５：２７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２１８
Audio System
As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
213
０７／０５／１７０９：１５：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２１９
Audio System
Adjusting the Sound

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and
FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the AudioPilot and
Centerpoint features (when playing
a CD-DA) to on or off.
To adjust them, press the AUDIO
button, push the interface selector
down, and turn the interface knob to
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the
selector.
Select the mode you want to adjust

by pushing the interface selector up
or down, or by turning the interface
knob.
SOUND ICON
214
０７／０５／１７０９：１５：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２２０
Audio System
BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass FADER/BALANCE − These CENTER/SUBWOOFER − To

and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, modes adjust the strength of the adjust the strength of the sound
and press ENTER on the interface sound coming from each speaker. from the center or subwoofer
selector. The current setting is Fader adjusts the front-to-back speaker, select it and press ENTER
shown on the display. Turn the strength, while balance adjusts the on the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level, side-to-side strength. To adjust fader interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing and balance, select FADER or and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector. BALANCE, then press ENTER on ENTER on the interface selector.
Features
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
CONTINUED
215
０７／０５／１７０９：１５：４９３１ＳＪＡ６３００２２１
Audio System
AudioPilot − Bose AudioPilot Centerpoint − Bose Centerpoint AudioPilot and Centerpoint are
digital processing monitors sound signal processing processes stereo registered trade marks of the Bose
within the cabin, and helps and matrix surround recordings to corporation.
compensate for unwanted ambient five independent channels, delivering
noise with no perceived change in a multi-channel surround sound
audio volume. experience, even from conventional
stereo discs.
To set this feature on or off, select
AudioPilot, and press ENTER on the To set this feature on or off, select
interface selector. Turn the interface Centerpoint, and press ENTER on
knob to ON or OFF, and press the interface selector. Turn the
ENTER on the interface selector. interface knob to ON or OFF, and
The ON or OFF indicator is shown press ENTER on the interface
on the screen. selector. The ON or OFF indicator is
shown on the display.
NOTE: Centerpoint is only available

when listening to a CD (CD-DA).
216
０７／０５／１７０９：１５：５７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２２２
Audio System
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
SATELLITE RADIO BUTTON
UPPER DISPLAY
POWER/
Features
VOLUME TUNE
KNOB BUTTONS
CATEGORY
BUTTONS DISPLAY/
MODE
SCAN BUTTON
BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
U.S. models PRESET BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL
(Technology package model is shown)
CONTINUED
217
０７／０５／１８１１：３３：１５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２２３
Audio System
Your vehicle is capable of receiving In the category mode, such as Jazz,

XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the Rock, Classical, etc., you can
United States, except Hawaii and navigate through all of the channels
Alaska. within that category. In the channel
XM is a registered trade mark of mode, you can select all of the
XM Satellite Radio, Inc. available channels.
XM Satellite Radio receives signals You may experience periods when

from two satellites to produce clear, XM Satellite Radio does not transmit
high-quality digital reception. It the artist’s name and or the song title
offers many channels in several information. If this happens, there is
categories. Along with a large nothing wrong with your system.
selection of different types of music,
XM Satellite Radio also allows you to MODE − To switch between the Push the AUDIO button to display
view channel and category selections category mode and channel mode, XM information on the screen.
in the audio display. press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes. The To change categories, press the
To listen to XM satellite radio, turn CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is CATEGORY button, or push the
the ignition switch to the displayed on the screen. To switch interface selector left or right.
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. the mode with the interface dial,
Push the power/volume knob to turn scroll down, select MODE, and press
on the audio system, and press the ENTER on the selector.
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
218
０７／０５／１７０９：１６：１７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２２４
Audio System
The system plays each channel in

numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
SCAN button or push the interface
selector to the right again.
Features
TUNE ICON
To change channels, press the SCAN − The scan function gives

TUNE button, or scroll down with you a sampling of all channels while
the interface selector, select TUNE, in the channel mode. In the category
and press ENTER on the selector. mode, only the channels within that
Then turn the interface knob to the category are scanned. To activate
desired channel. In the category SCAN, press the SCAN button. To
mode, you can only select channels scan with the interface dial, scroll
within that category. down, and push interface selector to
the right. You will see SCAN on the
screen.
CONTINUED
219
０７／０５／１７０９：１６：３１３１ＳＪＡ６３００２２５
Audio System
2. Use the TUNE or SCAN function

XM BAND to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels

within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
3. Pick the preset button you want

for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the

Preset − You can store up to 12 first six channels.
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one 5. Press the button or scroll
channel from the XM1 band and one up again. The other XM band will
channel from the XM2 band. be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.
To store a channel:
1. Press the button or scroll Once a channel is stored, press and
up by pushing the interface release the proper preset button to
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2 tune to it.
will be shown on the display.
220
０７／０５／１７０９：１６：３９３１ＳＪＡ６３００２２６
Audio System
The XM satellites are in orbit over

Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
Features
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
Operation of RL model in Alaska

Because XM is unavailable in Alaska,
the XM hardware equipped with
your vehicle cannot be operated.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
CONTINUED
221
０７／０５／１７０９：１６：５４３１ＳＪＡ６３００２２７
Audio System
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: radio I.D. number, press the TUNE
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for Your I.D. will appear in the display.
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. After you’ve registered with XM
Driving on the north side of an Radio, keep your audio system in the
east/west mountain road. Receiving XM Satellite Radio Satellite Radio mode while you wait
Driving on the north side of a Service for activation. This should take about
large commercial truck on an If your XM Radio service has expired 30 minutes.
east/west road. or you purchased your vehicle from
Driving in tunnels. a previous owner, you can listen to a While waiting for activation, make
Driving on a road beside a vertical sampling of the broadcasts available sure your vehicle remains in an open
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south on XM Satellite Radio. With the area with good reception. Once your
of you. ignition switch in the ACCESSORY audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
Driving on the lower level of a (I) or the ON (II) position, push the or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,
multi-tiered road. power/volume knob to turn on the and you’ll be able to listen to XM
Driving on a single lane road audio system, and press the Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
alongside dense trees taller than button. A variety of music continue to send an activation signal
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. types and styles will play. to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from the activation request. If the
There may be other geographic If you decide to purchase XM service has not been activated after
situations that could affect satellite Satellite Radio service, contact XM 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
radio reception. Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
222
０７／０５／１７０９：１７：０５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２２８
Audio System
Operating the Disc Changer
UPPER DISPLAY
Features
U.S. models (Technology package model is shown) Canadian and Hawaiian models
LOAD EJECT LOAD EJECT
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
DISC DISC
BUTTON BUTTON
SKIP TUNE SKIP TUNE
BUTTONS BUTTONS BUTTONS BUTTONS
SCAN POWER/ SCAN POWER/
BUTTON VOLUME BUTTON VOLUME
KNOB KNOB
AUDIO AUDIO
DISPLAY DISPLAY
BUTTON BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL
CONTINUED
223
０７／０５／１７０９：１７：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００２２９
Audio System
Your vehicle’s audio system has an The changer can also play MP3 or
in-dash disc changer with the same WMA format (see page 230 ).
controls used for the radio. To
operate the disc changer, the ignition DVD-A discs not meeting DVD
switch must be in the ACCESSORY verification standards may not be
(I) or the ON (II) position. playable.
The disc changer can play these disc The changer cannot play DVD-V or
formats: DVD-R/RW formats.
CD (CD-DA)
CD-R/RW Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
DVD-A discs are not playable.
DTSTM
‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’
The disc packages or jackets should are registered trademarks of Digital
have one of these marks. Theater Systems, Inc.
You cannot load and play 3-inch

(8-cm) discs in this system.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.

The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
224
０７／０５／１７０９：１７：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２３０
Audio System
Loading Discs in the Changer Do not try to insert a disc until 2. Insert a disc into the disc slot
To load multiple discs in one ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could when the disc load indicator turns
operation: damage the audio unit. green, and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears on
1. Press and hold the LOAD button the upper display at the same time.
on the changer unit until you hear 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all Insert the disc only about halfway;
a beep. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ on six positions are loaded. If you are the drive will pull it in the rest of
the upper display, and the disc not loading all six positions, press the way. You will see the disc
load indicator turns red and starts the LOAD button again after the number blinking on the upper
Features
blinking. last disc has loaded. display, and the disc load indicator
turns red again and blinks as the
2. Insert the disc into the disc slot If you stop loading discs before all disc is loaded.
when the disc load indicator turns six positions are filled, the system
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load Do not try to insert a disc until
upper display at the same time. operation, and begin playing the last ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
Insert it only halfway; the drive disc loaded. damage the audio unit.
will pull it in the rest of the way.
You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ on the upper To load a single disc: 3. You will see ‘‘DISC READ’’ on the
display, and the disc load indicator 1. Press and release the LOAD upper display, then the system
turns red again and blinks as the button on the changer unit. You begins to play the disc.
disc is loaded. will see ‘‘BUSY’’ on the upper
display, and the disc load indicator
3. When the disc load indicator turns turns red and starts blinking.
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears on the
upper display again, insert the
next disc in the slot.
CONTINUED
225
０７／０５／１７０９：１７：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２３１
Audio System
You can also select the empty

position by pressing the appropriate
preset button.
You can load a disc(s) in any mode

(AM, FM, XM radio, or AUX) if you
do not select an empty position.
You cannot select the empty position

if there is no disc in the changer.
EMPTY POSITION
You can load a disc into an empty

position while a disc is playing. Press
the AUDIO button to view the audio
control display. Select the empty
position (‘‘No Disc’’ is shown on the
audio control display) by rotating the
interface dial. Then press ENTER on
the selector to enter your selection.
The current disc stops playing and
starts the loading sequence. The disc
just loaded will play.
226
０７／０５／１７０９：１７：５７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２３２
Audio System
To Play a Disc When playing a CD (CD-DA) with To Choose a Track

CD-TEXT, the audio control display
shows the disc number, album name, CURRENT TRACK
track number, and elapsed time.
When playing a CD without this
information, the number of the disc
and track playing and the elapsed
time are shown on the audio control
Features
display.
To Change Tracks
Each time you press and release the
CURRENT DISC button or push the interface
selector to the right, the player skips
Select the changer by pressing the forward to the beginning of the next You can also choose a track directly
DISC/AUX button. The system will track. Press and release the from a track list. Press ENTER on
begin playing the last selected disc in button or push the interface the interface selector, and the track
the disc changer. You will see the selector to the left to skip backward list screen will be shown. If there are
current disc position highlighted. to the beginning of the current track. no track names, track numbers are
Press the button or push the displayed. You will see the current
To select a different disc, press the interface selector to the left again to track is highlighted. Turn the
corresponding number on the preset skip to the previous track. interface knob to select the desired
buttons, or turn the interface knob to To move rapidly within a track, press track, then press ENTER on the
highlight the desired disc, then press and hold the / or / interface selector.
ENTER on the interface selector. button.
CONTINUED
227
０７／０５／１７０９：１８：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２３３
Audio System
To exit the track list display, press push the interface selector to the left current disc plays for about 10
the AUDIO button, or push the again within 10 seconds. seconds. You will see SCAN next to
interface selector to the left. DISC on the screen and SCAN on
If you don’t, the system advances to the upper display. To hear the rest of
Track Scan the next track, plays about 10 the disc, press the SCAN button or
seconds of it, and continues through push the interface selector to the
the rest of the tracks the same way. right again within 10 seconds.
SCAN ICON
Disc Scan If you don’t, the system advances to
the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
of it, and continues through the rest
SCAN ICON of the discs the same way. When the
system reaches the last disc, DISC
SCAN is canceled, and the disc plays
normally.
When you press the SCAN button or

scroll down and push the interface
selector to the left, the next track of
the current track plays for about 10
seconds. You will see SCAN next to When you press and hold the SCAN
TRACK on the screen and SCAN on button until you hear a beep or scroll
the upper display. To hear the rest of down and push the interface selector
the track, press the SCAN button or to the right, the first track of the
228
０７／０５／１７０９：１８：１９３１ＳＪＡ６３００２３４
Audio System
Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play
REPEAT ICON REPEAT ICON RANDOM ICON
Features
TRACK REPEAT ICON DISC REPEAT ICON TRACK RANDOM ICON
To replay the current track To replay the current disc To play the tracks of the current disc
continuously, use the interface continuously, use the interface in random order, use the interface
selector to scroll down, select selector to scroll down, select DISC selector to scroll down, select
TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER REPEAT, and press ENTER on the TRACK RANDOM, and press
on the interface selector. As a interface selector. As a reminder, ENTER on the interface selector. As
reminder, you will see REPEAT next you will see REPEAT next to DISC a reminder, you will see RANDOM
to TRACK on the screen. To turn on the screen. To turn this feature next to TRACK on the screen. To
this feature off, highlight TRACK off, highlight DISC REPEAT (if not turn this feature off, highlight
REPEAT (if not already highlighted), already highlighted), and press TRACK RANDOM (if not already
and press ENTER on the interface ENTER on the interface selector highlighted), and press ENTER on
selector again. again. the interface selector again.
229
０７／０５／１７０９：１８：３８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２３５
Audio System
To Pause a Disc To take the system out of disc mode, The specifications of the compatible
To pause a disc, press the press the AM/FM (AM or FM on MP3 file are:
corresponding number of the Canadian, and Hawaiian models), or Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
current disc on the preset buttons. DISC/AUX, or button to (MPEG1)
To play the disc again, press the switch to the radio, or satellite radio 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
preset button again. (U.S. models only), or auxiliary input Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
while a disc is playing. When you 112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
You can also pause a disc on the return to disc mode by pressing the (MPEG1)
audio control display. Press the DISC/AUX button, play will continue 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
AUDIO button to view the display, at the same point that it left off. 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
select the corresponding number of Compatible with variable bit rate and
the current disc on the preset icons Playing a DVD-A Disc multi-session
by turning the interface knob, then You can play a DVD-A disc in the
press ENTER on the interface disc changer. The disc controls are The specifications of the compatible
selector. To play the disc again, same as previously described. WMA file are:
select the preset icon, then press Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
ENTER again. Playing an MP3/WMA Disc Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192
The changer plays MP3/WMA discs kbps
To Stop Playing a Disc in recorded order. Maximum Compatible with variable bit rate and
If you turn the system off while a playable file layers are 8, and total multi-session
disc is playing, either with the playable tracks are 255. If your disc
power/volume knob or by turning has a complex structure, the changer To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the
off the ignition switch, the disc will takes some time to read the disc disc controls previously described,
stay in the drive. When you turn the before beginning play. along with the following information.
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
230
０７／０５／１７０９：１８：４８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２３６
Audio System
Name Display Function When playing a CD compressed in If the title is too long, it will not show
U.S. models except Hawaiian MP3/WMA format, the display all at once. Press and hold the DISP/
Each time you press the DISP/ changes from folder name, to file MODE button, and the rest of the
MODE button while playing a CD name, to track tag, to artist tag, to title will show on the center display.
(CD-DA), the center display changes album tag, and then to normal
from album name, to track name, to display each time you press the You will also see the album and track
artist name, and then to normal DISP/MODE button. If the disc was name (CD-TEXT), or the folder and
display. If the disc was not recorded not recorded with this information, file name (MP3/WMA) under these
Features
with CD-TEXT, ‘‘NO INFO’’ will be ‘‘NO INFO’’ will be shown on the conditions:
shown on the center display. center display.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
Each time a new track, file, or

folder plays.
CONTINUED
231
０７／０５／１７０９：１８：５８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２３７
Audio System
Folder Repeat (MP3/WMA Folder Random (MP3/WMA

CURRENT FOLDER Mode) Mode)
FOLDER REPEAT ICON FOLDER RANDOM ICON
FOLDER REPEAT ICON FOLDER RANDOM ICON

To enter the FOLDER LIST, press
ENTER on the selector, select a To replay the current folder To play the tracks of the current
folder by turning the interface knob, continuously, use the interface folder in random order, use the
then press ENTER on the selector. If selector to scroll down, select interface selector to scroll down,
you want to move to the parent FOLDER REPEAT with the select FOLDER RANDOM with the
folder, push the selector up. If there interface knob, and press ENTER on interface knob, and press ENTER on
are no folder names, ‘‘No Title’’ is the interface selector. As a reminder, the interface selector. As a reminder,
displayed. You will see the current you will see FOLDER REPEAT next you will see FOLDER RANDOM
folder highlighted. to the disc number on the screen. To next to the disc number on the
turn this feature off, highlight screen. To turn this feature off,
FOLDER REPEAT (if not already highlight FOLDER RANDOM (if not
highlighted), and press ENTER on already highlighted), and press
the selector again. ENTER on the selector again.
232
０７／０５／１７０９：１９：０８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２３８
Audio System
Removing Discs from the To remove a different disc from the

Changer changer, first select it by pressing
To remove the disc that is currently the corresponding number on the
playing, press and release the eject preset button or turning the
( ) button. You will see interface knob, and pressing ENTER
‘‘EJECT’’ on the upper display. When on the interface selector. When that
you remove the disc from the slot, disc begins playing, press the eject
the system begins the load sequence button.
Features
so you can load another disc in that
position. If you do not load another When you press the eject button
disc within 10 seconds, the system while listening to the radio, or with
selects the previous mode [AM, FM1, the audio system turned off, the disc
FM2, or XM Radio (U.S. models that was last selected is ejected.
except Hawaiian)]. After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
If you do not remove the disc from next disc in numerical order. By
the slot, the system will reload the doing this six times, you can remove
disc after 10 seconds and put the all the discs from the changer.
disc changer in pause mode. To
begin playing the disc, press the You can also eject discs when the
DISC/AUX button. ignition switch is off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button.
233
０７／０５／１７０９：１９：１９３１ＳＪＡ６３００２３９
Disc Changer Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the

error messages you may see in the Error Cause Solution
display while playing a disc. Message
Press the disc eject button, and remove the
If you see an error message in the disc(s). Check for an error indication. For more
display while playing a disc, press FOCUS Error information, see page 235. Insert the disc(s)
the eject button. After ejecting the again. If the code does not disappear or the
disc, check it for damage or disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
deformation. If there is no damage, Press the disc eject button, and remove the
insert the disc again. disc(s). Check for an error indication. For more
Mechanical Error information, see page 235. Insert the disc(s)
The audio system will try to play the again. If the code does not disappear or the
disc. If there is still a problem, the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
error message will reappear. Press High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
the eject button, and pull out the disc. normal.
Insert a different disc. If the new

disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
234
０７／０５／１７０９：１９：３１３１ＳＪＡ６３００２４０
Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a disc is not being played,
use only high quality discs labeled store it in its case to protect it from
for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the disc To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Features
changer. Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- A new disc may be rough on the
shaped discs may jam in the drive inner and outer edges. The small
or cause other problems. plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
Handle your discs properly to recording surface of the disc, stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
prevent damage and skipping. causing skipping or other problems. These, along with contamination
Remove these pieces by rubbing the from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
inner and outer edges with the side tip pens, can cause the disc to not
of a pencil or pen. play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc changer.
235
０７／０５／１７０９：１９：４５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２４１
Additional Information of 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic
to the right: Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped Burrs

Cracked
236
０７／０５／１７０９：１９：５８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２４２
4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape Audio unit may not play the
Fingerprints, scratches, etc. following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due

to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the

discs may cause the sound to skip.
Can Shape Arrow Shape
237
０７／０５／１７０９：２０：０５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２４３
Auxiliary Input Jack
Connect a compatible audio unit to

the jack, then select it by pressing
DISC/AUX button.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
The auxiliary input jack is in the

console compartment (see page
191 ). The system will accept
auxiliary input from standard audio When a compatible audio unit is
accessories using a standard 1/8- selected, you will see ‘‘AUX’’ on the
inch miniplug. display.
238
０７／０５／１７０９：２０：１５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２４４
Remote Audio Controls
The MODE button changes the If you are playing a disc, the system
mode. Pressing the button skips to the beginning of the next
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, track/file (in MP3/WMA mode)
MODE XM Satellite Radio (U.S. models each time you press the top (＋) of
BUTTON except Hawaiian), or a disc (if a disc the CH button. Press the bottom
is loaded). (−) to return to the beginning of the
VOL current track/file. Press it again to
BUTTON If you are listening to the radio, use return to the previous track/file.
Features
CH the CH button to change stations.
BUTTON Each time you press the top (＋) of To select a different disc (folder in
the button, the system goes to the MP3/WMA mode), press and hold
next preset station on the band you the top (＋) or bottom (−) of the
are listening to. Press the bottom CH button until you hear a beep.
Three controls for the audio system (−) to go back to the previous
are mounted in the steering wheel station.
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your To activate the seek function, press
hand from the wheel. and hold the top (＋) or bottom (−)
of the CH button until you hear a
The VOL button adjusts the volume beep. The system searches up or
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top down from the current frequency to
or bottom of the button, hold it until find a station with a strong signal.
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
CONTINUED
239
０７／０５／１７０９：２０：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００２４５
Remote Audio Controls
On U.S. models except Hawaiian

If you are listening to XM Satellite
Radio, use the CH button to change
channels. Each time you press the
top (＋) of the button, the system
goes to the next preset channel.
Press the bottom (−) to go back to
the previous preset channel.
To select a different channel of the

category you are listening to, press
and hold the top (＋) or bottom (−)
of the CH button until you hear a
beep.
240
０７／０５／１７０９：２０：３０３１ＳＪＡ６３００２４６
Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system may If your vehicle’s battery is discon- push the power/volume knob. The
disable itself if it is disconnected nected or goes dead, or the radio serial number will appear in two sets
from electrical power for any reason. fuse is removed, the audio system of four digits.
To make it work again, you must will disable itself. If this happens,
enter a specific five-digit code with you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the upper The system will retain your AM and
the preset buttons. Because there display the next time you turn on the FM presets even if power is
are hundreds of number system. Use the preset buttons to disconnected.
combinations possible from the five enter the code. The code is located
Features
digits, making the system work on the radio code card included in
without knowing the exact code is your owner’s manual kit. When it is
nearly impossible. entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
You should have received a radio
code card that lists your audio If you make a mistake entering the
system’s code and serial numbers. It code, do not start over; complete the
is best to store this card in a safe five-digit sequence, then enter the
place at home. In addition, you correct code. You have 10 tries to
should write the audio system’s enter the correct code.
serial number in this owner’s manual.
If the code card is lost, your dealer
If you lose the card, you must obtain can access your code with your
the code number from your dealer. radio’s serial number. To access the
To do this, you will need the audio serial number, turn the radio on. It
system’s serial number. must display ‘‘ ’’, then turn
the radio off. Push and hold the
preset 1 and preset 6 buttons, then
241
０７／０５／１７０９：２０：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２４７
Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
The compass system in your vehicle

contains several convenient features,
including a direction and elevation
UPPER finder, a calendar reminder for
DISPLAY important events, a calculator, and a
trip computer to help you track your
mileage and fuel economy.
SCREEN
System Controls
The controls for the compass system
are on the center console panel.
These controls are also used to
operate the climate control system
(see page 198 ) and the audio system
MENU (see page 208 ).
COMPASS BUTTON
BUTTON Compass Button
INTERFACE
DIAL Press this button to display the
Compass screen (see page 247 ).
CANCEL TRIP
BUTTON BUTTON Menu Button
SET UP
Press this button to display the Main
(Display mode)
BUTTON BUTTON Menu screen (see page 248 ) for the
trip computer, calendar, calculator,
and voice command Help.
242
０７／０５／１７０９：２１：０１３１ＳＪＡ６３００２４８
Trip Button Interface Dial select menus, and to highlight menu

Press this button to display the Trip items. When you make a selection,
Computer screen (see page 249 ). KNOB push the center of the selector in
ENTER (ENTER) to go to that selection.
Set Up Button
Press the button to display the set up In almost all cases, you can enter a
screen (see page 254 ) to change and selection into the system by pushing
update information in the system. in on the interface selector.
Features
(Display Mode) Button Screen
This button switches the display All selections and instructions are
between day mode, night mode, and displayed on the screen.
off (see page 258 ). SELECTOR
Clean the screen with a soft damp
Cancel Button Most functions of the compass cloth. You may use a mild cleanser
Press this button to cancel the system can be accessed with the intended for use on liquid crystal
current screen and return to the interface dial. The interface dial has displays (LCDs). Harsher chemicals
previous screen. two parts: a knob and a selector. may damage the screen.
The knob turns left and right. Use it Upper Display

to make selections or adjustments to Shows the radio band, frequency,
a list or menu on the screen. volume, the climate control status,
and the time.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
243
０７／０５／１７０９：２１：１２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２４９
System Start-up The first screen to appear is the

Throughout the compass system compass system globe screen. The
section, the icon ‘‘ ’’ is used to screen then changes to the
indicate features that are dependent disclaimer screen:
on the ‘‘Driver number’’ as displayed
on the multi-information display
‘‘Welcome’’ display.

the ON (II) position, the compass
system to boots up within a few
seconds.
Please read the disclaimer carefully

before you continue. To go to the
compass screen, select OK by
pushing in the interface selector.
NOTE:
The OK button does not appear
immediately. It appears after the
system is loaded. The OK
command cannot be activated by
voice.
244
０７／０５／１７０９：２１：２１３１ＳＪＡ６３００２５０
If you do not push in on the If you select OK , the reminder will

interface selector, the screen will not show up again. If you wish to
go dark after 30 seconds. To return have the reminder show up again
to the disclaimer screen, press any later in the day, select Remind
compass or voice control button. Later and push in on the interface
selector.
NOTE: If you do not select OK , and
then enter the Set up or Trip If you press the CANCEL button, the
Features
computer screens, some items are message will be displayed the next
not available, and will show up as time you start the vehicle.
darkened buttons (grayed out).
NOTE: The system will display the
current message and any older or
If any calendar reminders were previously unread messages, with
previously entered, the calendar the newest message listed first.
reminder screen is displayed next.
The calendar reminder screen

remains displayed until you select
OK , Remind Later or press the
CANCEL button.
245
０７／０５／１７０９：２１：３１３１ＳＪＡ６３００２５１
Keyless Memory SettingsTM When the keyless access remote is For information on ‘‘linking’’ and
The vehicle ‘‘senses’’ the driver deliberately ‘‘unlinked,’’ (as when ‘‘unlinking’’ the keyless access
number, based on which keyless giving the key to a valet) the multi- remotes, see page 170 .
remote is used to unlock the vehicle. information display will display
If two drivers with remotes approach ‘‘Welcome.’’ Then the following
the vehicle at the same time, the occurs:
welcome display and related settings
are based on which remote the The calendar feature is not
vehicle sensed first ‘‘senses.’’ selectable (buttons grayed out).
NOTE: If both remotes come within Setup values (like volume,

range simultaneously, the brightness, etc.) can be changed
‘‘Welcome’’ display may be but are not remembered the next
unpredictable. time you restart the vehicle.
The compass system uses the driver

number (as recognized by the multi-
information display) to personalize
the compass system. For example, if
Driver 1 unlocks the vehicle, the
‘‘Driver 1’’ personal address book
and other navigation settings are
automatically loaded when the
vehicle is started. There is no way to
change from one driver’s settings to
another while driving.
246
０７／０５／１７０９：２１：４１３１ＳＪＡ６３００２５２
The Compass Screen
Features
You can see the current latitude, If the system does not receive the If the GPS reception is low, the
longitude, and elevation at any time elevation information, the display display shows a ‘‘Low GPS
when you press the COMPASS shows only current latitude and reception’’ message.
button or say ‘‘Display map guide.’’ longitude.
The date and time is also displayed.
NOTE: If the battery is disconnected

or the fuse for the compass system
is removed, the system may require
GPS initialization (see page 260 ).
247
０７／０５／１７０９：２１：５２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２５３
Main Menu Voice Command Help
When you say ‘‘Display menu’’ or The voice command help screen To use the voice command tutorial,
press the MENU button, the display displays several topics that help you say or select ‘‘Getting started.’’ The
changes to the Main menu screen. to understand your vehicle’s voice display changes to the Getting
To select a menu item, turn the control system. To go to the voice started screen.
interface knob to highlight the item, command help screen, say or select
then press the interface selector. ‘‘Voice command help.’’ Then select Select the line number of the tutorial
a topic by saying either the topic you want to view, and the tutorial will
NOTE: If some items appear grayed name or its line number. automatically be read out. To stop
out and cannot be selected, the the system from reading the tutorial,
vehicle does not sense the driver’s move the interface knob to the right.
ID of the remote (see page 170 ).
248
０７／０５／１７０９：２２：０３３１ＳＪＡ６３００２５４
For a listing of all voice commands, Trip Computer

see Voice Command Index on page
268 .
Features
When you make a selection (such as The trip computer screens display
Navigation general command help), the trip information from the multi-
you will see the help commands that information display in the gauge
can be used with the voice control. assembly.
To have the system read the list, say
‘‘Read list,’’ or select by To go to the trip computer, say ‘‘Trip
moving the interface selector to the Computer,’’ select Trip computer
right, and the system will read the from the main menu, or press the
list to you. TRIP button on the center console
panel.
CONTINUED
249
０７／０５／１７０９：２２：２３３１ＳＪＡ６３００２５５
MPG Range Calendar

Shows the instantaneous fuel Shows the estimated distance you
economy in miles per gallon. can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. This distance is estimated
Instant Fuel from the average fuel economy over
Shows you the current fuel economy the last several miles, so it will vary
in miles per gallon. with changes in speed, traffic, etc.
Average Fuel Resetting the Display

Shows you the average fuel economy The average fuel, average speed, and
in miles per gallon since the display elapsed time meters can be reset
was last reset. automatically.
Elapsed Time NOTE:

Shows the elapsed time that the The ‘‘Average Fuel’’ and ‘‘MPG’’ The calendar feature allows you to
ignition has been on since the display may vary from actual fuel enter events and be reminded of
was last reset. consumed. These values are them in the future.
estimates only. When you say ‘‘Calendar’’ or select
Average Speed The ‘‘Range’’ value is approximate, the Calendar on the Main Menu
Shows you the average speed in and may vary from actual range. screen, the display changes to the
miles per hour since the display was calendar screen.
last reset.
Dates with an icon indicate there is a
schedule entry for that date.
250
０７／０５／１７０９：２２：３６３１ＳＪＡ６３００２５６
You can scroll through the calendar Entering Your Schedule Reminder
day by day by turning the interface The default for the reminder is ON.
knob, or select the day by voice. This allows the system to remind
When you push the interface you of the calendar item the next
selector up or down, you can also time you start the vehicle. See
scroll through the calendar week by System Start-up on page 244 .
week. When you say ‘‘Next month’’
or ‘‘Previous month,’’ or when you Title
Features
push the interface selector to the Say or select ‘‘Edit title,’’ then enter
right or left, the system displays the the name of your title using the
next or previous month. interface selector. Once you enter
the title, say or select ‘‘Done.’’ The
title will be displayed on the
specified date of the Calendar screen.
Set your schedule by selecting the
day on the calendar, and the display Message
changes to the Edit schedule Say or select ‘‘Edit message,’’ and
screen. the system will show the Enter
Message screen. You can enter a
message on two lines. Use to
change the line. Once you have
entered the message, say or select
‘‘Done.’’ The message will be
displayed on the specified date of the
calendar screen.
CONTINUED
251
０７／０５／１７０９：２２：４８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２５７
Message Icon NOTE: Edit Date

Say or select ‘‘Message icon,’’ and You can only enter one message
the system displays a list of icons per day.
you can select to help identify the To re-activate a previous message,
type of message you entered. The turn the reminder setting from
message icon you choose will be OFF to ON. If it is not turned on,
displayed alongside the specified the reminder will not be displayed
date on the calendar screen. when you start vehicle.
For more information, refer to
Delete System Start-up on page 244 .
From the calendar screen, select
the date of the schedule you wish to
remove. To remove the schedule,
say or select ‘‘Delete.’’
This allows you to move your
Done calendar entry to a different date. If
Once you have finished entering the you say or select ‘‘Edit date,’’ the
schedule, say or select ‘‘Done.’’ The calendar screen is displayed with
calendar screen is redisplayed and a existing entries grayed out. Select a
category icon appears. new day and the edit schedule
screen is redisplayed with the new
date.
252
０７／０５／１７０９：２３：００３１ＳＪＡ６３００２５８
Calculator Convert 3. Turn the interface knob until the

conversion you want is highlighted
(weight, for example), then push
the selector in to select it. The
screen for that conversion type
appears (see illustration in step 4).
Features
When you say or select ‘‘Calculator,’’ Use the interface selector to control
the display changes to the the calculator, and calculator
Calculator screen. ‘‘conversion’’ feature.
To convert a unit of measurement,
Enter the digits and operation do this:
symbols with the interface selector.
1. Enter a numeric value to be
converted (for example, 100).
2. Push the interface selector down

to select Unit conversion. The
screen above appears. CONTINUED
253
０７／０５／１７０９：２３：０９３１ＳＪＡ６３００２５９
System Set-up First Set up Screen

The set-up functions consist of three
different screens that allow you to
change and update information in
the system. To display the set up
screen, say ‘‘Set up’’ or press the
SET UP button, and then select an
item. To select more setup items, say
‘‘More,’’ or select MORE at the top
right corner of the screen.
4. Turn the interface knob until the The first setup screen allows you to
unit you want to convert from is change the system’s brightness,
highlighted (kilogram, for contrast, black level, volume, and
example), then push the selector interface dial feedback. To select a
in to select it as it the example setup item, turn the interface knob
above. until it is highlighted, then push the
interface selector in to select it.
254
０７／０５／１７０９：２３：２６３１ＳＪＡ６３００２６０
Brightness Black Level Volume

There are 11 possible brightness There are 11 possible black level To adjust the volume of the system
settings. To change the brightness, settings. To change the black level, voice, do one of these actions:
say ‘‘Brightness up’’ or ‘‘Brightness say ‘‘Black level up’’ or ‘‘Black level
down.’’ You can also select down.’’ You can also select Black Say ‘‘Volume up’’ or ‘‘Volume down.’’
Brightness and change the setting Level and change the setting by
by turning the interface knob. turning the Interface knob. Changes Select Volume, then change the
to the display are very subtle − this setting by turning the interface
Features
Tip: If you are having trouble viewing is normal. knob.
the screen in bright lighting conditions,
try increasing the brightness. NOTE: You can have separate Select volume off.
daytime and nighttime settings for
Contrast brightness, contrast, and black level. NOTE: If you turn the volume off,
There are 11 possible contrast Adjust each setting when the display you will not hear voice command
settings. To adjust the contrast, say is in either daytime or nighttime confirmations.
‘‘Contrast up’’ or ‘‘Contrast down.’’ mode. Use the Display mode button
You can also select Contrast and (see page 243 ) to select daytime or
change the setting by turning the nighttime mode.
interface knob. Changes to the
display are very subtle − this is
normal.
CONTINUED
255
０７／０５／１７０９：２３：３７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２６１
Interface Dial Feedback Second Set up Screen say ‘‘Backward,’’ or move the
Changing this setting allows you to interface selector to the left to select
control when (and if) the system will BACK.
read the current selection you
choose with the interface dial. This
feature can minimize the need to
look at the screen while operating
the dial. The three settings are
explained in the following table. The
factory default setting is AUTO.
Setting Feedback Level
On The system always The second setup screen allows you

reads what you select. to change the system’s voice
recognition feedback, voice gender,
Auto The system reads your and clock settings. To select a setup
(default) selection only while item, turn the interface knob until it
the vehicle is moving. is highlighted, then push the
interface selector in to select it.
No The system does not
read your selection. To view the second setup screen, say
‘‘More,’’ or move the interface
selector to the right to select MORE.
To go back to the first setup screen,
256
０７／０５／１７０９：２３：５４３１ＳＪＡ６３００２６２
Voice Recognition Feedback Third Set up Screen Color

Allows you to turn voice control
system prompts ON or OFF . To
select ON or OFF, turn the interface
knob to the right or left, then press
the interface selector. When OFF ,
you will not hear the voice control
system confirmations or prompts.
Features
Voice
Allows you to select the guidance
voice: MALE or FEMALE. To
select MALE or FEMALE, turn the
interface knob to the right or left,
then press the interface selector. The third setup screen allows you to To view the Select a color screen,
change the system’s screen color say ‘‘Color,’’ or select COLOR on the
Clock Adjustment and verbal reminders. To select a screen. You can choose from one of
You can adjust the clock of your setup item, turn the interface knob five colors for the day and night
system. When the battery is until it is highlighted, then push the display modes.
disconnected or the fuse for the interface selector in to select it.
compass system is removed, you
need to reset the time. See page To view the third setup screen, move
274 for more information on setting the interface selector down. To
the clock. return to the first setup screen, say
‘‘Backward,’’ or move the interface
selector to the left to select BACK. CONTINUED
257
０７／０５／１７０９：２４：０８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２６３
To change the color, select Day or Verbal Reminder Setting Display Mode
night by turning the interface knob This function allows you to turn ON Pressing the (Display
to the right or left. Press the or OFF verbal reminders. Examples mode) button allows you to switch
interface selector, then turn the of these reminders include: display modes.
interface knob to select desired color.
Press the interface selector to enter Driving with the parking brake on Each time you turn the ignition
your choice. switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
Driving with the trunk or a door position, the display mode is in auto.
NOTE: open The screen changes between day
Choose silver metal (factory and night modes when you turn the
default) as the Day color to obtain A reminder to fasten the driver’s headlights on and off.
the best display contrast. and front passenger’s seat belts
Choose black metal (factory To override the auto mode, select
default) as the Night color to To select ON or OFF, turn the either day or night mode. This can
obtain the best display contrast. interface knob to the right or left, be useful if you want to use the
then press the interface selector. headlights during the day. Be aware
that using day mode at night will
make the screen extremely bright.
258
０７／０５／１７０９：２４：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００２６４
System Initialization Entering the Security Code place in case you need the codes. If
If for any reason, you lose power to you lose the cards, you must obtain
the compass system (the battery was the security codes from your dealer.
disconnected), the system needs to
be initialized before you can use it. Enter the four-digit compass system
security code. If you have entered it
Initialization requires this: correctly, the display changes to the
Disclaimer screen. You have ten
Features
Entry of the compass system 4- chances to enter the correct code. If
digit security code to ‘‘unlock’’ the all ten are incorrect, turn the ignition
system. to OFF, then back to ON (II) to have
ten more chances to enter the
GPS initialization. This may not be correct code.
needed depending on how long the
system was without power. If the battery goes dead or is To enter the code, turn the interface
disconnected for any reason, you will knob to select the number, then
have to enter a security code into press the interface selector to enter
both the audio system and the it. Keep doing the same procedure to
compass system before you can use enter all four correct numbers. If you
it again. need to delete the number you
entered mistakenly, move the
When you purchased the vehicle, interface selector to the right.
you should have received two cards
that have the audio and compass
system’s security codes and serial
numbers. Keep these cards in a safe CONTINUED
259
０７／０５／１７０９：２４：２７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２６５
Follow the instructions in the audio GPS initialization If this procedure is not necessary the
system section to enter the 5-digit system proceeds directly to the
audio code (see page 241 ). The Compass screen (see page 247 ).
system voice will not operate if the During initialization, the system
audio code is not entered searches for all available GPS
satellites, and obtains their orbital
information. During this procedure
the vehicle should be out in the open
with a clear view of the sky.
Depending on the length of time the

battery was disconnected, your
system may require GPS
initialization. If it does, the above
screen appears. Follow the
instructions on the screen.
260
０７／０５／１７０９：２４：３８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２６６
After 30 minutes with this screen License notice

displayed, turn off the engine and You have acquired a device
restart the vehicle. If you now see (‘‘DEVICE’’) that includes software
the Disclaimer screen, the GPS licensed by ALPINE ELECTRONICS,
initialization is complete. INC., from an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation (collectively ‘‘MS’’).
NOTE: Those installed software products of
The average acquiring time is less MS origin, as well as associated
Features
than 10 minutes, but it can take as media, printed materials, and
long as 45 minutes. ‘‘online’’ or electronic documentation
If the system is still unable to (‘‘SOFTWARE’’) are protected by
acquire a signal, follow the international intellectual property
instructions on the screen, or laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE
contact your local dealer for is licensed, not sold. All rights
If within ten minutes the system fails assistance. reserved.
to locate a sufficient number of
satellites to locate your position, the
screen above appears. Follow the
instructions on the screen.
CONTINUED
261
０７／０５／１７０９：２４：４４３１ＳＪＡ６３００２６７
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS GRANT OF SOFTWARE NO WARRANTIES FOR THE

END USER LICENSE LICENSE. This EULA grants you SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is
AGREEMENT (‘‘EULA’’), DO NOT the following license; provided ‘‘AS IS’’ and with all faults.
USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, You may use the SOFTWARE only SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PROMPTLY CONTACT ALPINE on the DEVICE. PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY,
ELECTRONICS, INC., FOR AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK
INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU.
THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
REFUND. ANY USE OF THE TOLERANT. ALPINE AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT ELECTRONICS, INC., HAS YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE
NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED SOFTWARE OR ATGAINST
DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE
YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES
EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF RELIED UPON ALPINE REGARDING THE DEVICE OR
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). ELECTRONICS, INC., TO THE SOFTWARE, THOSE
CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING WARRANTIES DO NOT
TO DETERMINE THAT THE ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE
SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR NOT BINDING ON, MS.
SUCH USE.
262
０７／０５／１７０９：２４：５２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２６８
No Liability for Certain Damages, Limitations, on Reverse Engineering, If ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC.,
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, Decompilation, and Disassembly. provides or makes available to you
MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY You may not reverse engineer, Supplemental Components and no
FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, decompile, or disassemble the other EULA terms are provided
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SOFTWARE, except and only to the along with the Supplemental
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING extent that such activity is expressly Components, then the terms of
FROM OR IN CONNECTION permitted by applicable law not with this EULA shall apply.
WITH THE USE OR standing this limitation.
Features
PERFORMANCE OF THE If MS, Microsoft Corporation or
SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION Additional Software/Services. The their affiliates make available
SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY SOFTWARE may permit ALPINE Supplemental Components, and no
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ELECTRONICS, INC.,, MS, other EULA terms are provided,
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO Microsoft Corporation or their then the terms of this EULA shall
EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE affiliates to provide or make apply, except that the MS,
FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS available to you SOFTWARE Microsoft Corporation or affiliate
OF U.S.TWO HUNDRED FIFTY updates, supplements, add-on entity providing the Supplemental
DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00). components, or Internet- based Component(s) shall be the
services components of the licensor of the Supplemental
SOFTWARE after the date you Component(s).
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (‘‘Supplemental
Components’’).
CONTINUED
263
０７／０５／１７０９：２４：５７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２６９
ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC.,, MS, SOFTWARE TRANSFER EXPORT RESTRITIONS. You

Microsoft Corporation and their ALLOWED BUT WITH acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of
affiliates reserve the right to RESTRICTIONS. You may US-origin. You agree to comply with
discontinue any Internet-based permanently transfer rights under all applicable international and
services provided to you or made this EULA only as part of a national laws that apply to the
available to you through the use of permanent sale or transfer of the SOFTWARE, including the U.S.
the SOFTWARE. Device, and only is the recipient Export Administration Regulations,
agrees to this EULA. If the as well as end-user, end-use and
RECOVERY MEDIA. If SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any country destination restrictions
SOFTWARE is provided by ALPINE transfer must also include all prior issued by U.S. and other
ELECTRONICS, INC., on separate versions of the SOFTWARE. governments.
media and labeled ‘‘Recovery Media’’ For additional information on
you may use the Recovery Media exporting the SOFTWARE, see http:
solely to restore or reinstall the //www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
SOFTWARE originally installed on
the DEVICE.
264
０７／０５／１７０９：２５：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２７０
Voice Control Basics Talk Button

This button activates the voice
TALK BUTTON control system. Press it when you
want to give a voice command. See
Voice Command Index on page 268 for
a list of voice commands.
Back Button
Features
This button has the same function as
the CANCEL button on the center
console (see page 243 ). When you
MICROPHONE
press it, the display returns to the
BACK BUTTON (on the ceiling) previous screen. When the previous
screen appears, the system replays
NOTE: For models with navigation near the map light on the ceiling. the last prompt. This button can be
system, refer to the navigation used to cancel an audio, climate
system manual. NOTE: While using the voice control control, or compass system voice
system, all of the speakers are command up to one second after the
Your vehicle has a voice control muted. command confirmation.
system that allows hands-free
operation of the audio system, the
climate control system and some
functions of the compass system.
The voice control system uses the
TALK and BACK buttons on the
steering wheel and a microphone
265
０７／０５／１７０９：２５：１７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２７１
Using the Voice Control System If the system does not understand a When you speak a command, the
You should use the voice control command or you wait too long to system generally either repeats the
system as much as possible, and give a command, it responds with command as a confirmation or asks
consider manual entry using the ‘‘Pardon,’’ ‘‘Please repeat,’’ or ‘‘Would you for further information. If you do
interface dial as a ‘‘back-up’’ you say again.’’ If the system cannot not wish to hear this feedback, you
method of entry. perform a command or the can turn it off. See the Voice
command is not appropriate for the Recognition Feedback setting in
Most of the system’s functions can screen you are on, it sounds a beep. Setup.
be controlled by voice commands
activated with the Talk button. To Anytime you are not sure of what If you hear a prompt such as ‘‘Please
control your compass system by voice commands are available on a use the interface dial to...’’ or ‘‘Please
voice: screen, you can always say ‘‘Help’’ at choose an area with the interface
any screen. The system can then dial.’’ the system is asking for input
Press and release the Talk button. read the list of commands to you. that cannot be done by voice.
Wait for the beep.
Give a voice command.
Once the microphone picks up your

command, the system changes the
display in response to the command
and prompts you for the next
command. Using the Talk button,
answer the prompts as required.
266
０７／０５／１７０９：２５：２９３１ＳＪＡ６３００２７２
Improving Voice Recognition Close the windows and the If the system cannot recognize
To achieve optimum voice moonroof. your command because of
recognition, the following guidelines background noise, speak louder.
should be followed: The fan speed will be
automatically adjusted to low. If the microphone picks up voices
NOTE: Make sure the correct screen other than yours, the system may
is displayed for the voice command Make sure the airflow from the not interpret your voice
that you are using. See Voice A/C vents does not interfere with commands correctly.
Features
Command Index on page 268 . the system microphone in the
ceiling console. Place your hand If you speak a command with
over the microphone; if you feel something in your mouth, or your
any airflow, adjust the vents. voice is either too high or too
husky, the system may
After pressing the Talk button, misinterpret your voice commands.
wait for the beep, then give a voice
command. If you are still having trouble with
the voice control system, refer to
Give a voice command in a clear, Voice Command Help on the
natural speaking voice without main menu screen.
pausing between words.
267
０７／０５／１７０９：２５：４０３１ＳＪＡ６３００２７３
Voice Command Index Calculator Climate Control Commands

The voice control system needs Repeat voice The system accepts these climate
appropriate voice commands for Voice command help control commands on most screens.
controlling the climate control, the
audio system, and the compass The voice command help option on Climate control full automatic (controls
system. the main menu lists many of the temperature to 72 degrees F)
following controls. To avoid Climate control automatic (controls
Global Commands distraction while you are driving, the temperature to your selection)
The system accepts these system can read the commands for Climate control off
commands on any screen. you. Air conditioner on
Help (reads list of the commands Air conditioner off
for the displayed screen) The commands are accessible at any Air conditioner＊
Set up (displays set up screen) time while driving and can be read to Climate control defrost on
Display map guide (displays the you so that you do not need to Climate control defrost off
compass screen) memorize all of them. Climate control defrost＊
Display menu (displays the main Rear defrost on
menu) Rear defrost off
Information (displays the trip Rear defrost＊
computer screen)
Trip Computer
Backward (to previous screen,
same as CANCEL or BACK
button)
Cancel (cancels current activity)
What time is it?
Calendar
268
０７／０５／１７０９：２５：４９３１ＳＪＡ６３００２７４
＊
Climate control fresh air Temperature Commands Repeating these commands
Climate control recirculate The system accepts these switches (toggles) the function
Climate control vent commands on most screens. between On and Off.
Climate control bi-level (vent and Temperature ＃ degrees (＃: 57 to
floor) 87 degrees F) NOTE: The commands for vent
Climate control floor Temperature up temperature settings are available on
Climate control floor and defrost Temperature down the climate control screen.
Fan speed up Temperature max hot (displays HI)
Features
Fan speed down Temperature max cold (displays
Fan speed ＃ (＃: 1−7) (for best LO)
voice control, keep fan speed at 1 or Temperature balance
2) Temperature dual mode on
Temperature dual mode off
＊
Repeating these commands Temperature dual mode＊
switches (toggles) the function Drive temperature ＃ degrees (＃: 57
between On and Off. to 87 degrees F)
Passenger temperature ＃ degrees
(＃: 57 to 87 degrees F)
Drive vent temperature adjustment
Passenger vent temperature
adjustment
Vent temperature up
Vent temperature down
Vent temperature max
Vent temperature minimum
Vent temperature normal CONTINUED
269
０７／０５／１７０９：２６：００３１ＳＪＡ６３００２７５
Audio System Commands Radio FM1 preset ＃ (＃: 1−6) CD Commands

The system accepts these audio Radio FM2 preset ＃ (＃: 1−6) The system accepts these
system commands on most screens. Radio AM preset ＃ (＃: 1−6) commands on most screens.
Radio auto select＊ CD play
Radio Commands Radio scan＊ CD play disc ＃ (＃: 1−6)
To control the radio system, say one CD play track ＃ (＃: 1−30)
＊
of the following commands: Repeating these commands CD play disc ＃1 track ＃2 (＃1: 1−6,
Audio on switches (toggles) the function ＃2: 1−30)
Audio off between On and Off. CD skip forward
Audio＊ CD skip back
Radio on (or Radio play) CD play next disc
Radio off CD play previous disc
Radio＊ CD track random＊
Radio select FM1 CD track repeat＊
Radio select FM2 CD disc repeat＊
Radio select AM CD track scan＊
Radio ＃ FM (＃: frequency. CD disk scan＊
Example Radio 95.5 FM) CD normal play (resumes ‘‘Play’’
Radio ＃ AM (＃: frequency. from these commands: ‘‘CD track
Example Radio 1020 AM) random,’’ ‘‘CD track repeat,’’ and
Radio seek up ‘‘CD disc repeat’’)
Radio seek down CD track list
Radio next station (same as Radio CD folder random＊
seek) CD folder repeat＊
Radio preset ＃ (＃: 1−6) CD folder scan＊
Radio FM preset ＃ (＃: 1−6) CD folder list
270
０７／０５／１７０９：２６：０８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２７６
＊
Repeating these commands DVD Commands DVD folder list
switches (toggles) the function The system accepts these
＊
between On and Off. commands on most screens. Repeating these commands
DVD play switches (toggles) the function
DVD play disc ＃ (＃: 1−6) between On and Off.
DVD play track ＃ (＃: 1−30)
DVD play disc ＃1 track ＃2 (＃1:
1−6, ＃2: 1−30)
Features
DVD skip forward
DVD skip back
DVD play next disc
DVD play previous disc
DVD track random＊
DVD track repeat＊
DVD disc repeat＊
DVD track scan＊
DVD disc scan＊
DVD normal play (resumes ‘‘Play’’
from these commands: ‘‘DVD
track random,’’ ‘‘DVD track repeat,’’
‘‘DVD disc repeat,’’ ‘‘DVD folder
random,’’ and ‘‘DVD folder
repeat’’)
DVD track list
DVD folder random
DVD folder repeat CONTINUED
271
０７／０５／１７０９：２６：１７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２７７
＊
MP3/WMA Commands MP3 folder list Repeating these commands
The system accepts these WMA play switches (toggles) the function
commands on most screens. WMA play disc ＃ (＃: 1−6) between On and Off.
MP3 play WMA play track ＃ (＃: 1−30)
MP3 play disc ＃ (＃: 1−6) WMA play disc ＃1 track ＃2 (＃1: Main Menu Screen Commands
MP3 play track ＃ (＃: 1−30) 1−6, ＃2: 1−30) These are additional commands not
MP3 play disc ＃1 track ＃2 (＃1: WMA skip forward found on the Voice Commands
1−6, ＃2: 1−30) WMA skip back Help screen. Follow the voice
MP3 skip forward WMA play next disc prompts.
MP3 skip back WMA play previous disc Voice command help (the system
MP3 play next disc WMA track random＊ reads and lists all of the
MP3 play previous disc WMA track repeat＊ commands)
MP3 track random＊ WMA disc repeat＊ Calendar
MP3 track repeat＊ WMA track scan＊ Calculator
MP3 disc repeat＊ WMA disc scan＊ Trip computer
MP3 track scan＊ WMA normal play (resumes ‘‘Play’’
MP3 disc scan＊ from these commands: ‘‘WMA
MP3 normal play (resumes ‘‘Play’’ track random,’’ ‘‘WMA track
from these commands: ‘‘MP3 repeat,’’ ‘‘WMA disc repeat,’’
track random,’’ ‘‘MP3 track repeat,’’ ‘‘WMA folder random,’’ and
‘‘MP3 disc repeat,’’ ‘‘MP3 folder ‘‘WMA folder repeat’’)
random,’’ and ‘‘MP3 folder WMA track list
repeat’’) WMA folder random＊
MP3 track list WMA folder repeat＊
MP3 folder random＊ WMA folder list
MP3 folder repeat＊
272
０７／０５／１７０９：２６：２４３１ＳＪＡ６３００２７８
Set up Screen Commands Interface Dial feedback on

The system accepts these
commands on the first setup screen. On-Screen Commands
(For the second and third setup The system accepts over 100 on-
screens, simply say what is written screen commands. The only
on the screen, and follow the voice commands that must be chosen by
prompts) the interface dial are listed below.
Brightness up Next
Features
Brightness down Previous
Brightness minimum/min. Return
Brightness maximum/max. OK
Contrast up Delete
Contrast down
Contrast minimum/min
Contrast maximum/max
Black level up
Black level down
Black level minimum/min
Black level maximum/max
Volume up
Volume down
Volume minimum/min.
Volume maximum/max.
Volume Off
Interface Dial feedback off
Interface Dial feedback auto
273
０７／０５／１７０９：２６：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２７９
Setting the Clock
To set the clock, the ignition switch Select the Clock Adjustment by Select the Time Adjustment , then
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or turning the interface knob to the press the center of the interface
ON (II) position, and either or both right, then press the center of the selector. The display changes to the
remotes must be linked. interface selector. Time Adjustment screen for HOUR.
Say ‘‘Set up’’ or press the SET UP

button on the center console to
display the Set up screen. Then
move the interface dial to the right.
274
０７／０５／１７０９：２６：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２８０
Features
To adjust the hour, turn the interface Turn the interface knob to adjust the
knob, then press the center of the minute.
interface selector.
Press the center of the interface
To adjust the minute, turn the selector to enter the time. The
interface knob to the right to display screen will return to the Clock
the adjustment screen for MINUTE. adjustment screen (see page 274 ).
275
０７／０５／１７０９：２６：５１３１ＳＪＡ６３００２８１
Security System
The security system helps to protect With the system set, you can still
your vehicle and valuables from theft. open the trunk with the remote
The horn sounds and a combination without triggering the alarm. The
of headlights, parking/side marker alarm will sound if the trunk lock is
lights, and taillights flash if someone forced, or the trunk is opened with
attempts to break into your vehicle the trunk release button on the
or remove the radio. This alarm driver’s door or the emergency trunk
continues for 2 minutes, then the opener.
system resets. To reset an alarming
system before the 2 minutes have The security system will not set if
elapsed, unlock either front door the hood, trunk, or any door is not
with the remote or the built-in key. SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door and Trunk Open
The security system automatically Once the security system is set, monitor on the instrument panel (see
sets 15 seconds after you lock the opening any door or the hood page 13 ) to see if the doors and
doors, close the hood, and close the without using the built-in key or the trunk are fully closed. Since it is not
trunk. For the system to activate, remote will cause it to sound. It also part of the monitor display, manually
you must lock the doors from the sounds if the radio is removed from check the hood.
outside with the remote, built-in key, the dashboard or the audio system
lock tab, or door lock switch. The wiring is cut. Do not attempt to alter this system
security system indicator on the or add other devices to it.
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
276
０７／０５／１７０９：２７：０２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２８２
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using Cruise Control on the steering wheel, and hold it
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) for 1 second (see page 294 ).
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE (ACC) BUTTON
accelerator pedal. It should be used RES/ 2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
for cruising on straight, open ACCEL speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
highways. It is not recommended for BUTTON
city driving, winding roads, slippery 3. Press and release the SET/
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. DECEL button on the steering
Features
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
SET/ icon appears on the multi-
DECEL information display to show the
Improper use of the cruise BUTTON system is now activated.
control can lead to a crash. Non-ACC model is shown
When cruise control is on while
Use the cruise control only 1. Push in the CRUISE button or the driving, the SH-AWD torque
when traveling on open ACC button (models with adaptive distribution monitor and the tire
highways in good weather. cruise control) on the steering pressure monitor are not shown
wheel. The CRUISE MAIN or on the multi-information display.
green ACC indicator (models with
ACC) indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
On models with adaptive cruise

control
To switch from ACC to cruise
control, press the distance button CONTINUED
277
０７／０５／１７０９：２７：１４３１ＳＪＡ６３００２８３
Cruise Control
Cruise control may not hold the set Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising
speed when you are going up and You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:
down hills. If your speed increases speed in any of these ways:
going down a hill, use the brakes to Press and hold the SET/DECEL
slow down. This will cancel cruise Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when
control. On models with adaptive button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed.
cruise control (ACC), this also desired cruising speed, release the
causes the cruise control icon on the button. To slow down in very small
multi-information display to go off amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
and the cruise mode icon to come on. Push on the accelerator pedal. button. Each time you do this,
To resume the set speed, press the Accelerate to the desired cruising your vehicle will slow down about
RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE speed, then press the SET/ 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
CONTROL icon on the multi- DECEL button.
information display will come back Tap the brake pedal lightly with
on. To increase your speed in very your foot. The CRUISE
small amounts, tap the RES/ CONTROL indicator or ACC
When climbing a steep hill, the ACCEL button. Each time you do indicator on the instrument panel
automatic transmission may this, the vehicle speeds up about 1 and the CRUISE CONTROL icon
downshift to hold the set speed. mph (1.6 km/h). on the multi-information display
will go out. When the vehicle
slows to the desired speed, press
the SET/DECEL button.
278
０７／０５／１７０９：２７：２６３１ＳＪＡ６３００２８４
Cruise Control
Even with cruise control on, you can Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
still use the accelerator pedal to When you push the CANCEL button
speed up for passing. After CRUISE (ACC) BUTTON or tap the brake pedal, the system
completing the pass, take your foot remembers the previously set speed.
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle To return to that speed, accelerate to
will return to the set cruising speed. above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal The CRUISE CONTROL (ACC
Features
causes cruise control to cancel. (green)) indicator comes on. The
vehicle accelerates to the same
speed as before.
CANCEL BUTTON
Non-ACC model is shown Pressing the CRUISE (ACC) button
turns the system completely off and
You can cancel cruise control in any erases the previous cruising speed.
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE (ACC) button.
279
０７／０５／１７０９：２７：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２８５
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ACC Components
If equipped MULTI-INFORMATION ACC INDICATOR
DISPLAY
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
consists of a radar sensor in the RES/ACCEL BUTTON
front grille, the ACC buttons on the
steering wheel, and the ACC ACC BUTTON SET/DECEL
functions of the multi-information BUTTON
display.
The radar sensor for ACC is shared

with the collision mitigation brake
system (CMBS). For more
information on the radar sensor, see
page 362 . For more information on
CMBS, see page 361 .
DISTANCE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
280
０７／０５／１７０９：２７：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２８６
Overview If the vehicle ahead of you slows Do not use ACC under these
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) allows down suddenly or another vehicle conditions:
you to maintain a set speed and keep cuts in front of your vehicle, ACC In poor visibility.
the vehicle ahead of you and your alerts you by sounding a beeper and In heavy traffic.
vehicle at a safe distance without displaying a message on the multi- When you must slow down and
having to use the accelerator pedal information display. speed up repeatedly.
or the brake pedal. The ACC radar sensor in the front On winding roads.
grille can detect and monitor the When you enter a toll gate,
Features
When the vehicle ahead of you slows distance of a vehicle up to 328 feet interchange, service area, parking
down or speeds up, ACC senses the (100 meters) ahead of your vehicle. area, etc. In these areas, there is
change in distance and compensates For more information on the radar no vehicle ahead of you, but ACC
by accelerating or braking your sensor, see page 362 . would still try to accelerate to your
vehicle to reach the cruising speed set speed.
you previously set. The distance Important Safety Precautions In bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
between vehicles is based on your As with any system, there are limits etc.)
speed: the faster you go, the longer to ACC. Inappropriate use of ACC On a slippery road (for example a
the distance will be; the slower you can result in a serious accident. Use road covered with ice or snow).
go, the shorter it will be. the brake pedal whenever necessary,
and always keep a safe distance
between your vehicle and other
vehicles.
CONTINUED
281
０７／０５／１７０９：２７：５６３１ＳＪＡ６３００２８７
Operating Characteristics
Improper use of ACC can lead

to a crash.
Use ACC only when traveling

on open highways in good
weather.
When there is no vehicle ahead within When a vehicle ahead is within ACC
ACC range range and going slower than your set
Your vehicle will maintain a set speed
cruising speed. If the vehicle ahead of you is going
slower than your set speed, your
vehicle will slow down to the speed
of that vehicle. Your vehicle will then
follow at a constant distance until the
vehicle ahead changes speed again.
282
０７／０５／１７０９：２８：０５３１ＳＪＡ６３００２８８
If the vehicle ahead of you slows

down abruptly, or if another vehicle
cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds
and a message appears on the multi-
information display to warn you.
In the case, decelerate your vehicle

by pressing the brake pedal, and
Features
keep an appropriate distance from
the vehicle ahead.
When a vehicle ahead is within ACC If the vehicle ahead of you slows
range and going at a steady speed down and changes lanes, ACC no
Your vehicle follows the vehicle longer tracks it. Your vehicle will
ahead of it, keeping a constant then return to your set speed.
distance. ACC will not keep your
vehicle at a constant distance if the
vehicle ahead of you goes out of
range of your set speed.
283
０７／０５／１７０９：２８：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３００２８９
Limitations ACC may react to vehicles beside

ACC does not work below 25 mph you or even building beside you by
(40 km/h). It cannot bring your momentarily applying the brakes
vehicle to a complete stop. or sounding a beeper under
conditions such as a sudden curve
ACC will not sound a beeper or or narrowing of the road, an
display a message on the multi- abrupt movement of the steering
information display to warn you of wheel, or if you are in an unusual
vehicles going slower than 13 mph position within your lane.
(20 km/h) or vehicles that are
parked. In these cases, it is up to
you to maintain a safe distance by
using the brake pedal.
ACC may not recognize

motorcycles or other small
vehicles ahead of your vehicle.
284
０７／０５／１７０９：２８：２１３１ＳＪＡ６３００２９０
Using the ACC

SET/DECEL BUTTON
Features
ACC BUTTON
1. Push the ACC button on the 3. Press and release the SET/ When your speed reaches 25 mph
steering wheel. The ACC indicator DECEL button on the steering (40 km/h), ACC goes into wait mode,
on the instrument panel comes on, wheel. and ‘‘ACC STANDBY’’ is shown on
and ‘‘ACC’’ is shown on the multi- If you press the SET/DECEL button the multi-information display.
information display. when the vehicle speed is below 25
mph (40 km/h), you will hear three
2. Accelerate to the desired speed beeps. This means ACC is not
above 25 mph (40 km/h). activated, and you cannot set your
speed.
CONTINUED
285
０７／０５／１７０９：２８：３２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２９１
U.S. U.S. U.S.
SET VEHICLE SET VEHICLE

DISTANCE INITIAL SPEED UNIT PREVIOUSLY SET SPEED
SPEED
CANADA CANADA CANADA
When the speed is set, it is shown If you change the speed unit If you cancel ACC by pressing the
along with a vehicle icon and measurement from the factory CANCEL button or by tapping the
distance bars on the multi- default setting, the initial speed unit brake pedal, the previously set
information display. measurement is shown under the cruising speed is shown on the multi-
Refer to page 289 for how to set and current unit. information display. To store this
change the set distance between speed as your new cruising speed,
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of press and release the RES/ACCEL
you. button.
To change the speed unit

measurement from mph to km/h,
see page 92 .
286
０７／０５／１７０９：２８：４３３１ＳＪＡ６３００２９２
Increasing the Set Speed amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL The ACC beeper will not sound
The set speed can be increased button repeatedly. Each time you do while you press the accelerator pedal,
using the RES/ACCEL button or the this, your vehicle will speed up about no matter how close you get to the
accelerator pedal. 1 mph (1 km/h). vehicle ahead of you.
To increase the set speed with the While the vehicle accelerates to the
RES/ACCEL button, do this: set speed, the set speed on the multi-
information display will flash.
Features
If a vehicle ahead of you is driving at
a slower speed than the speed you
want to set, your vehicle will not
accelerate; it will keep some distance
between your vehicles.
To increase the set speed with the

accelerator pedal, do this:
RES/ACCEL BUTTON Press the accelerator pedal to
increase to the speed you want, then
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL press the SET/DECEL button. The
button. The vehicle will accelerate. set speed will be shown on the multi-
When you reach the speed you want, information display. If you do not
release the button. press the SET/DECEL button, your
vehicle will return to the previously
To increase your speed in small set speed.
287
０７／０５／１７０９：２８：５６３１ＳＪＡ６３００２９３
Decreasing the Set Speed Each time you do this, your vehicle Detecting a Vehicle Ahead of You
The set speed can be decreased slows down about 1 mph (1 km/h).
using the SET/DECEL button or the U.S.
brake pedal. The set cruising speed will be shown
on the multi-information display.
To decrease the set speed with the
SET/DECEL button, do this: On a steep downhill, the vehicle
speed may exceed the set cruising
SET/DECEL BUTTON speed. CANADA
To decrease the set speed with the

brake pedal, do this:
Tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle slows down to the speed you When the system detects a vehicle
want, press the SET/DECEL button. ahead of you, a beeper sounds once
The set speed will be shown on the and a solid-line vehicle icon appears
multi-information display. If you use on the multi-information display.
the brake pedal to decrease speed,
and then press the RES/ACCEL
Press and hold the SET/DECEL button, your vehicle will return to the
button. Release the button when you previously set speed.
reach the speed you want.
To slow down in small amounts, tap

the SET/DECEL button repeatedly.
288
０７／０５／１７０９：２９：０９３１ＳＪＡ６３００２９４
Changing Vehicle Distance To change the range, press the

DISTANCE button. Each time you
U.S. DISTANCE BUTTON press the button, the range changes
from Long, to Middle, and then to
Short.
The higher your vehicle speed is, the

longer the distance between the
Features
CANADA vehicle in front will be set as shown
below.
Speed 50 mph 65 mph

Vehicle (80 Km/h) (104 Km/h)
Distance
When that vehicle changes lanes or With ACC on, the distance between Long 154 feet 200 feet
goes out of ACC range, a beeper your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of 47 meters 61 meters
sounds once. If there is no vehicle you is controlled and maintained. Middle 111 feet 173 feet
ahead of you within ACC range, a You can change this distance to one 34 meters 42 meters
dotted-line vehicle icon will be on the of three ranges: long, middle, or Short 85 feet 101 feet
multi-information display. short. 26 meters 31 meters
To set the ACC beeper on or off, see
page 90 .
CONTINUED
289
０７／０５／１７０９：２９：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３００２９５
The distance you select is also Canceling the ACC When you push the CANCEL button
shown on the multi-information or tap the brake pedal to cancel ACC,
display. CANCEL BUTTON the set cruising speed stays in
memory. When you turn on ACC
U.S. again, the speed is shown on the
LONG multi-information display. To return
RANGE to that speed, accelerate to over 25
CANADA mph (40 km/h), then press the RES/
ACCEL button.
If you cancel ACC by pressing the

U.S. ACC button, the previously set
MIDDLE cruising speed is erased from
RANGE memory.
ACC is canceled whenever you do
CANADA any of these actions:
Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.
U.S.
SHORT Tap the brake pedal.
RANGE
CANADA Press the ACC button. The ACC

indicator in the instrument panel
goes off.
290
０７／０５／１７０９：２９：３７３１ＳＪＡ６３００２９６
Automatic ACC Cancellation Driving on a mountainous road, or ACC Indicator

When ACC is automatically driving off road for extended
cancelled, the beeper sounds three periods. ACC INDICATOR
times, and an ACC OFF message
appears on the multi-information Abrupt steering wheel movement.
display for 3 seconds.
When the ABS or VSA is activated.
Any of these conditions may cause
Features
ACC to cancel: When the VSA indicator comes on.
The vehicle speed decreases If ACC is cancelled by any these

below 22 mph (35 km/h). conditions, wait until the condition
improves, then press the RES/
Poor weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) ACCEL button to restore ACC.
When you do this, the vehicle will This indicator normally comes on for
When the radar sensor in the front resume its set cruising speed. a few seconds when you turn the
grille gets dirty. ignition switch to the ON (II)
If you turn the ignition switch to the position. If it comes on at any other
The vehicle ahead of you cannot ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) time, there is a problem in the ACC
be detected. position after ACC was automatically system. If this happens, take the
cancelled, the set speed is erased, vehicle to your dealer to have it
An abnormal tire condition is and you must enter it again (see checked.
detected, or the tires are skidding. page 285 ).
The ACC system cannot be used
while this indicator is on.
291
０７／０５／１７０９：２９：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００２９７
Messages on the
Multi-Information Display Message Description
The multi-information display shows
various messages related to ACC.
For a description of each ACC
message you may see, refer to the ACC is on.
chart on this and the following page.
ACC is on and in standby mode.
A cruising speed can be set by

pressing the SET/DECEL button.
U.S. ACC is in standby mode, and the

previously set cruising speed is in
memory.
CANADA The previously set speed can be
resumed by pressing the RES/
ACCEL button.
292
０７／０５／１７０９：２９：５８３１ＳＪＡ６３００２９８
Message Description Message Description
U.S. ACC detects a vehicle ahead of you. ACC has automatically cancelled
because of bad weather or other
You will hear a beep when the vehicle conditions.
CANADA moves out of the ACC radar sensor’s
range. You will hear three beeps.
Features
U.S. ACC does not detect a vehicle ahead Apply the brakes immediately.
of you. Your vehicle is too close to the vehicle
ahead of it.
CANADA You will hear a beep when ACC
detects a vehicle ahead of you. You will hear a continuous beep.
ACC has automatically cancelled

because its radar sensor in the front ACC needs to be checked.
grill is dirty.
Have your vehicle checked by a
You will hear three beeps. dealer.
293
０７／０５／１７０９：３０：０６３１ＳＪＡ６３００２９９
Switching to Cruise Control

DISTANCE BUTTON
Press the distance button.
To switch from ACC to cruise When you press the button, you will When the cruise control is selected,
control, press the distance button on see CRUISE MODE SELECTED on ACC does not sound a beeper or
the steering wheel, and hold it for 1 the multi-information display for 2 display a message on the multi-
second. seconds. To switch back to ACC, information display. Make sure to
press and hold the distance button keep a safe distance from the vehicle
again for 1 second. ahead of you.
Always be aware which mode is

selected.
294
０７／０５／１７０９：３０：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００３００
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink Universal garage door opener that lacks safety to test that the safety features are
Transceiver built into your vehicle stop and reverse features. functioning properly. If you do not
can be programmed to operate up to have this information, contact the
three remote controlled devices Units manufactured between April 1, manufacturer of the equipment.
around your home, such as garage 1982 and January 1, 1993 may be Before programming HomeLink to a
doors, lighting, or home security equipped with safety stop and garage door or gate opener, make
systems. reverse features. If your unit does sure that people and objects are out
not have an external entrapment of the way of the device to prevent
Features
General Safety Information protection system, an easy test to potential injury or damage.
Before programming your confirm the function and When programming a garage door
HomeLink to operate a garage door performance of the safety stop and opener, park just outside the garage.
opener, confirm that the opener has reverse feature is to lay a 2 × 4
an external entrapment protection under the closing door. The door Training HomeLink
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’ should stop and reverse upon Before you begin − If you just
or other safety and reverse stop contacting the piece of wood. received your vehicle and have not
features. As an additional safety feature, trained any of the buttons in
garage door openers manufactured HomeLink before, you should erase
If your garage door was after January 1, 1993 are required to any previously learned codes before
manufactured before April 1, 1982, have external entrapment protection training the first button.
you may not be able to program systems, such as an electronic eye, To do this, press and hold the two
HomeLink to operate it. These units which detect an object obstructing outside buttons on the HomeLink
do not have safety features that the door. transceiver for about 20 seconds,
cause the motor to stop and reverse until the red indicator flashes.
it if an obstacle is detected during Important Safety Precautions Release the buttons, then proceed to
closing, increasing the risk of injury. Refer to the safety information that step 1.
Do not use HomeLink with any came with your garage door opener CONTINUED
295
０７／０５／１７０９：３０：３４３１ＳＪＡ６３００３０１
If you are training the second or If the red indicator in HomeLink If the red indicator in HomeLink
third buttons, go directly to step 1. begins to flash slowly at first, continues to flash slowly (does
then rapidly, release both not begin to flash rapidly),
1. Hold the end of the garage door buttons, and go to step 4. repeat steps 1 thru 3.
opener remote transmitter 1 to 3 If the red indicator in HomeLink
inches from HomeLink. Make continues to flash slowly (does 4. Test the HomeLink button by
sure you are not blocking your not flash rapidly), your remote pushing it for about 1 second.
view of the red indicator in transmitter may stop If the button works,
HomeLink. transmitting after a short time. programming is complete.
Go to step 3. If the button does not work go
RED INDICATOR to step 5.
3. Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the 5. Push and hold the HomeLink
HomeLink buttons at the same button and watch the red indicator
time. While continuing to hold the on HomeLink.
HomeLink button, press and If the indicator stays on, press
release the remote transmitter the HomeLink button again; the
button every 2 seconds. remotely controlled device
If the red indicator in HomeLink should operate.
begins to flash slowly at first, If the indicator flashes rapidly
then rapidly, release both for 2 seconds then stays on, you
buttons, and go to step 4. have a rolling code transmitter:
2. Press and hold the remote go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
transmitter button and one of the Code System’’ (see page 297 ).
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
296
０７／０５／１７０９：３０：４５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３０２
6. Repeat these steps to train the 1. Make sure you have properly have approximately 30 seconds to
other two HomeLink buttons to completed the ‘‘Training complete the following steps.
operate any other compatible HomeLink’’ procedure.
remotely controlled devices 4. Press and hold the button on
around your home (lighting, 2. Find the ‘‘learn’’ button on your HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
automatic gate, security system, garage door opener unit. The
etc.). location will vary, depending on 5. Press the HomeLink button again
the manufacturer. for about 1 second. It should
Features
Training With a Rolling Code operate the garage door.
System LEARN BUTTON
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener is needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’

procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure 3. Press the learn button on the
synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener unit until the
garage door opener so it sends and indicator next to the button comes
receives the correct codes. on. The indicator may blink, or
come on and stay on. You then
297
０７／０５／１７０９：３１：０１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３０３
Erasing Codes If a standard transmitter was As required by the FCC:

To erase the codes stored in all three programmed, the indicator will This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two stay on for about 25 seconds. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red following two conditions: (1) This device
indicator begins to flash, then 2. Once the HomeLink indicator may not cause harmful interference, and
release the buttons. begins to flash slowly, continue to (2) this device must accept any
hold the HomeLink button, and interference received, including
You should erase all three codes follow steps 2 thru 5 under interference that may cause undesired
before selling the vehicle. ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page operation.
295 ).
Retraining a Button Changes or modifications not expressly
If you want to retrain a programmed Client Assistance approved by the party responsible for
button for a new device, you do not If you have problems with training compliance could void the user’s
have to erase all button memory. the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, authority to operate the equipment.
You can replace the existing memory or would like information on home
code using this procedure: products that can be operated by This device complies with Industry
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On Canada Standard RSS-210.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink the Internet, go to Operation is subject to the following two
button to be trained until the www.homelink.com. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
HomeLink indicator begins to interference, and (2) this device must
flash slowly. HomeLink is a registered accept any interference that may cause
If a rolling code transmitter was trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. undesired operation of the device.
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
298
０７／０５／１７０９：３１：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３０４
AcuraLink
RL Technology Package and RL CMBS/ Interface Dial The selector can be pushed left,
PAX models Most AcuraLink functions are right, up, down, and in. Use the
AcuraLink enhances your ownership controlled by the interface dial. The selector to scroll through lists, to
experience by providing a direct interface dial has two parts, a knob select menus, and to highlight menu
communication link between your and a selector. items. When you make a selection,
vehicle and the Acura Server. push the center of the selector
Working through the XM radio KNOB (ENTER) to go to that selection.
satellite, AcuraLink works in ENTER
Features
conjunction with the navigation
system, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(HFL), and audio system in your
vehicle. It displays and receives
several kinds of messages, including:
Operating tips and information on

your vehicle’s features.
SELECTOR
Important recall and safety
information. The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
Maintenance information to keep a list or menu on the screen.
your vehicle in top condition.
Diagnostic information to provide

information about any problems
with your vehicle.
299
０７／０５／１７０９：３１：２５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３０５
AcuraLink
Reading Messages Unread messages have a closed

If you have new messages, an envelope icon next to them. The icon
envelope icon appears in the top disappears when it has already been
right corner of the navigation screen. read.
NOTE: Only Diagnostic Info

messages overlay the navigation
screen while driving. They indicate if
your vehicle has a problem that may
need immediate attention (see page
306 ).
After purchasing your vehicle,

Scroll up or down, and select the messages may not appear
message you want to read by immediately.
pressing ENTER on the interface Your dealer has to register the
selector. vehicle identification before you can
To open a message: receive messages. This can take
To view previously read messages, several days to process.
Press ENTER on the interface press the INFO button, select
selector, then select New Message MESSAGES, then select the
from the navigation system map category you want to review.
menu. If there is more than one
message, stored in the system,
you will see a list of message titles.
300
０７／０５／１７０９：３１：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００３０６
AcuraLink
Deleting Messages To delete all messages: Message Options

NOTE: Diagnostic info and recall/ NOTE: The Delete All Messages
campaign messages can only be command does not apply to
deleted by your dealer. Diagnostic Info and Recall messages.
They can only be deleted by your
To delete a single message: dealer.
Press the INFO button to bring up
the Information screen. Press the SETUP button to view
Features
the setup screen.
Scroll to the Messages option,
then select it by pressing ENTER Select MORE by pushing the
on the interface selector. interface selector to the right.
Select the message category for Use the interface knob to scroll to
the message you want to delete. the AcuraLink/Messages button, When you open a message, you can
and select it by pressing ENTER read a summary of it, and then
Use the interface knob to scroll up on the interface selector. choose one of several options. If an
or down to the message title you option is not available for a message,
want to delete, and select it by Scroll to the Delete Messages that button will not be highlighted.
pressing ENTER on the interface option, and select it by pressing
selector. ENTER on the interface selector.
Scroll to Delete with the interface Scroll to the category with the
knob, and select it by pressing messages you want to delete, and
ENTER on the interface selector. select the category by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector. CONTINUED
301
０７／０５／１７０９：３１：５１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３０７
AcuraLink
Delete − Select this button to system. Message Preferences

delete the current message. To set your AcuraLink preferences
Call Your Acura Dealer − Select (the types of messages you want to
Voice − Select this button to hear a this button to call the Acura dealer receive, if any), visit the Owner Link
voice read the entire message. This you purchased your vehicle from. website at www.owners.acura.com,
gives you more information than the AcuraLink also directs you to this and choose what you would like to
screen can display at one time. When dealer so you can schedule a receive. If you do not have internet
you select the Voice button, it maintenance appointment or receive access, call Acura Client Services at
changes to a Stop Reading button. information about a message. If your (800) 382-2238; they can set your
Select the button again to stop the assigned servicing dealer changes, message preferences for you.
voice. AcuraLink will be updated to call
that dealer.
Call − Select this button to call a
phone number embedded in the More Info − Select this button to
message. When you select Call, the get more information about the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) current diagnostic message. To use
dials the number for you. this option, your cell phone must be
To make a call, your Bluetooth paired to the HFL. In addition, the
compatible phone must be paired to paired phone must have a compatible
the vehicle’s HandsFreeLink system, data service and be set up with the
powered on, and located within the AcuraLink system to make a data
vehicle (see page 308 ). connection. Access the acura.com/
handsfreelink website to find out
Find Nearest Acura Dealer − which data services are currently
Select this button to find the nearest compatible with AcuraLink.
Acura dealer using the navigation
302
０７／０５／１７０９：３２：０３３１ＳＪＡ６３００３０８
AcuraLink
AcuraLink/Message Screen To access the following functions, Messages can still be accessed using
press the SETUP button, push the the INFO menu. If you would like to
interface selector to the right to stop receiving messages, visit the
select MORE, then rotate the OwnerLink website at www.owners.
interface knob to select AcuraLink/ acura.com to change your messaging
Messages. preferences.
Delete Messages − Select this Auto Reading − Select ON to have
Features
button to delete all stored messages the system automatically read each
within a category, except for message to you. Select OFF to
diagnostic info and recall campaign manually select the Voice button
messages. These messages can only when you want a message read to
be deleted by a certified technician you.
after the recall is done or the
problem is corrected, or through a Phone-Data Connection − Select
broadcast message from Acura. this button to begin the process
required to connect to Acura. This is
New Message Notification − used to access the most recent
Select ON if you want to be notified diagnostic information when a
of new messages (envelope icon problem occurs.
appears on the navigation screen).
Select OFF if you do not want to be
notified of new messages (envelope
icon does not appear on the
navigation screen).
CONTINUED
303
０７／０５／１７０９：３２：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３０９
AcuraLink
Connect to the Acura Server − NOTE: For the Phone Data Quick Tips
The default setting is prompt. When Connection button to be active, you
a diagnostic info message appears, need a Bluetooth compatible and
and you select the Check Now enabled cellphone paired to the
button, the system will prompt you Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).
before connecting to the Acura To complete the data connection
server. If you do not wish to connect setup, the paired phone must have a
at that time, select No at the prompt, compatible data service.
and you will see the information
from the onboard database. The Message Categories
‘‘Auto’’ setting will remove the There are six message categories in
prompt when you select the Check AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature
Now button and will automatically Guides, Maintenance Minders,
connect to the Acura server. This Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,
setting only applies when you have a and Dealer Appointment Reminders. These messages, based on updated
Bluetooth enabled phone that is The system can store up to 256 vehicle information and comments
paired with the HFL and you have messages. from other RL owners, supplement
completed the Phone-Data your Owner’s Manual and Quick
Connection setup. Message categories can be added, Start Guide. They provide you with
revised, or deleted through relevant information for a safe and
broadcast messages from Acura. enjoyable ownership experience. For
additional information, call Acura
Client Services directly through the
HFL.
304
０７／０５／１７０９：３２：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００３１０
AcuraLink
Feature Guide Maintenance Minder You can then use the message
options to call your dealer for an
appointment or to find the nearest
dealer.
Features
During the first 90 days of These messages provide detailed
ownership, one of up to 32 different information about the service
messages appears each day. These needed for your vehicle. When a
messages help you to use and maintenance message appears on
understand the technological the multi-information display, a list of
features of your vehicle. needed maintenance items is
provided through in an AcuraLink
message. These messages tell you
the exact maintenance needed,
helping you to avoid unnecessary
maintenance costs.
305
０７／０５／１７０９：３２：３０３１ＳＪＡ６３００３１１
AcuraLink
Recall/Campaigns Diagnostic Info

When an indicator comes on or a
message is displayed on the multi-
information display (MID),
AcuraLink can provide information
about the cause of indicator or
message and the recommended
action to take. This helps you handle
the problem as it occurs, preventing
or limiting costly repairs.
The AcuraLink system cannot

determine some mechanical
problems (such as squeaks or to do.’’ If you do not want the
If your vehicle is affected by a recall rattles) that are not triggered by the information right away, select the
or other important safety diagnostic indicator monitors. Check Later option. If you want the
information, a letter will be mailed to information now, select the Check
you about the issue and how to fix it. For more information on the Now option. (If the navigation screen
If you don’t get your vehicle fixed, instrument panel indicators, see page is not active, you must select OK
you will also receive a reminder 61 . from the navigation disclaimer
message through AcuraLink. You screen before you can check the
can then use the message options to When an indicator comes on or a information.)
call your dealer for an appointment message is displayed on the MID,
or to find the nearest dealer. AcuraLink immediately notifies you
with the message, ‘‘An indicator is on.
AcuraLink can help you decide what
306
０７／０５／１７０９：３２：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００３１２
AcuraLink
Depending on the severity of the When you select the More Info Dealer Appointment Reminder
problem, the message will let you option, if the HFL is connected to a
know if you should see your dealer cellular data service, AcuraLink
immediately or if you can wait a gathers more information about the
while. problem, and sends it to Acura.
There, the information is analyzed
and returned to the vehicle with the
most accurate repair information.
Features
NOTE: There may not be any
additional information, depending on
the time elapsed since the previous
time you retrieved the information
from the Acura server.
When you make an appointment
through the Owner’s Link Online
Scheduling Service, you can be
reminded in advance about that
You can then use message options to appointment through AcuraLink. If
call your dealer for an appointment, you need to reschedule, you can call
to find the nearest dealer, or to find your dealer directly with the HFL.
out more information about the issue.
The timing of your reminder is
based on your reminder preference
established on Owner Link.
CONTINUED
307
０７／０５／１８１１：３３：２６３１ＳＪＡ６３００３１３
AcuraLink, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
As required by the FCC: Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Bluetooth Wireless Technology

This device complies with Part 15 of the Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth is a registered trademark
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL). of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
following two conditions: (1) This device HFL uses Bluetooth technology as Bluetooth is the wireless technology
may not cause harmful interference, and a wireless link between it and your that links your phone to the HFL.
(2) this device must accept any Bluetooth compatible cellphone. The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth,
interference received, including When you are in your vehicle and which means the maximum range
interference that may cause undesired your phone is linked to the HFL, between your phone and vehicle is
operation. you’ll enjoy hands-free phone use. 30 feet (10 meters).
The HFL is available in both English
Changes or modifications not expressly and French (Canadian models only). To use the HFL, your phone must
approved by the party responsible for To change the language, see page have approved Bluetooth capability
compliance could void the user’s 324 . along with the Hands Free Profile.
authority to operate the equipment. This type of phone is available
Here are the main features of the through many phone makers and
This device complies with Industry HFL. Instructions for using the HFL cellular carriers. You can also find an
Canada Standard RSS-210. begin on page 309 . approved phone by visiting
Operation is subject to the following two www.acura.com/handsfreelink ( In
conditions: (1) this device may not cause Voice Control Canada, visit www.acura.ca.) or by
interference, and (2) this device must HFL recognizes simple voice calling the Hands Free Link client
accept any interference that may cause commands, such as phone numbers support at (888) 528-7876.
undesired operation of the device. and names. It uses these commands
to automatically dial, receive, and
store numbers. For more
information on voice control, see
Using Voice Control on page 311 .
308
０７／０５／１７０９：３３：０８３１ＳＪＡ６３００３１４
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Incoming/Outgoing Calls Audio System HFL Buttons

With a linked phone, the HFL allows When the HFL is in use, the sound
you to send and receive calls in your comes through the vehicle’s front HFL TALK
vehicle without holding the phone. audio system speakers. If the audio BUTTON
system is in use while operating
Phonebook either of the HFL buttons or making
HFL BACK
The HFL can store up to 50 names a call, the HFL over-rides the audio BUTTON
and phone numbers in its phonebook. system. To change the volume level,
Features
With a linked phone, you can then use the audio system volume knob,
automatically dial any name or or the steering wheel volume
number in the phonebook. controls.
VOICE CONTROL
Here are the main components of BUTTONS
the HFL system:
To operate the HFL, use the HFL
Microphone Talk and Back buttons on the left
The HFL microphone is on the side of the steering wheel. Below the
ceiling console. The microphone is HFL buttons is another set of voice
shared with the navigation system (if control buttons for the navigation,
equipped). climate control, and audio systems.
CONTINUED
309
０７／０５／１７０９：３３：１９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３１５
Here is the function of each HFL Multi-Information Display Signal Strength＊ − Indicates the
button: network signal strength of the
SIGNAL HFL BATTERY current phone. Five bars equals
HFL Talk: This button is used before STRENGTH MODE LEVEL STATUS full strength.
you give a command, to answer
incoming calls, and to confirm ROAM Status＊ − Indicates your
system information. phone is roaming.
HFL Back: This button is used to Battery Level Status＊ − Indicates

end a call, go back to the previous the power currently remaining in
voice control command, and to your phone’s battery. Five bars
cancel an operation. equals full battery strength.
ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING
HFL Mode − Indicates when you
When you are operating the HFL, or are dialing and receiving calls.
when you manually select HFL on
the multi-information display, you Phone Dialing − Indicates the
will see this information on the number you entered or the
screen: number of the incoming call.
＊ : Some phones do not send this

information to the HFL.
310
０７／０５／１７０９：３３：３０３１ＳＪＡ６３００３１６
With the HFL system activated, you How to Use the HFL Using Voice Control
will also see ‘‘HF LINK’’ on the upper The HFL is operated by the HFL Here are some guidelines for using
display. Talk and Back buttons on the left voice control:
side of the steering wheel. The next To enter a command, press the
few pages provide instructions for all Talk button. Then, after the beep,
basic features of the HFL. say your command in a clear,
natural tone.
NOTE: All phones may not
Features
operate identically, and some may For best system operation, set the
cause inconsistent operation of the climate control fan speed to low,
HFL. and direct the center vents away
from the microphone in the ceiling.
If the HFL does not recognize a

command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’
If it doesn’t recognize the
When you are dialing or receiving command a second time, its
calls with the audio system in use, response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it
you will see the HFL screen on the doesn’t recognize the command a
navigation display. third time, it plays the Help
prompt.
CONTINUED
311
０７／０５／１７０９：３３：３９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３１７
To hear a list of available options To go back one step in a command When you finish a command
at any time, press the Talk button, process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press sequence, the HFL goes back to
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands the Back button. its main menu. For example, when
free link help.’’ If nothing is said while the HFL is you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the
listening for a command, the HFL HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been
Many commands can be spoken will time out and stop its voice stored.’’ The next time you press
together. For example, you can recognition. The next time you the Talk button, you will be at the
say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’ press the Talk button, the HFL main menu.
begins listening from the point at
To enter a string of numbers in a which it timed out.
Call or Dial command, you can say
them all at once, or you can To end a command sequence at
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7, any time, press and hold the Back
10, or 11. button, or press and release the
Talk button, wait for the beep, and
To skip a voice prompt, press the say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time you
Talk button while the HFL is press the Talk button, the HFL
speaking. The HFL will then begin begins from its main menu.
listening for your next command.
312
０７／０５／１７０９：３３：５３３１ＳＪＡ６３００３１８
Setting Up the System 4. Press and release the Talk button. 6. The HFL response continues ‘‘A
The voice of the HFL can be set to If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the security option is available to lock
male or female (U.S. models only). HFL system response is, ‘‘Would the hands free system. Each time
Also, the incoming notification can you like the notification to be a the vehicle is turned on, a
be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no ring tone or a prompt?’’ If you say passcode would be required to use
notification. ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFL this system. Would you like this
system returns to its main menu. security option turned on?’’
To set up the system, do this: Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no ring
Features
1. Press and release the Talk button. tone or prompt playback during an 7. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The incoming call. The audio system If you say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is, ‘‘System options will be mute, and a message will HFL system response is, ‘‘Security
are setup and clear.’’ be displayed. will not be used. The system setup
is complete.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button. 5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set your
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like ‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFL system passcode. Refer to the setting
male or female prompts?’’ response is ‘‘A ring tone will be procedure in the next column.
used.’’ or ‘‘An incoming call
3. Press and release the Talk button. prompt will be used.’’
After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you will
‘‘Female,’’ depending on the hear a ring tone through the audio
system voice you want. The HFL speakers to announce an incoming
response is, ‘‘Male (Female) call. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you
prompts have been selected. will hear this message to
Would you like an audible announce an incoming call: ‘‘You
notification of an incoming call?’’ have an incoming call.’’
313
０７／０５／１７０９：３４：０９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３１９
Setting Your Passcode 5. Press and release the Talk button. cycle. If the passcode is set, its
The HFL will accept a numeric, four- After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The response is ‘‘The system is locked.
digit passcode that you can use for HFL response is ‘‘Security is on. What is the four-digit passcode?’’
security purposes. Each time the vehicle is turned on,
the passcode will be required to 2. Press and release the Talk button.
To set your passcode, do this: use the system. The system setup After the beep, say your four-digit
1. Follow the system setup is complete. Returning to the main passcode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,
procedure as described previously. menu.’’ 4.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button. 6. Press and release the Talk button. 3. If the passcode is correct, the HFL
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, the response is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If the
HFL response is ‘‘Security will not passcode is not correct, the HFL
3. The HFL response is ‘‘What is the be used. The system setup is response is ‘‘1,2,3,4 is incorrect.
four-digit number you would like complete.’’ Please try again.’’ Go back to the
to set as your passcode?’’ step 2.
To enter your passcode, do this;
4. Press and release the Talk button. Once a passcode is set, you can lock If you forget your passcode and you
After the beep, say the four-digit the HFL so it only operates after the cannot activate the HFL, consult
passcode you want to use. For passcode is entered. your dealer to cancel the passcode.
example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this 1. The HFL will prompt you for your
correct?’’ passcode each time the ignition
switch is turned to the ON (II)
position and you press the Talk
button. You will only be asked for
the passcode once per ignition
314
０７／０５／１７０９：３４：２３３１ＳＪＡ６３００３２０
Pairing Your Phone NOTE: 1. With your phone on and the

Your Bluetooth compatible phone HFL does not allow you to pair ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
with HandsFree Profile must be your phone if the vehicle is ON (II) position, press and release
paired to the HFL before you can moving. the Talk button. After the beep,
make and receive hands-free calls. For pairing, your phone must be in say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL
its Discovery mode. response is ‘‘Phone setup options
Up to six phones can be paired to are status, pair, edit, delete, and
the HFL. list.’’
Features
The following procedure works for
most phones. If you cannot pair 2. Press and release the Talk button.
your phone to the HFL with this After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The
procedure, refer to your phone’s HFL response is ‘‘The pairing
operating manual, visit process requires operation of your
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, call mobile phone. For safety, only
the Hands Free Link client perform this function while the
support at (888) 528-7876, or call vehicle is stopped. State a four-
your phone retailer. digit code for pairing. Note this
During the pairing process, turn code. It will be requested by the
off any previously paired phones phone.’’
before pairing a new phone.
CONTINUED
315
０７／０５／１７０９：３４：３４３１ＳＪＡ６３００３２１
3. Press and release the Talk button. NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a 7. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit common way to get your phone into After the beep, say the name you
code you want to use. For example, its Discovery mode. If these steps do want to use. For example, say
say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL response not work on your phone, refer to the ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’ phone’s operating manual. is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been
successfully paired. Returning to
4. Press and release the Talk button. 5. Follow the prompts on your phone the main menu.’’
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The to get it into its Discovery mode.
HFL system response is The phone will search for the HFL. 8. If you want to pair another phone,
‘‘Searching for a Bluetooth phone. When it comes up, select repeat steps 1 through 7.
Make sure the phone you are HandsFreeLink from the list of
trying to pair is in discovery mode.’’ options displayed on your phone. On vehicles with navigation system
Once the pairing process is
6. When asked by the phone, enter completed, AcuraLink may display a
the four-digit code from step 3 into connection confirmation screen. This
your phone. The HFL response is screen is used to create a data
‘‘A new phone has been found. connection between your cell phone
What would you like to name this and the AcuraLink system. You can
phone?’’ choose to set up the data connection
now, or do it later. If you want to do
it now, exit the HFL menu by
pressing the HFL Back button one
or more times.
316
０７／０５／１７０９：３４：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００３２２
To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this: 4. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone delete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to
setup options are status, pair, edit, setup options are status, pair, edit, continue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’
delete, and list.’’ delete, and list.’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button. 2. Press and release the Talk button. 5. Press and release the Talk button.
Features
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘Which phone HFL response is, ‘‘Which phone HFL response is ‘‘The phone has
would you like to edit?’’ would you like to delete?’’ been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’
3. Press and release the Talk button. 3. Press and release the Talk button. or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be
After the beep, say the name of After the beep, say the name of deleted.
the phone you want to rename. the phone you want to delete. For
For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
new name for Eric’s phone?’’ to delete Eric’s phone?’’
4. Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say the new name
of the phone. For example, say
‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘The name has been changed.
Returning to the main menu.’’
CONTINUED
317
０７／０５／１７０９：３４：５５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３２３
To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone being To change from the currently linked
1. Press and release the Talk button. used, do this: phone to another paired phone, do this:
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ 1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
setup options are status, pair, edit, The HFL response is ‘‘Phone The HFL response is ‘‘Searching
delete, and list.’’ setup options are status, pair, edit, for the next phone.’’ The HFL
delete, and list.’’ then disconnects the linked phone
2. Press and release the Talk button. and searches for another paired
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button. phone. If no other phones are
HFL responds by listing the name After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An found, the first phone remains
of each paired phone. When all example of the HFL response is, linked.
phones paired to the system have ‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Battery
been read, the HFL response is strength is three bars. Signal
‘‘The entire list has been read. strength is five bars, and the
Returning to the main menu.’’ phone is roaming. Returning to the
main menu.’’
318
０７／０５／１７０９：３５：０９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３２４
Making a Call 3. Press and release the Talk button. want to call. For example, say
You can make calls using any phone After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
number, or by using a name in the The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
HFL phonebook. You can also redial ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
the last number called. During a call, will hear the person you called 3. Press and release the Talk button.
the HFL allows you to talk up to 30 through the audio speakers. To After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
minutes after you remove the key change the volume, use the audio HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
from the ignition switch. system volume knob, or the ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
Features
steering wheel volume controls. will hear the person you called
To make a call using a phone number, through the audio speakers. To
do this: 4. To end the call, press the Back change the volume, use the audio
1. With your phone on and the button. system volume knob.
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release To make a call using a name in the HFL 4. To end the call, press the Back
the Talk button. After the beep, phonebook, do this: button.
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL 1. With your phone on and the
response is, ‘‘What name or ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or To redial the last number called by
number would you like to call/ ON (II) position, press and release the phone, press and release the
dial?’’ the Talk button. After the beep, Talk button. After the beep, say
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL ‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,
2. Press and release the Talk button. response is ‘‘What name or ‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you
After the beep, say the number number would you like to call/ will hear the person you called
you want to call. For example, say dial?’’ through the audio speakers. To
‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response change the volume, use the audio
is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or 2. Press and release the Talk button. system volume knob, or the steering
continue to add numbers.’’ After the beep, say the name you wheel volume controls.
319
０７／０５／１７０９：３５：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３００３２５
Sending Numbers or Names 3. Press and release the Talk button. Receiving a Call
During a Call After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The If you receive a call when you are not
The HFL allows you to send dial tones will be sent, and the call on the phone, the HFL interrupts the
numbers or names during a call. This will continue. audio system (if it is on), and plays
is useful when you call a menu- the incoming call notification, if
driven phone system. You can also To send a name during a call, do this: activated. To answer the call, press
program account numbers into the 1. Press and release the Talk button. the Talk button and begin speaking.
HFL phonebook for easy retrieval After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The If you don’t want to answer the call,
during menu-driven calls. HFL response is ‘‘What name or press the Back button.
number would you like to send?’’
To send a number during a call, do this: If your phone has Call Waiting, and
1. Press and release the Talk button. 2. Press and release the Talk button. you receive a call when you are on
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The After the beep, say the name you the phone, press and release the
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or want to send. For example, say Talk button to answer it. When you
number would you like to send?’’ ‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL do this, the original call is placed on
response is ‘‘Would you like to hold. To return to the original call,
2. Press and release the Talk button. send account number?’’ press the Talk button again. If you
After the beep, say the number don’t want to answer the new call,
you want to send. For example, 3. Press and release the Talk button. disregard it, and continue with your
say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The original call. If you want to hang up
‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to dial tones will be sent, and the call the original call and answer the new
add numbers.’’ will continue. call, press the Back button.
320
０７／０５／１８１１：３３：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００３２６
Transferring a Call To mute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:

During a call, you can transfer it 1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
from the HFL to your phone, or from After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
your phone to the HFL. HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
To transfer a call from the HFL to your To unmute your voice, do this: receive contact, and list.’’
phone, do this: 2. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button.
Features
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The
The audio switches from the HFL canceled.’’ HFL response is, ‘‘What name
to the phone. would you like to store?’’
Setting up the Phonebook
To transfer a call from your phone to the The HFL phonebook can store up to 3. Press and release the Talk button.
HFL, do this: 50 names with their associated After the beep, say the name you
2. Press and release the Talk button. numbers. These can be any types of would like to store. For example,
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ numbers. For example, you can store say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’
The audio switches from your a phone number and use it to make a The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
phone to the HFL. call, or you can store an account number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the
number and use it during a call to a number for account number?’’
Muting a Call menu-driven phone system.
During a call, you can mute or 4. Press and release the Talk button.
unmute your voice to the person you After the beep, say the number.
are talking to. For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘123 456
7891.’’
CONTINUED
321
０７／０５／１７０９：３５：５６３１ＳＪＡ６３００３２７
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The After the beep, say the new After the beep, say the name you
HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account number for Eric. For example, say would like to delete. For example,
number) has been stored. ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
Returning to the main menu.’’ is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ ‘‘Would you like to delete Eric?’’
To edit the number of a name, do this: 5. Press and release the Talk button. 4. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ HFL response is ‘‘The number has HFL response is, ‘‘The name has
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook been changed. Returning to the been deleted. Returning to the
options are store, edit, delete, main menu.’’ main menu.’’
receive contact, and list.’’
To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, do
2. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. this:
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ 1. Press and release the Talk button.
HFL response is, ‘‘What name The HFL response is, ‘‘The After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
would you like to edit?’’ Phonebook options are store, edit, The HFL response is, ‘‘The
delete, receive contact, and list.’’ Phonebook options are store, edit,
3. Press and release the Talk button. delete, receive contact, and list.’’
After the beep, say the name you 2. Press and release the Talk button.
would like to edit. For example, After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is HFL response is, ‘‘What name
‘‘What is the new number for would you like to delete?’’
Eric?’’
322
０７／０５／１７０９：３６：１０３１ＳＪＡ６３００３２８
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once HFL response is, ‘‘This process
names in the phonebook. When connected, you will hear the will clear all paired phones, clear
the end of the list is reached, the person you called through the all entries in the phonebook, and
HFL response is, ‘‘The entire list audio speakers. To change the clear the passcode. Is this what
has been read. Returning to the volume, use the audio system you would like to do?’’
main menu.’’ volume knob, or the steering
Features
wheel volume controls. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
To call a name from the phonebook list, After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
do this: Clearing the System HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
1. Press and release the Talk button. This operation clears the HFL of clear all paired phones, all
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ your passcode, your paired phones, phonebook entries, and the
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook and all names in the HFL phonebook. passcode. This may take up to 2
options are store, edit, delete, Clearing is recommended before you minutes to complete.’’ Press and
receive contact, and list.’’ sell your vehicle. release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say
2. Press and release the Talk button. To clear the system, do this: ‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The 1. Press and release the Talk button.
HFL responds by listing the After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The 4. If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a short
names in the phonebook. When it HFL response is, ‘‘System options period of time, the HFL response
says the name you want to call, for are setup and clear.’’ is, ‘‘System has been cleared.
example, Eric, press the Talk Returning to the main menu.’’
button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
to call Eric?’’
323
０７／０５／１７０９：３６：２４３１ＳＪＡ６３００３２９
Changing Language If there are paired phones without To change from French to English, do
Canadian models only French name tags, the HFL this:
To change from English to French, do response is ‘‘Pour que le système 1. Press and release the Talk button.
this: identifie les téléphones qui ont été After the beep, say ‘‘Changer
1. Press and release the Talk button. jumelés dans une autre langue, les Langue.’’ The HFL response is,
After the beep, say ‘‘Change noms des téléphones doivent être ‘‘Anglais ou Français?’’
language.’’ The HFL response is ré-enregistrés.’’
‘‘English or French?’’ 2. Press and release the Talk button.
NOTE: If there are paired phones After the beep, say ‘‘English.’’ The
2. Press and release the Talk button. without French name tags, the HFL response is, ‘‘You have
After the beep, say ‘‘Français.’’ following prompts will continue. selected English. Name tags that
The HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez were stored while in French mode
sélectionné Français. Les noms 4. The HFL response is, for example, will not be accessible in English
enregistrés en mode Anglais ne ‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour mode. Would you like to
seront pas accessible en mode ＜Paul’s phone＞?’’ Press and continue?’’
Français. Voulez-vous continuer? release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’ 3. Press and release the Talk button.
3. Press and release the Talk button. The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ If there
After the beep, say ‘‘Oui.’’ If there nom Français pour ＜Pat’s are no paired phones without
are no paired phones without phone＞?’’ Press and release the English name tags, the HFL
French name tags, the HFL Talk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone de response is ‘‘The language has
response is ‘‘La langue a été Pat.’’ After all paired phones been changed. Returning to the
changée. Retour au menu principal.’’ missing a French name tag are remain menu.’’
recorded, the HFL will prompt,
‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’
324
０７／０５／１７０９：３６：３６３１ＳＪＡ６３００３３０
If there are paired phones without HFL Limitations As required by the FCC:
English name tags, the HFL When using voice control, the HFL This device complies with Part 15 of the
response is ‘‘The language has been call is placed on hold, or the HFL FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
changed. For the system to identify stops its voice recognition. To following two conditions: (1) This device
phones that were paired while in operate the HFL again, press the may not cause harmful interference, and
another language, the phone names Talk button. Then after the beep, say (2) this device must accept any
need to be re-recorded.’’ the appropriate command. interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
Features
NOTE: If there are paired phones In addition, you cannot use the HFL operation.
without English name tags, the while using AcuraLink.
following prompts will continue. Changes or modifications not expressly
4. The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What compliance could void the user’s
is the English name for authority to operate the equipment.
＜Téléphone de Paul＞?’’ Press
and release the Talk button. After This device complies with Industry
the beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ The Canada Standard RSS-210.
HFL response is ‘‘What is the Operation is subject to the following two
English name for ＜Téléphone de conditions: (1) this device may not cause
Pat＞?’’ Press and release the Talk interference, and (2) this device must
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s accept any interference that may cause
phone.’’ After all paired phones undesired operation of the device.
missing an English name tag are
re-recorded, the HFL will say
‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
325
０７／０５／１７０９：３６：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００３３１
Rearview Camera and Monitor
On models with navigation system Since the rearview camera display

area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)

with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation system screen.
For the best picture, always keep the

rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
326
０７／０５／１７０９：３６：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００３３２
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 328

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 328
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 329
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling......................................329
need to know how to properly store Tighten Fuel Cap Message .......331
luggage or packages. The Opening and Closing
information in this section will help the Hood ..................................331
you. If you plan to add any Oil Check .....................................333
accessories to your vehicle, please Engine Coolant Check ...............333
read the information in this section Fuel Economy ................................ 334
Before Driving
first. Accessories and Modifications .... 337
Carrying Cargo .............................. 339
327
０７／０５／１７０９：３６：５９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３３３
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation We recommend quality gasolines

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate containing detergent additives that
reliability and performance by paying on premium unleaded gasoline with a help prevent fuel system and engine
extra attention to how you drive pump octane of 91 or higher. If this deposits.
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). octane grade is unavailable, regular
During this period: unleaded gasoline with a pump In addition, in order to maintain good
octane of 87 or higher may be used performance, fuel economy, and
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid temporarily. The use of regular emissions control, we strongly
acceleration. unleaded gasoline can cause metallic recommend, in areas where it is
knocking noises in the engine and available, the use of gasoline that
Avoid hard braking for the first will result in decreased engine does NOT contain manganese-based
200 miles (300 km). performance. The long-term use of fuel additives such as MMT.
regular-grade gasoline can lead to Use of gasoline with these additives
Do not change the oil until the engine damage. may adversely affect performance,
scheduled maintenance time. and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
Do not tow a trailer. come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
328
０７／０５／１７０９：３７：１３３１ＳＪＡ６３００３３４
Service Station Procedures
Some gasoline today is blended with Refueling

oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON Gasoline is highly flammable
operate on oxygenated gasoline and explosive. You can be
containing up to 10% ethanol by burned or seriously injured
volume and up to 15% MTBE by when handling fuel.
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol. Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flames
If you notice any undesirable away.
Before Driving
operating symptoms, try another Handle fuel only outdoors.
service station or switch to another Wipe up spills immediately.
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related 1. Park with the driver’s side closest FUEL FILL CAP
information, please refer to your to the service station pump.
Quick Start Guide.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pressing
the button in the driver’s door. (To
open the fuel fill door manually,
see page 450 .)
TETHER
CONTINUED
329
０７／０５／１７０９：３７：１９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３３５
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off 5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
You may hear a hissing sound as even though the tank is not full, until it clicks at least once. If you
pressure inside the tank escapes. there may be a problem with your do not properly tighten the cap,
Place the cap in the holder on the vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
fuel fill door. system. The system helps keep CAP’’ message on the multi-
fuel vapor from going into the information display (see right
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel atmosphere. Try filling at another column on this page), and the
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do pump. If this does not fix the malfunction indicator lamp may
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave problem, consult your dealer. also come on (see page 448 ).
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes. 6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
330
０７／０５／１７０９：３７：２９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３３６
Tighten Fuel Cap Message replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to Opening and Closing the Hood
another message, press the INFO
button. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ HOOD RELEASE LEVER
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
If the system still detects a leak in

the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
Before Driving
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic clicks at least once. The MIL should 1. Park the vehicle, and set the
system will detect a loose or missing go off after several days of normal parking brake. Pull the hood
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system driving once the cap is tightened or release lever located under the
leak. The first time a leak is detected replaced. If the MIL does not go off, lower left corner of the dashboard.
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message have your vehicle inspected by a The hood will pop up slightly.
appears on the multi-information dealer. For more information, see
display. Turn the engine off, and page 448 .
confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If
it is, loosen it, then retighten it until
it clicks at least once. The message
should go off after several days of
normal driving once you tighten or CONTINUED
331
０７／０５／１７０９：３７：３７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３３７
LATCH
2. Reach between the hood and the 3. Lift the hood up most of the way. To close the hood, lower the hood to
front bumper with your finger. The hydraulic supports will lift it about a foot (30 cm) above the
Slide the latch handle up. up the rest of the way and hold it fender, then firmly press down on
up. the front edge of the hood. Make
If the hood latch handle moves sure it is securely latched.
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
332
０７／０５／１７０９：３７：５１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３３８
Oil Check Engine Coolant Check

DIPSTICK RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK
Before Driving
LOWER MARK MAX
MIN
Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and Look at the coolant level in the
engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the upper and lower between the MAX and MIN lines. If
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). marks. it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 402 .
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean If it is near or below the lower
cloth or paper towel. mark, see Adding Engine Oil on Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
page 399 . Checks on page 394 for information
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back about checking other items on your
into its hole. vehicle.
333
０７／０５／１７０９：３８：０３３１ＳＪＡ６３００３３９
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number. City MPG Highway MPG
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments. Combined Fuel Estimated Annual
Economy Fuel Cost
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right (Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA achieved is also provided. Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
estimates include: Provides an estimated annual fuel
Combined Fuel Economy − cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
City MPG − Represents urban Represents a combination of city and km) per year multiplied by the cost
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A highway driving. The scale per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
range of miles per gallon achieved is represents the range of combined data) divided by the combined fuel
also provided. fuel economy for other vehicles in economy.
the class.
Highway MPG − Represents a For more information on fuel
mixture of rural and interstate economy ratings and factors that
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, affect fuel economy, visit www.
typical of longer trips in free-flowing fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
traffic. A range of miles per gallon vehicles.gc.ca)
334
０７／０５／１７０９：３８：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３００３４０
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity Observe the speed limit −
The following factors can lower your motor oil, displaying the API Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
vehicle’s fuel economy: Certification Seal (see page on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
Aggressive driving (hard 399). mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
acceleration and braking) Maintain proper tire inflation speed and you reduce the drag.
Excessive idling, accelerating and − An under-inflated tire increases Trailers, car top carriers, roof
braking in stop-and-go traffic ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces racks and bike racks are also big
Cold engine operation (engines fuel economy. contributors to increased drag.
are more efficient when warmed Avoid carrying excess weight in Always drive in the highest gear
up) your vehicle − It puts a heavier possible − If your vehicle has a
Before Driving
Driving with a heavy load or the load on the engine, increasing fuel manual transmission, you can
air conditioner running consumption. boost your fuel economy by up
Improperly inflated tires Keep your vehicle clean − In shifting as early as possible.
particular, a build-up of snow or Avoid excessive idling − Idling
Improving Fuel Economy mud on your vehicle’s underside results in 0 miles per gallon.
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Vehicle Maintenance Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
A properly maintained vehicle economy.
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce Drive Efficiently
fuel economy. Always maintain your Drive moderately − Rapid
vehicle according to the maintenance acceleration, abrupt cornering,
messages displayed on the multi- and hard braking increase fuel
information display (see Owner’s consumption.
Maintenance Checks on page 394 ).
For example:
335
０７／０５／１７０９：３８：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３４１
Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air Checking Your Fuel Economy

conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible. Miles Gallons Miles per
Plan and combine trips − driven of fuel Gallon
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
L per
100 Liter Kilometers
100 km
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy. 1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking 2) Reset trip counter to zero.
fuel gauge readings are NOT 3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
accurate measures of fuel economy. 4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
336
０７／０５／１７０９：３８：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３４２
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Acura accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
you make any modifications or add modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
any accessories, be sure to read the vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
following information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Acura accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 451 ) or interfere with
Before Driving
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding the proper operation of your
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. vehicle.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Before installing any electronic
Although non-Acura accessories may When properly installed, cellular accessory, have the installer
fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and contact your dealer. If possible,
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should have your dealer inspect the final
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s installation.
handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and Do not install accessories on the
tire pressure monitoring system. side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
337
０７／０５／１７０９：３８：５７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３４３
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires

Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
or replacing components with non- your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
Acura components could seriously other systems.
affect your vehicle’s handling,
stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
Here are some examples: safety systems could make the
Lowering the vehicle with a non- systems ineffective.
Acura suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground If you plan to modify your vehicle,
clearance can allow the consult your dealer.
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a non-

Acura suspension kit can affect
the handling and stability.
Non-Acura wheels, because they

are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
338
０７／０５／１７０９：３９：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３４４
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET CENTER POCKET storage areas:
Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Console compartment
Center pocket
Trunk
In addition, the trunk pass-through
Before Driving
allows you to carry longer items.
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS GLOVE BOX
339
０７／０５／１７０９：３９：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３００３４５
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (4)The resulting figure equals the

The maximum load for your vehicle available amount of cargo and
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles, Overloading or improper luggage load capacity. For
and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles. loading can affect handling and example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
stability and cause a crash in equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
See Tire And Loading Information which you can be hurt or killed. five 150 lb. passengers in your
label attached to the driver’s vehicle, the amount of available
doorjamb. Follow all load limits and other cargo and luggage load capacity is
loading guidelines in this 650 lbs.
Label Example manual. (1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
Steps for Determining Correct Load (5)Determine the combined weight

Limit − of luggage and cargo being loaded
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The on the vehicle. That weight may
combined weight of occupants and not safely exceed the available
cargo should never exceed XXX cargo and luggage load capacity
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s calculated in Step 4.
placard.
This figure includes the total weight (6)If your vehicle will be towing a
of all occupants, cargo, and (2)Determine the combined weight trailer, load from your trailer will
accessories, and the tongue load if of the driver and passenger that be transferred to your vehicle.
you are towing a trailer. will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
(3)Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity of
the driver and passengers from your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
340
０７／０５／１７０９：３９：３０３１ＳＪＡ６３００３４６
Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
Example 1 not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs) (550 lbs) Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
Example 2
Before Driving
Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs) (250 lbs)
Example 3
Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs) (100 lbs)
341
０７／０５／１７０９：３９：４０３１ＳＪＡ６３００３４７
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on If you carry any items extending
Compartment a Roof Rack through the trunk pass-through,
Store or secure all items that could Distribute cargo evenly on the tie down or secure all items that
be thrown around and hurt floor of the trunk, placing the could be thrown around the
someone during a crash. heaviest items on the bottom and vehicle and hurt someone during a
as far forward as possible. crash or sudden stop.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your If you carry large items that
view and be thrown around the prevent you from closing the trunk
vehicle during a crash. lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
Be sure items placed on the floor possibility of carbon monoxide
behind the front seats cannot roll poisoning, follow the instructions
under the seats and interfere with on page 56 .
the pedals or seat operation.
If you carry any items on a roof
Keep the glove box closed while rack, be sure the total weight of
driving. If it is open, a passenger the rack and the items does not
could injure their knees during a exceed the maximum allowable
crash or sudden stop. weight. Please contact your dealer
for further information.
342
０７／０５／１７０９：３９：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３４８
Carrying Cargo
Cargo Hooks
SIDE CARGO HOOKS CARGO FLOOR HOOKS
Before Driving
There are hooks on the floor and The cargo floor hooks can also be
both sides of the trunk. They can be used to tie down and secure items on
used to install the cargo net for the floor.
securing items. The side cargo
hooks are designed to hold light
items (maximum load: 6 lbs or 3 kgs
for each hook). Heavy objects may
damage the side hooks.
343
０７／０５／１７０９：３９：５０３１ＳＪＡ６３００３４９
344
０７／０５／１７０９：３９：５５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３５０
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 346

starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 347
conditions, and how to operate the Check Starting System
automatic transmission. It also Message .................................. 348
includes important information on Automatic Transmission............... 349
parking your vehicle, the braking Super Handling-All Wheel Drive
system, the Super handling-all wheel (SH-AWD) System .................... 356
drive (SH-AWD) system, the vehicle Parking ............................................ 357
stability assist (VSA) system, the tire Braking System.............................. 358
pressure monitoring system (TPMS), Anti-lock Brakes(ABS) ................. 359
the collision mitigation brake system Collision Mitigation Brake
(CMBS), and facts you need if you System (CMBS) ......................... 361
Driving
are planning to tow a trailer. Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 371
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System......................................... 377
Towing a Trailer ............................ 379
Towing Your Vehicle .................... 384
345
０７／０５／１７０９：４０：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３５１
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 5. Check the seat adjustment (see
and adjustments before you drive page 155 ).
your vehicle.
6. Check the adjustment of the
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see
and outside lights are clean and page 159 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 147 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
8. Make sure the doors and the
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire trunk are securely closed and
looks low, use a gauge to check its locked.
pressure (see page 420 ).
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
4. Check that any items you may be your passengers have fastened
carrying are stored properly or their seat belts (see page 17 ).
fastened down securely.
10.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages on the multi-information
display (see pages 61 , 70 and
78 ).
346
０７／０５／１７０９：４０：１９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３５２
Starting the Engine
Your vehicle’s starting system has an seconds until the engine starts. 5. If the engine does not start within
auto control mode. When you turn 15 seconds, or starts but stalls
the ignition switch to the START If you hold the ignition switch in right away, repeat step 4 with the
(III) position, this feature keeps the the START (III) position for more accelerator pedal pressed halfway
engine’s starter motor running until than 7 seconds, the starter motor, down. If the engine starts, release
the engine starts. Follow these depending on the outside pressure on the accelerator pedal
instructions to start the engine: temperature, runs for about 10 to so the engine does not race.
25 seconds until the engine starts.
1. Apply the parking brake. 6. If the engine fails to start, press
If the engine does not start, wait at the accelerator pedal all the way
2. In cold weather, turn off all least 10 seconds before trying down, and hold it there while
electrical accessories to reduce again. starting to clear flooding. If the
Driving
the drain on the battery. engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal. The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-
4. Without touching the accelerator coded key (or other device) is used, the The engine is harder to start in cold
pedal, turn the ignition switch to engine’s f uel system is disabled. For weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
the START (III) position, then more inf ormation, see page 150 . altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
release the ignition switch. You do meters) adds to this problem.
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. Depending on
the outside temperature, the
starter motor runs for about 6 to 9
347
０７／０５／１７０９：４０：２５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３５３
Starting the Engine
Check Starting System Message If this message is on, the ignition

switch has to be held in the
START (III) position manually
until the engine starts. The
ignition switch can be held in that
position up to 15 seconds.
Even though you may be able to

start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starting
system, have your dealer inspect
your vehicle.
If there is a problem with the

starting system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON (II) position. You
will also see this message when the
auto control mode of the starting
system has a problem.
348
０７／０５／１７０９：４０：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３５４
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a Shifting
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
Driving
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument To shift from Park to any position,
panel show which position the shift When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a press firmly on the brake pedal and
lever is in. In the Sequential possible problem with the slide the lever along the guide on the
SportShift Mode, the ‘‘M’’ indicator transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK console. You cannot shift out of Park
next to the ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on, TRANSMISSION’’ message on the when the ignition switch is in the
and the illuminated number under multi-information display (see page LOCK (0) or the ACCESSORY (I)
the low oil pressure indicator shows 78 ). position.
you the gear you have selected.
CONTINUED
349
０７／０５／１７０９：４０：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００３５５
To avoid transmission damage, come If there is a problem in the reverse

To shift from: Do this: to a complete stop before shifting lockout system, or your vehicle’s
P to R Press the brake pedal, then into Park. The shift lever must be in battery is disconnected or goes dead,
move the shift lever. Park before you can turn the ignition you cannot shift to reverse. (Refer to
R to N switch to the LOCK (0) position, or Shift Lock Release on page 354 ).
N to D remove the built-in key from the
D toD3 ignition switch. Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
D3 to D Move the lever. need to restart a stalled engine, or if
D to N Reverse (R) − Press the brake it is necessary to stop briefly with
N to R pedal to shift from Park to reverse. the engine idling. Shift to the Park
R to P To shift from neutral to reverse, position if you need to leave your
come to a complete stop and then vehicle for any reason. Press on the
Park (P) − This position mechani- shift. brake pedal when you are moving
cally locks the transmission. Use the shift lever from neutral to
Park whenever you are turning off or Your vehicle has a reverse lockout so another gear.
starting the engine. To shift out of you cannot accidentally shift to
Park, you must press on the brake reverse from neutral or any other Drive (D) − Use this position for
pedal and have your foot off the driving position when the vehicle your normal driving. The
accelerator pedal. Move the shift speed exceeds 5−6 mph (8−10 transmission automatically selects a
lever to the right to shift out of Park. km/h). suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
If you have done all of the above and If you cannot shift to reverse when notice the transmission shifting up at
still cannot move the lever out of the vehicle is stopped, press the higher engine speeds when the
Park, see Shift Lock Release on brake pedal, slowly shift to neutral, engine is cold. This helps the engine
page 354 . and then shift to reverse. warm up faster.
350
０７／０５／１７０９：４０：５９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３５６
Sequential SportShift Mode

PADDLE SHIFTER
(＋) UP SHIFT
(−) DOWN SHIFT
Driving
SELECTED GEAR
With the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, To enter the Sequential SportShift While in the Sequential SportShift
you can select the Sequential mode, move the shift lever further to mode, you can also shift up or down
SportShift mode to shift gears much the driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’ using the ＋ (right side) or − (left
like a manual transmission, but move the shift lever to the side) paddle shifters on the right and
without a clutch pedal. passenger’s side. left side of the steering wheel.
In Sequential SportShift mode, each
When you move the shift lever from time you push forward on the shift For up shift, press the right side (＋)
‘‘D’’ to ‘‘M’’ position, the display lever, the transmission shifts to a paddle shifter.
shows the selected gear. higher gear. Pull back on the lever to For down shift, press the left side
downshift. The number of the gear (−) paddle shifter.
selected is displayed on the
instrument panel. CONTINUED
351
０７／０５／１７０９：４１：１３３１ＳＪＡ６３００３５７
When you accelerate away from a The transmission may automatically Downshifting gives you more power
stop, the transmission starts in first downshift from the higher gear to when climbing, and provides engine
gear. You have to manually upshift the lower gear under these braking when going down a steep hill.
between first and fifth gears. Make conditions:
sure you upshift before the engine The transmission also shifts
speed reaches the tachometer’s red Driving on level roads and downhill automatically as the vehicle comes to
zone. a complete stop. It downshifts to first
To shift from Speed range gear when the vehicle speed is under
The transmission remains in the 8 mph (13 km/h).
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There 4→3 under 17 mph
is no automatic downshift when you (27 km/h) If you try to manually downshift at a
push the accelerator pedal to the speed that would cause the engine to
floor. 5→4 under 38 mph exceed the redline in a lower gear,
(60 km/h) the transmission does not downshift.
The gear indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
Driving uphill times, then return to the higher gear.
To shift from Speed range If the vehicle speed slows to below

the redline of the selected lower gear
4→3 under 41 mph position while the indicator is
(65 km/h) flashing, the transmission
downshifts, and the display shows
5→4 under 47 mph the selected lower gear.
(75 km/h)
352
０７／０５／１７０９：４１：２４３１ＳＪＡ６３００３５８
The table shows the speed ranges Starting in Second Gear

for upshifting and downshifting. To shift from Speed range When you are in Sequential
SportShift mode, and the vehicle is
3→2 under 56 mph stopped, push forward on the shift
To shift from Speed range (90 km/h) lever to shift to second gear. You
will see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting
1→2 over 0 mph 4→3 under 93 mph out in second gear will help to
(0 km/h) (150 km/h) reduce wheelspin in deep snow or
on a slippery surface.
2→3 over 8 mph 5→4 under 130 mph
(13 km/h) (209 km/h) If you start out in second gear, the
transmission will be fixed in that
Driving
3→4 over 17 mph gear.
(27 km/h)
The transmission will not
4→5 over 37 mph automatically downshift to first gear
(60 km/h) even when the vehicle speed is
under 8 mph (13 km/h). You need to
shift down to first gear manually.
CONTINUED
353
０７／０５／１７０９：４１：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３５９
Drive (D3) − This position is Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release
similar to D, except only the first If you exceed the maximum speed This allows you to move the shift
three gears are selected. Use D3 for the gear you are in, the engine lever out of Park if the normal
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain, speed will enter into the tachometer’s method of pushing on the brake
or to provide engine braking when red zone. If this occurs, you may feel pedal does not work.
going down a steep hill. D3 can also the engine cut in and out. This is
keep the transmission from cycling caused by a limiter in the engine’s 1. Set the parking brake.
between third, fourth, and fifth gears computer controls. The engine will
in stop-and-go driving. run normally when you reduce the 2. Make sure the ignition switch is in
rpm below the red zone. the LOCK (0) position.
For faster acceleration when in D3 or
D, you can get the transmission to Before downshifting, make sure the To release the reverse lockout, make
automatically downshift by pushing engine will not go into the sure the ignition switch is in the
the accelerator pedal to the floor. tachometer’s red zone. ACCESSORY(I) position.
The transmission will shift down one,
two, or three gears, depending on
your speed.
354
０７／０５／１７０９：４１：４５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３６０
6. Remove the built-in key from the

shift lock release slot, then
reinstall the cover. Make sure the
notch on the cover is on the driver’s
side. Press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock

release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving
COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift 4. Insert a built-in key into the shift
lock release slot cover next to the lock release slot.
shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped
screwdriver or a metal fingernail 5. Push down on the built-in key, and
file to remove the cover. Carefully move the shift lever out of Park to
pry on the edge of the cover. neutral.
To release the reverse lockout,

move the shift lever from neutral
to reverse, then to Park.
355
０７／０５／１７０９：４１：５４３１ＳＪＡ６３００３６１
Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System
The super handling-all wheel drive SH-AWD Torque Distribution Each torque indicator is displayed
(SH-AWD) system is a full time all- Monitor as a bar graph divided into 5
wheel-drive system that segments. The number of
automatically controls and transfers TORQUE INDICATOR
segments represents the amount
varying amounts of engine torque to of torque distributed to each
all wheels independently, according wheel.
to the driving conditions.
When cruise control is on while
While the SH-AWD system helps to driving, the torque distribution
enhance the vehicle’s driving monitor is not shown.
stability in all situations, it is still
your responsibility to drive and When there is only a slight change in
corner at reasonable speeds and to TORQUE INDICATOR torque distribution while driving,
leave a sufficient margin of safety. such as cruising on level roads at the
same speed, the torque distribution
The SH-AWD torque distribution monitor may stop displaying the
monitor on the multi-information amount of torque. This is not a
display shows you the amount of system problem. The monitor will
torque being sent to the wheels. show the amount if the system
Each wheel: right front (RF), left senses any change in torque
front (LF), right rear (RR), and left distribution.
rear (LR), has its own torque
indicator.
356
０７／０５／１７０９：４２：０８３１ＳＪＡ６３００３６２
Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System, Parking
If the SH-AWD indicator on the Parking Never park over dry leaves, tall
instrument panel stays on, and the Always use the parking brake when grass, or other flammable
multi-information display shows an you park your vehicle. Make sure materials. The hot three way
SH-AWD message, there is a the parking brake is set firmly or catalytic converter could cause
problem with the system. Your your vehicle may roll if it is on an these materials to catch on fire.
vehicle still has normal front-wheel incline.
drive with vehicle stability assist If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
(VSA), but does not have the Set the parking brake before you put the front wheels away from the
advantages of SH-AWD. Have your the transmission in Park. This keeps curb.
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon the vehicle from moving and putting
as possible. pressure on the parking mechanism If the vehicle is facing downhill,
in the transmission. turn the front wheels toward the
Driving
curb.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof and the Check the indicator on the
windows are closed. instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Turn off the lights.
Make sure the parking brake is
Place any packages, valuables, etc., fully released before driving away.
in the trunk or take them with you. Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
Lock the doors. damage the rear brakes.
357
０７／０５／１７０９：４２：１８３１ＳＪＡ６３００３６３
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc Constant application of the brakes Braking System Design
brakes at all four wheels. A power when going down a long hill builds The hydraulic system that operates
assist helps reduce the effort needed up heat and reduces their effective- the brakes has two separate circuits.
on the brake pedal. The brake pedal ness. Use the engine to assist the Each circuit works diagonally across
assist function increases the force brakes by taking your foot off the the vehicle (the left-front brake is
you apply to the brake pedal during accelerator and downshifting to a connected with the right-rear brake,
an emergency stop. When the brake lower gear. etc.). If one circuit should develop a
pedal assist is activated, the e- problem, you will still have braking
pretensioners (if equipped) tighten Check the brakes after driving at two wheels.
front seat belts (see page 24 ). The through deep water. Apply the
anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps brakes moderately to see if they feel Brake Pad Wear Indicators
you retain steering control when normal. If not, apply them gently and If the brake pads need replacing, you
braking very hard (see page 359 ). frequently until they do. Be extra will hear a distinctive, metallic
cautious in your driving. screeching sound when you apply
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brakes applied lightly, builds up the brake pads replaced, they will
heat, and reduces their effectiveness screech all the time. It is normal for
and reduces brake pad life. In the brakes to occasionally squeal or
addition, fuel economy can be squeak when you apply them.
reduced. It also keeps your brake
lights on all the time, confusing
drivers behind you.
358
０７／０５／１７０９：４２：２７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３６４
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake ABS Indicator
helps prevent the wheels from pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is If this indicator comes on, the anti-
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly lock function of the braking system
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry has shut down. The brakes still work
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on like a conventional system, but
the brake pedal very hard before the without anti-lock. You should have
The electronic brake distribution ABS activates. However, you may your dealer inspect your vehicle as
(EBD) system, which is part of the feel the ABS activate immediately if soon as possible.
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
braking distribution according to When the ABS indicator comes on,
vehicle loading. you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
Driving
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
You should never pump the brake pedal. information display.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
CONTINUED
359
０７／０５／１７０９：４２：３６３１ＳＪＡ６３００３６５
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
system indicator come on together, ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
and the parking brake is fully distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
released, the EBD system may also vehicle. It only helps with steering snow, than a vehicle without anti-
be shut down. control during braking. lock.
Test your brakes as instructed on ABS will not prevent a skid that
page 449 . If the brakes feel normal, results from changing direction
drive slowly and have your vehicle abruptly, such as trying to take a
repaired by your dealer as soon as corner too fast or making a sudden
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking lane change. Always drive at a safe
which could cause the rear wheels to speed for the road and weather
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of conditions.
control.
ABS cannot prevent the loss of
The VSA indicator will come on stability. Always steer moderately
along with the ABS indicator. when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
360
０７／０５／１７０９：４２：４５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３６６
Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)
Overview The CMBS does not activate if the RADAR SENSOR

If equipped speed difference between your
The collision mitigation brake vehicles is less than 10 mph (15
system (CMBS) can assist you when km/h). CMBS may also not
there is a possibility of your vehicle activate if you turn the steering
hitting the vehicle in front of you. It wheel to avoid the collision.
is designed to reduce the speed of
your vehicle before an unavoidable When the CMBS activates, the brake
collision occurs and, if possible, to lights also come on.
alert you to a potential collision while
SEAT BELT
there is time to prevent it. Here is a E-PRETENSIONER
brief description of what the CMBS BRAKE ACTUATOR
Driving
can do:
The CMBS consists of a radar
When your speed is above 10 mph sensor in the front grille, a brake
(15 km/h), the CMBS radar actuator in the engine compartment,
sensor in the front grille can sense an indicator on the instrument panel,
a vehicle ahead of you. When your seat belt e-pretensioners on the front
vehicle gets too close to the seats, and an on/off switch on the
vehicle ahead of you, the system dashboard.
may activate a warning beep,
causing automatic application of
the brakes, and causing the
e-pretensioners to tighten the
front seat belts (see page 24 ).
361
０７／０５／１７０９：４２：５４３１ＳＪＡ６３００３６７
Radar Sensor Do not allow anything to impact the

radar sensor or the emblem. If either
BOLTS of these parts receives a strong
(Do not tamper)
impact, turn off the system by
pressing the CMBS off switch, and
have your vehicle checked by a
dealer. If the front grille ever needs
to be repaired, consult a dealer first.
If the front emblem or the radar

sensor ever needs to be removed,
EMBLEM take your vehicle to a dealer.
The radar sensor is located behind Always keep the emblem clean. If it
the Acura emblem in the front grille. gets dirty, clean it with water or a
If the emblem is covered with mud, mild detergent. Never use chemical
dirt, dead leaves, wet snow, etc., or if solvents or polishing powder.
you put a sticker on it, the CMBS will
automatically shut off, and the There are three bolts on the sides of
CMBS indicator on the instrument the radar sensor. Do not tamper with
panel will come on. You will also see these bolts, or you may cause the
a CHECK CMBS RADAR SENSOR system to malfunction.
display for about 5 seconds.
362
０７／０５／１７０９：４３：００３１ＳＪＡ６３００３６８
The radar sensor may not always

scan as intended. Here are two
When the CMBS is on, the radar sensor examples:
constantly scans f or vehicles ahead of
you. This means that driving on a road Your vehicle is tilted because of a
with a f ew or no vehicles could cause a heavy load in the rear or from
CHECK CMBS RADAR SENSOR modifications to the suspension.
message to appear on the multi- Do not overload your vehicle (see
inf ormation display. This is normal Carrying Cargo on page 339 ), and
and not a cause f or concern. do not make any modifications to
the suspension (see Accessories
and Modifications on page 337 ).
Driving
The tires are not correctly
maintained. Always make sure the
tire pressures are correct (see
page 419 ), and that the tires are
the correct size and in good
condition (see Tires on page 419 ).
363
０７／０５／１７０９：４３：０９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３６９
Collision Alarm CMBS OFF Switch
CMBS OFF SWITCH
If the system senses a likely collision The audible alarm is a constant To turn the CMBS off, press the
with a vehicle or object ahead of you, beeping sound; the visual alert is an CMBS OFF switch on the dashboard
it alerts you with an audible and a amber colored BRAKE message that for about 1 second. When you do this,
visual alarm. flashes on the multi-information a beeper sounds, a CMBS indicator
display. If these alarms come on, on the instrument panel comes on,
take the appropriate means to and a CMBS OFF message appears
prevent a collision (apply the brakes, on the multi-information display. To
change lanes, etc.). turn the system back on, press the
switch again for about 1 second.
364
０７／０５／１７０９：４３：１８３１ＳＪＡ６３００３７０
When you turn the ignition switch to Automatic Shut Off The CMBS will automatically
the ON (II) position, the CMBS is Any of the conditions below can recover when these conditions are
turned on if it was on previously. cause the CMBS to shut off. When improved.
the system shuts off, the CMBS
indicator in the instrument panel
comes on, and a CHECK CMBS
SYSTEM message appears on the
multi-information display for about 5
seconds.
An abnormal tire condition is

detected (wrong tire size, flat tire,
Driving
etc.).
Extended off-road or mountainous

driving.
Driving your vehicle with the

parking brake applied.
Driving your vehicle in bad

weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
A dirty emblem on the front grille.
365
０７／０５／１７０９：４３：３０３１ＳＪＡ６３００３７１
CMBS Indicator The CMBS indicator normally comes When the VSA system indicator
on under these conditions: comes on (see page 377 ).
CMBS INDICATOR
When you manually turn off the When you turn the ignition switch
system. to the ON (II) position, the CMBS
indicator should come on for a few
When the system shuts off seconds, then go off. If the
automatically. indicator comes on at any other
time and a CHECK CMBS
When you drive in bad weather SYSTEM message appears on the
(rain, snow, fog, etc.). multi-information display, there is
a problem with the CMBS. You
If anything covers the front grille can still drive your vehicle, but
(dirt, mud, dry leaves, wet snow, CMBS will not be operating. Have
This indicator comes on for several etc.). your vehicle checked by a dealer.
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It also
comes on and stays on when you
turn the CMBS off by pressing the
CMBS OFF switch.
To turn the CMBS back on, make

sure the vehicle is stopped and the
position, then press the CMBS OFF
switch for about 1 second.
366
０７／０５／１７０９：４３：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００３７２
Limitations
The CMBS may not activate under YOUR VEHICLE YOUR VEHICLE
some conditions. Here are a few
examples:
The distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle ahead of you is too
short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a

slow speed.
Driving
A vehicle cuts in front of you and Driving in heavy, stop-and-go
brakes suddenly. traffic.
When you accelerate rapidly and The vehicle ahead of you is a

approach the vehicle ahead of you motorcycle or other small vehicle.
at high speed.
Immediately after you drive off.
CONTINUED
367
０７／０５／１７０９：４３：５１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３７３
YOUR VEHICLE YOUR VEHICLE

The CMBS is not designed to detect
pedestrians.
Even with little or no chance of a

collision, the CMBS may activate
under these conditions:
When you change lanes quickly,

then overtake the vehicle ahead of
you.
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front When you approach or pass a

of you. vehicle ahead of you that is
turning left or right in an
intersection.
368
０７／０５／１７０９：４４：０１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３７４
YOUR VEHICLE
LOW BRIDGE
RAILS
SIGN, POLE, etc.
Driving
When you pass a low bridge at When you approach train tracks at Because of the road condition
high speed. the bottom of a hill and you do not (curved, winding, etc.) or the state of
apply the brakes. your vehicle (turning angle, lane
When you go over a sharp-edged position, etc.), CMBS can sometimes
speed bump at high speed. mistake a stationary object (light
pole, traffic sign, etc.) as a vehicle
When you go over areas of ahead of you and temporarily
construction on the road surface. operate. This is normal.
369
０７／０５／１７０９：４４：０８３１ＳＪＡ６３００３７５
Important Safety Reminder As required by the FCC:

The main purpose of the CMBS is to This device complies with Part 15 of the
reduce the severity of injuries FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
caused by an unavoidable collision. following two conditions: (1) This device
While the CMBS may help to alert may not cause harmful interference, and
you and minimize the severity of a (2) this device must accept any
collision, it may not activate in every interference received, including
dangerous situation. interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Even with the CMBS, it is still your
responsibility to operate the brake Changes or modifications not expressly
pedal and steering wheel approved by the party responsible for
appropriately, according to the compliance could void the user’s
driving conditions. authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
370
０７／０５／１７０９：４４：２１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３７６
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Low Tire Pressure/ For example, if you check and fill
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) TPMS Indicator your tires in a warm area, then drive
that turns on every time you start the When the low tire pressure/TPMS in extremely cold weather, the tire
engine and monitors the pressure in indicator is on, one or more of your pressure will be lower than
your tires while driving. tires is significantly underinflated. measured and could be underinflated
The multi-information display also and cause the low tire pressure/
Each tire has its own pressure shows a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’ TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire message (see page 373 ). You should you check and adjust your tire
becomes significantly low, the stop and check your tires as soon as pressure in cooler conditions, and
sensor in that tire immediately sends possible, and inflate them to the drive into extremely hot conditions,
a signal that causes the low tire proper pressure as indicated on the the tire may become overinflated.
pressure/TPMS indicator in the vehicle’s tire information placard. However, the low tire pressure/
Driving
instrumental panel and the TPMS indicator will not come on if
appropriate tire position indicator on Driving on a significantly under- the tires are overinflated.
the tire pressure monitor on the inflated tire causes the tire to
multi-information display (see page overheat and can lead to tire failure. Refer to page 419 for tire inflation
373 ) to come on. Under-inflation also reduces fuel guidelines.
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and If there is a problem with the TPMS,
stopping ability. this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
Because tire pressure varies by minute, then stays on. You will also
temperature and other conditions, see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
the low tire pressure/TPMS message on the multi-information
indicator may come on unexpectedly. display (see page 375 ).
CONTINUED
371
０７／０５／１７０９：４４：３２３１ＳＪＡ６３００３７７
Although your tire pressure is Changing a Tire with TPMS regular tire equipped with the tire
monitored, you must manually check If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure monitor sensor.
the tire pressures monthly. pressure/TPMS and tire monitor
indicators will come on. Replace the Never use a puncture-repairing agent
Each tire, including the spare, should indicated flat tire with the compact in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
be checked monthly when the spare tire (see page 436 ). replace the tire pressure sensor.
vehicle is cold, and set to the Have the flat tire repaired by your
recommended inflation pressure as After the flat tire is replaced with the dealer as soon as possible.
specified on the vehicle placard and spare tire, the low tire pressure/
in the owner’s manual (see page TPMS indicator stays on while Each wheel is equipped with a tire
419 ). driving. After several miles pressure sensor mounted inside the
(kilometers) driving, this indicator tire behind the valve stem. You must
If you think you can safely drive a begins to flash, then stays on again. use TPMS specific wheels. It is
short distance to a service station, You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS recommended that you always have
proceed slowly to the station, then SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- your tires serviced by your dealer or
inflate the tire to the recommended information display. This is normal; a qualified technician.
pressure. the system cannot monitor the spare
tire pressure. Manually check the
If the tire is flat, or if the tire spare tire pressure to be sure it is
pressure is too low to continue correct.
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 375 ). This indicator and the warning
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
372
０７／０５／１７０９：４４：４１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３７８
Tire Pressure Monitor
VEHICLE ICON
Driving
When all tire pressures are normal, If there is a system error with the If any of the tires have low pressure,
the multi-information display will TPMS, the multi-information display the multi-information display will
show ‘‘TIRE PRESSURE OK shows a ‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION show a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
SYSTEM FUNCTION NORMAL.’’ ERROR’’ message (see page 79 ), message. You will also see one or
and the tire pressure readings will more low pressure tire positions
When any of the tires has low not be displayed. You will also see a blinking in the display (see page
pressure, the multi-information ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message 79 ).
display shows a ‘‘TIRE PRESSURE on the multi-information display (see
ERROR SYSTEM FUNCTION page 375 ).
NORMAL’’ message (see page 76 ).
CONTINUED
373
０７／０５／１７０９：４４：５１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３７９
If the low tire pressure/TPMS Tire Pressure Readings

indicator and the low tire position on
the low tire pressure monitor do not U.S. CANADA
go out after inflating the tires to the
specified values, have your dealer
check the system as soon as possible.
When the TPMS is functioning If one or more tires have low

normally, you can see the tire pressure, the low tire pressure/
pressure readings of each tire in psi TPMS indicator on the instrument
(U.S. models) or kPa (Canadian panel also comes on (see page 371 ).
models) by pressing the SEL/
RESET button while the multi- When cruise control is on while
information display shows the tire driving, the pressure reading cannot
pressure monitor. be checked by the tire pressure
monitor on the multi-information
display.
374
０７／０５／１７０９：４５：００３１ＳＪＡ６３００３８０
It is possible that the pressures Check TPMS System Message

display and the pressures you
manually measure are slightly
different.
If the difference is significant or you

cannot make the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator and message on the
multi-information display go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
Driving
system as soon as possible.
If there is a problem with the TPMS, If you see this message, the tire
the multi-information display shows pressure monitor shows a ‘‘SYSTEM
a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ FUNCTION ERROR’’ message. The
message. system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended.
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS Also, the tire pressure readings will
indicator begins to flash (see page not be displayed. Have your vehicle
67 ). checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
CONTINUED
375
０７／０５／１７０９：４５：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３８１
If the low tire pressure/TPMS As required by the FCC:

indicator comes on, or the multi- This device complies with Part 15 of the
information display shows a FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message, following two conditions: (1) This device
the VSA system automatically turns may not cause harmful interference, and
on even when the VSA system is (2) this device must accept any
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF interference received, including
switch (see page 378 ). If this interference that may cause undesired
happens, you cannot turn the VSA operation.
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again. Changes or modifications not expressly
When you restart the vehicle with compliance could void the user’s
the compact spare tire, the TPMS authority to operate the equipment.
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information This device complies with Industry
display after several miles Canada Standard RSS-210.
(kilometers) driving. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
376
０７／０５／１７０９：４５：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００３８２
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator When the VSA system indicator
system helps to stabilize the vehicle comes on, you will also see a
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message
more or less than desired. It also VSA activation indicator blink (see on the multi-information display.
assists you in maintaining traction page 65 ).
while accelerating on loose or Without VSA, your vehicle still has
slippery road surfaces. It does this VSA System Indicator normal braking and cornering ability,
by regulating the engine’s output and but it does not have VSA traction and
by selectively applying the brakes. If this indicator comes on while stability enhancement.
driving, pull to the side of the road
When VSA activates, you may notice when it is safe, and turn off the If the low tire pressure/TPMS
that the engine does not respond to engine. Reset the system by indicator comes on (see page 371 ),
Driving
the accelerator in the same way it restarting the engine. If the VSA or the multi-information display
does at other times. There may also system indicator stays on or comes shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
be some noise from the VSA back on while driving, have the VSA message with the indicator flashing
hydraulic system. You will also see system inspected by your dealer. (see page 375 ), the VSA system
the VSA activation indicator blink. automatically turns on even when
If the indicator does not come on the VSA system is turned off with
The VSA system cannot enhance the when the ignition switch is turned to the VSA OFF switch. In this case,
vehicle’s driving stability in all the ON (II) position, there may be a you cannot turn the VSA system off
situations and does not control your problem with the VSA system. Have by pressing the VSA OFF switch
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is your dealer inspect your vehicle as again.
still your responsibility to drive and soon as possible (see page 65 ).
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
377
０７／０５／１７０９：４５：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００３８３
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA OFF SWITCH VSA and Tire Sizes
In certain unusual conditions when Driving with varying tire or wheel
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow sizes may cause the VSA to
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier malfunction. When replacing tires,
to free it with the VSA temporarily make sure they are of the same size
switched off. When the VSA system and type as your original tires (see
is off, the traction control system is page 423 ).
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if If you install winter tires, make sure
you are not able to free it when the they are the same size as those that
VSA is on. were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
Immediately after freeing your during winter driving as you would if
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on This switch is at the right side of the your vehicle was not equipped with
again. We do not recommend driving left vent. Press it to turn VSA on and VSA.
your vehicle with the VSA and off.
traction control systems switched off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you

start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
378
０７／０５／１７０９：４５：４１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３８４
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed Load Limits

primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Exceeding any load limit or

improperly loading your vehicle
Driving
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed. Total Trailer Weight: The Tongue Load: The weight that
maximum allowable weight of the the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
Check the loading of your trailer and everything in or on it puts on the hitch should be
vehicle and trailer carefully must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). approximately 10 percent of the
before starting to drive. Towing a load that is too heavy trailer weight. Too much tongue
can seriously affect your vehicle’s load reduces front-tire traction and
handling and performance. It can steering control. Too little tongue
also damage the engine and load can make the trailer unstable
drivetrain. and cause it to sway.
CONTINUED
379
０７／０５／１７０９：４５：５４３１ＳＪＡ６３００３８５
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load, Checking Loads Towing Equipment and

start by loading 60 % of the load The best way to confirm that all Accessories
toward the front of the trailer and loads are within limits is to check Towing generally requires a variety
40 % toward the rear, then re-adjust them at a public scale. For public of supplemental equipment,
the load as needed. scales in your area, check your local depending on the size of your trailer,
phone book, or contact your trailer how much load you are towing, and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating dealer or rental agency for where you tow. To ensure the best
(GVWR): assistance. quality, we recommend that you
The maximum allowable weight of purchase Acura equipment
the vehicle, all occupants, all If you cannot get to a public scale, whenever possible.
accessories, all cargo, and the you can estimate the total trailer
tongue load is: 4,980 lbs (2,260 kg) weight by adding the weight of your Discuss your needs with your trailer
trailer (as quoted by the sales or rental agency, and follow the
Gross Axle Weight Rating manufacturer) with everything in or guidelines in the rest of this section.
(GAWR): on the trailer. Also make sure that all equipment is
The maximum allowable weight of properly installed and maintained,
the vehicle axles are: 2,680 lbs If you normally pull the same load and that it meets federal, state,
(1,215 kg) on the front axle, and each time you tow a trailer, you can province, and local regulations.
2,380 lbs (1,080 kg) on the rear use a suitable scale or a special
axle. tongue load gauge to check the Hitches
tongue load the first time you set up Any hitch used on your vehicle must
a towing combination (a fully loaded be properly bolted to the underbody.
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
380
０７／０５／１７０９：４６：０５３１ＳＪＡ６３００３８６
Towing a Trailer
Safety Chains Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights

Always use safety chains when you Acura recommends that any trailer Trailer lights and equipment must
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains having a total weight of 1,000 lbs comply with federal, state/province,
are secured to the trailer and hitch, (450 kg) or more be equipped with and local regulations. Check with
and that they cross under the tongue its own electric or surge-type brakes. your local trailer sales or rental
and can catch the trailer if it agencies for the requirements in the
becomes unhitched. Leave enough If you choose electric brakes, be area where you plan to tow, and use
slack to allow the trailer to turn sure they are electronically actuated. only equipment designed for your
corners easily, but do not let the Do not attempt to tap into your vehicle.
chains drag on the ground. vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem, Since lighting and wiring vary by
any attempt to attach trailer brakes trailer type and brand, you should
Driving
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system have a qualified technician install a
will lower braking effectiveness and suitable connector between the
create a potential hazard. vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
See your trailer dealer or rental damage to your vehicle’s electrical
agency for more information on system and affect your vehicle
installing electric brakes. warranty.
CONTINUED
381
０７／０５／１７０９：４６：１６３１ＳＪＡ６３００３８７
Towing a Trailer
Additional Towing Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist Your vehicle tires and spare are
Many states and Canadian provinces When preparing to tow, and before properly inflated, and the trailer
require special outside mirrors when driving away, be sure to check the tires and spare are inflated as
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t, following: recommended by the trailer
you should install special mirrors if maker.
you cannot clearly see behind you, or The vehicle has been properly
if the trailer creates a blind spot. serviced, and the suspension and
the cooling system are in good
Ask your trailer sales or rental operating condition.
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your The trailer has been properly
towing situation. serviced and is in good condition,
and the lights and brakes on the
trailer are working properly.
All weights and loads are within

limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any

other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are

properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
382
０７／０５／１７０９：４６：２８３１ＳＪＡ６３００３８８
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer When driving uphill and downhill, Making Turns and Braking
The added weight, length, and use the Sequential SportShift mode Make turns more slowly and wider
height of a trailer will affect your to provide the proper engine power than normal. The trailer tracks a
vehicle’s handling and performance, and engine braking on each gear. smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
so driving with a trailer requires Select fourth, third, second, or first can hit or run over something the
some special driving skills and gear; depending on the vehicle vehicle misses. Allow more time and
techniques. speeds and road condition. Do not distance for braking. Do not brake or
use fifth gear. The recommended turn suddenly as this could cause the
For your safety and the safety of speed range for each gear position is trailer to jackknife or turn over.
others, take time to practice driving shown in the table.
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
Driving
below. Gear position Speed range
Towing Speeds and Gears 1 0 − 19 mph

Drive slower than normal in all (0 − 30 km/h)
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers. 2 19 − 31 mph
Use D position when towing a trailer (30 − 50 km/h)
on level roads. D3 is the proper shift
lever position to use when towing a 3 31 − 41 mph
trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘ Driving (50 − 65 km/h)
on Hills’’ on the next page for
additional gear information.) 4 over 41 mph
(over 65 km/h)
CONTINUED
383
０７／０５／１７０９：４６：４１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３８９
Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle
Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting Towing Your Vehicle

When climbing hills, closely watch Crosswinds and air turbulence Your vehicle is not designed to be
your temperature gauge. If it nears caused by passing trucks can disrupt towed behind a motor home. If your
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air your steering and cause the trailer to vehicle needs to be towed in an
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if sway. When being passed by a large emergency, see page 459 .
necessary, pull to the side of the vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
road to let the engine cool. steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
If the automatic transmission shifts corrections.
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D3. Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
If you must stop when facing uphill, someone guide you when backing up.
use the foot brake or parking brake. Grip the bottom of the steering
Do not try to hold the vehicle in wheel; turn the wheel to the left to
place by pressing on the accelerator, get the trailer to move to the left,
as this can cause the automatic and turn the wheel right to move the
transmission to overheat. trailer to the right.
When driving down hills, reduce Parking

your speed, and shift down to second Follow all normal precautions when
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and parking, including firmly setting the
remember, it will take longer to slow parking brake and putting the
down and stop when towing a trailer. transmission in Park. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
384
０７／０５／１７０９：４６：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３９０
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 386

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ..................... 387
maintained and how to follow basic Fluid Locations............................... 397
maintenance safety precautions. Engine Compartment Covers....... 398
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 399
This section also includes Changing the Engine Oil and
instructions on how to read the Filter ............................................ 400
maintenance minder messages on Engine Coolant ............................... 402
the multi-information display, and Windshield Washers ..................... 404
instructions for simple maintenance Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 404
tasks you may want to take care of Brake Fluid ..................................... 406
yourself. Power Steering Fluid ..................... 406
Timing Belt ..................................... 407
If you have the skills and tools to Lights .............................................. 408
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 415
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 415
to purchase the service manual. See Floor Mats ...................................... 416
page 481 for information on how to Wiper Blades .................................. 417
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Wheels ............................................ 419
Tires ................................................ 419
Checking the Battery .................... 427
Vehicle Storage .............................. 429
385
０７／０５／１７０９：４７：００３１ＳＪＡ６３００３９１
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
mechanic. vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions and
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection precautions can cause you to
and skills required. and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owner’s Always follow the procedures
is set, and the engine is off. manual. and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not gasoline. Carbon Monoxide poison from Some of the most important safety
engine exhaust. Be sure there is precautions are given here. However,
To reduce the possibility of fire or adequate ventilation whenever you we cannot warn you of every
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, operate the engine. conceivable hazard that can arise in
and flames away from the battery performing maintenance. Only you
and all fuel-related parts. Burns from hot parts. Let the can decide whether or not you
engine and exhaust system cool should perform a given task.
Wear eye protection and down before touching any parts.
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
386
０７／０５／１７０９：４７：１３３１ＳＪＡ６３００３９２
Maintenance Minder
One of the most convenient and Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is
important features of the multi- displayed according to the table
information display on your vehicle shown below.
is the maintenance minder.
Calculated Engine Displayed
Based on engine operating Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life
conditions and accumulated engine (%)
revolutions, the onboard computer in 100% − 91% 100%
your vehicle calculates the remaining 90% − 81% 90%
engine oil life. 80% − 71% 80%
70% − 61% 70%
The system also displays the code 60% − 51% 60%
for other scheduled maintenance REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE 50% − 41% 50%
items needing service. 40% − 31% 40%
Maintenance
To see the remaining engine oil life 30% − 21% 30%
displayed on the lower right corner 20% − 16% 20%
on the multi-information display as a 15% − 11% 15%
percentage, turn the ignition switch 10% − 6% 10%
to the ON (II) position, and press the 5% − 1% 5%
SEL/RESET button on the steering 0% 0%
wheel repeatedly until the engine oil
life appears (see page 73 ).
CONTINUED
387
０７／０５／１７０９：４７：２１３１ＳＪＡ６３００３９３
Maintenance Minder
The message will be canceled if the

▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
to see the message again. MESSAGE
MAINTENANCE REMAINING
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE (S) ENGINE OIL LIFE
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEM (S)
When the remaining engine oil life is Press the SEL/RESET button on the
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information steering wheel repeatedly to select
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE the engine oil life. The message
SOON’’ message along with the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ along with the
maintenance schedule code percentage of oil life remaining and
indicating the main and sub items the maintenance item code(s),
required at the time of the oil change. appear on the lower part of the multi-
Refer to page 395 and 396 for a information display.
complete list of the maintenance
main items and sub items.
388
０７／０５／１７０９：４７：２８３１ＳＪＡ６３００３９４
Maintenance Minder

to see the message again.
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is Press the SEL/RESET button on the
1 to 5 percent, the multi-information steering wheel repeatedly to select
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE the engine oil life. The message
NOW’’ message with the ‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’, along with
maintenance items. When you see ‘‘5%’’, and the maintenance item
this message have the indicated code(s) are displayed on the lower
maintenance performed as soon as part of the multi-information display
possible. when the calculated engine oil life is
1 to 5 percent (see page 387 ).
CONTINUED
389
０７／０５／１７０９：４７：３９３１ＳＪＡ６３００３９５
Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes To cancel resetting the oil life,
indicate the main and sub items press the ▲ or ▼ button on the
required at the time of the oil change U.S. steering wheel to select CANCEL
(see page 395 ). on the display, and press the SEL/
RESET button.
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required If you do not complete the reset
maintenance service. You will see CANADA
procedure within 30 seconds after
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the selecting the reset mode, the mode
next time you turn the ignition will be canceled automatically.
switch to the ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by

someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as 3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
follows: button on the steering wheel for
more than 10 seconds. The
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON remaining engine oil life reset
(II) position. mode will be shown on the multi-
information display.
2. If the oil life minder is not
displayed, press the SEL/RESET To reset the engine oil life, press
button on the steering wheel the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering
repeatedly until it is. wheel to select RESET on the
display, and press the SEL/
RESET button.
390
０７／０５／１７０９：４７：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３９６
Maintenance Minder
Immediately have the service

performed, and make sure to reset
the oil life minder as previously
described.

to see the message again.
Maintenance
If the indicated maintenance service Press the SEL/RESET button on the
is not done and the remaining engine steering wheel repeatedly to select
oil life reaches 0 %, the multi- the engine oil life minder. The
information display will show the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’,
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ along with ‘‘0%’’, and the
and the maintenance item code(s). maintenance item code are displayed
This message is displayed when the on the lower part of the multi-
total mileage is less than 10 miles information display when the
(for U.S. models) or 10 km (for calculated engine oil life is 0 percent.
Canadian models) after the engine
oil life became 0 %.
CONTINUED
391
０７／０５／１７０９：４７：５８３１ＳＪＡ６３００３９７
Maintenance Minder
And also, the percentage ‘‘0’’ keeps This message is displayed when you
blinking on the display. drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE or 10 km (for Canadian models)
This particular message is displayed U.S. after seeing the 0 % message.
when the mileage after the engine oil
life became 0 % reaches 10 miles (for Immediately have the service
U.S. models)/10 km (for Canadian performed, and make sure to reset
models). the display as previously described.
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE (S)
CANADA
The maximum total mileage shown
with this message is ‘‘9999 mile’’ (for
U.S. models) or ‘‘9999 km’’ (for
Canadian models).
If the indicated required service is The message will be canceled if the

not done and the remaining engine ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
oil life becomes 0 %, the multi- is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
information display will show a to see the message again.
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total mileage after the remaining
oil life became 0 %, and the
maintenance item code(s).
392
０７／０５／１７０９：４８：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３００３９８
Maintenance Minder
This particular message is displayed Important Maintenance

when you drive over 10 miles (for Precautions
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian If you have the required service
U.S. models) after seeing 0 %. performed but do not reset the
display, or reset the display without
The maximum total negative mileage performing the service, the system
is ‘‘−9999 mile’’ (for U.S. models) or will not show the proper
CANADA ‘‘−9999 km’’ (for Canadian models). maintenance intervals. This can lead
to serious mechanical problems
because you will no longer have an
accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
Your authorized Acura dealer knows
Maintenance
When you press the SEL/RESET your vehicle best and can provide
button to select the engine oil life competent, efficient service.
minder, the message ‘‘SERVICE’’,
along with the maintenance item
code and the total negative mileage
after the oil life became 0 percent,
will be displayed on the lower part of
the multi-information display.
CONTINUED
393
０７／０５／１７０９：４８：１８３１ＳＪＡ６３００３９９
Maintenance Minder
Your authorized dealer knows your U.S. Vehicles: Engine oil level − Check every
vehicle best and can provide Maintenance, replacement, or time you fill the fuel tank. See
competent, efficient service. repair of emissions control page 333 .
However, service at a dealer is not devices and systems may be done
mandatory to keep your warranties by any automotive repair Engine coolant level − Check the
in effect. Maintenance may be done establishment or individual using radiator reserve tank every time
by any qualified service facility or parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA you fill the fuel tank. See page 333 .
person who is skilled in this type of standards.
automotive service. Keep all receipts Automatic transmission − Check
as proof of completion, and have the According to state and federal the fluid level monthly. See page
person who does the work fill out regulations, failure to perform 404 .
your Maintenance Journal or maintenance on the items marked
Canadian Maintenance Log. Check with ＃ will not void your emissions Brakes − Check the fluid level
your warranty booklet for more warranties. However, Acura monthly. See page 406 .
information. recommends that all maintenance
services be performed in accordance Tires − Check the tire pressure
We recommend the use of Acura with the intervals indicated by the monthly. Examine the tread for
parts and fluids whenever you have Multi-Information Display. wear and foreign objects. See page
maintenance done. These are 421 .
manufactured to the same high Owner’s Maintenance Checks
quality standards as the original You should check the following Lights − Check the operation of
components, so you can be confident items at the specified intervals. If the headlights, parking lights,
of their performance and durability. you are unsure of how to perform taillights, high-mount brake light,
any check, turn to the appropriate and license plate lights monthly.
page listed. See page 408 .
394
０７／０５／１７０９：４８：２８３１ＳＪＡ６３００４００
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items

A Replace engine oil＊1
B Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and line (including ABS)
Maintenance Minder
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system＃
Fuel lines and connections＃
＊1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 394 .
NOTE: Independent of the maintenance messages in the Multi-Information

Display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
CONTINUED
395
０７／０５／１７０９：４８：３４３１ＳＪＡ６３００４０１
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Sub Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

1 Rotate tires 6 Replace rear differential fluid
2 Replace air cleaner element Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
miles (24,000 km). mechanical (shear) stress to fluid This requires
Replace dust and pollen filter differential fluid changes more frequently than
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles
miles (24,000 km). (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Maintenance Minder
Inspect drive belt

3 Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher
transmission and transfer temperatures.
This requires transmission and transfer fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your
vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
and transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles
(100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
4 Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under
−20°F, −29°C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/
100,000 km (Canada)
Inspect valve clearance
5 Replace engine coolant
396
０７／０５／１７０９：４８：４０３１ＳＪＡ６３００４０２
Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID

(Orange loop) (Black cap)
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
AUTOMATIC
WASHER FLUID TRANSMISSION
(Black cap) FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
Maintenance
POWER STEERING
FLUID＊
(Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
＊: The power steering fluid reservoir is located under the right compartment cover.
397
０７／０５／１７０９：４８：４９３１ＳＪＡ６３００４０３
Engine Compartment Covers
The component parts in the engine

compartment are protected by RIGHT COMPARTMENT COVER LEFT COMPARTMENT COVER
several covers. You may need to
remove the covers when you
perform some simple maintenance
work.
All of the covers are secured by

holding clips.
To remove the front bulkhead cover,

remove the holding clips with a flat-
tip screwdriver.
To remove the left or right engine

compartment cover, remove the
holding clips by loosening the pins in
the center of the fastener.
To remove the battery cover, turn

the knob of the fastener (see page
428 ).
FRONT BULKHEAD COVER BATTERY COVER
398
０７／０５／１７０９：４９：０１３１ＳＪＡ６３００４０４
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Engine Oil

Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Ambient Temperature
Unscrew and remove the engine oil Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
Maintenance
fill cap on top of the valve cover. 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so highly recommended that you use
you do not spill any. Clean up any Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
spills immediately. Spilled oil could optimum engine protection. Make
damage components in the engine sure the API Certification Seal says
compartment. ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
API CERTIFICATION SEAL The oil viscosity or weight is
Install the engine oil fill cap, and provided on the container’s label.
tighten it securely. Wait a few 5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
minutes, and recheck the oil level. round protection of your vehicle to
Do not fill above the upper mark; you improve cold weather starting and
could damage the engine. fuel economy. CONTINUED
399
０７／０５／１７０９：４９：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３００４０５
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and OIL DRAIN BOLT
You may use a synthetic motor oil if Filter
it meets the same requirements Always change the oil and filter
given for a conventional motor oil, it according to the maintenance WASHER
displays the API certification seal, messages shown on the multi-
and it is the proper weight. You must information display. The oil and filter
follow the oil and filter change collect contaminants that can
intervals shown on the maintenance damage your engine if they are not
minder display. removed regularly.
Engine Oil Additives Changing the oil and filter requires

Your vehicle does not require any oil special tools and access from
additives. Additives may adversely underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
affect the engine or transmission should be raised on a service station- 2. Open the hood, and remove the
performance and durability. type hydraulic lift for this service. engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
Unless you have the knowledge and drain bolt and washer from the
proper equipment, you should have bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
this maintenance done by a skilled into an appropriate container.
mechanic.
1. Run the engine until it reaches

normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
400
０７／０５／１７０９：４９：２４３１ＳＪＡ６３００４０６
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,

then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to: Improper disposal of engine oil can be
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m) harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
6. Refill the engine with the the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
recommended oil. container, and take it to a recycling
Engine oil change capacity center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
(including filter): or dump it on the ground.
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.

Start the engine. The oil pressure
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the indicator should go out within 5
Maintenance
remaining oil drain. A special seconds. If it does not, turn off the
wrench (available from your engine, and check your work.
dealer) is required.
8. Let the engine run for several
Make sure the oil filter gasket is minutes, then check the drain bolt
not stuck to the engine block. If it and oil filter for leaks.
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter. 9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
4. Install a new oil filter according to the oil level on the dipstick. If
the instructions that come with it. necessary, add more oil.
401
０７／０５／１７０９：４９：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４０７
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-life Anti- If the reserve tank is completely
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant empty, you should also check the
RESERVE TANK is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
Removing the radiator cap
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not while the engine is hot can
available, you may use another cause the coolant to spray out,
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a seriously scalding you.
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant Always let the engine and
recommended for aluminum engines. radiator cool down before
Continued use of any non-Honda removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant can result in corrosion,
tank is at or below the MIN line, add causing the cooling system to
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
402
０７／０５／１７０９：４９：４３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４０８
Engine Coolant
4. Put the radiator cap back on, and

tighten it fully.
RADIATOR CAP
5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or

other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
RESERVE TANK engine components.
Maintenance
1. When the radiator and engine are 3. The coolant level should be up to
cool, relieve any pressure in the the base of the filler neck. Add
cooling system by turning the coolant if it is low.
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down. Pour the coolant slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up any
2. Remove the radiator cap by spill immediately; it could damage
pushing down and turning components in the engine
counterclockwise. compartment.
403
０７／０５／１７０９：４９：５５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４０９
Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid
Windshield Washers Automatic Transmission Fluid DIPSTICK

Check the fluid level in the Check the fluid level with the engine
windshield washer reservoir at least at normal operating temperature.
monthly during normal use. 1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
If the washer fluid is low, a Start the engine, let it run until the
‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message radiator fan comes on, then shut
appears on the multi-information off the engine. For accurate
display. results, wait about 60 seconds (but
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality no longer than 90 seconds) before
windshield washer fluid. This doing step 2.
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
blades with windshield washer fluid from the transmission, and wipe it
on a clean cloth. This will help to with a clean cloth.
condition them.
NOTICE: Do not use engine antif reeze

or a vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
404
０７／０５／１７０９：５０：０８３１ＳＪＡ６３００４１０
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
so you do not spill any. Clean up into the transmission securely as
any spill immediately; it could shown in the illustration.
damage components in the engine
compartment. The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
Always use Honda ATF-Z1 service is shown by a maintenance
(automatic transmission fluid). message on the multi-information
UPPER MARK
display.
LOWER MARK
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 contact your dealer.
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into not mix with other transmission f luids.
Maintenance
the transmission as shown. Using transmission f luid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
4. Remove the dipstick and check deterioration in transmission operation
the fluid level. It should be and durability, and could result in
between the upper and lower damage to the transmission.
marks. Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
5. If the level is below the lower Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
mark, add fluid into the dipstick Honda new vehicle warranty.
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
405
０７／０５／１７０９：５０：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００４１１
Brake Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Brake Fluid Power Steering Fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly. UPPER LEVEL
Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,

independent of mileage.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty

Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary MAX MIN
replacement. LOWER LEVEL
The fluid level should be between
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can the MIN and MAX marks on the side After removing the right engine
cause corrosion and decrease the life of the reservoir. If the level is at or compartment cover (see page 398 ),
of the system. Have the brake below the MIN mark, your brake check the level on the side of the
system flushed and refilled with system needs attention. Have the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid brake system inspected for leaks or The fluid should be between the
DOT 3 as soon as possible. worn brake pads. UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not UPPER LEVEL mark.
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
406
０７／０５／１７０９：５０：２９３１ＳＪＡ６３００４１２
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so Timing Belt

you do not spill any. Clean up any The timing belt should be replaced
spill immediately; it could damage Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t at the intervals shown on the
components in the engine or right lock and holding it there can maintenance minder. Replace the
compartment. damage the power steering pump. belt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) if
you regularly drive your vehicle in
Always use Honda Power Steering one or more of these conditions:
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency In very high temperatures
replacement, but have the power (over 110°F, 43°C).
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible. In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
A low power steering fluid level can
Maintenance
indicate a leak in the system. Check If you frequently tow a trailer.
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
407
０７／０５／１７０９：５０：３８３１ＳＪＡ６３００４１３
Lights
Headlight Aiming The low beam headlight bulbs are a Replacing a Headlight/Daytime
Your vehicle is equipped with an type of high voltage discharge tube. Running Light Bulb
automatic headlight adjusting High voltage can remain in the Your vehicle has halogen high beam
system that adjusts the vertical angle circuit even with the light switch off headlight bulbs which are also used
of the headlights automatically. and the key removed. Because of for the daytime running light.
Refer to page 144 for more this, you should not attempt to Handle it by its base and protect the
information. examine or change a low beam glass from contact with your skin or
headlight bulb yourself. If a low hard objects. If you touch the glass,
The headlights were properly aimed beam headlight bulb fails, take the clean it with denatured alcohol and a
when your vehicle was new. If you vehicle to your dealer to have it clean cloth.
regularly carry heavy items in the replaced.
trunk or pull a trailer (if applicable),
readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be done by your Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
dealer or other qualified technician. perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
408
０７／０５／１７０９：５０：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３００４１４
Lights
1. Remove the left or right side NUTS BULB

engine compartment cover from
the side you are working on by
carefully pulling the cover out (see
page 398 ).
BATTERY HOLD-DOWN CONNECTOR
If you are replacing the bulb on 2. Remove the electrical connector
Maintenance
the driver’s side, remove the from the bulb by pushing on the
battery cover (see page 428 ), then tab and pulling the connector
remove the battery hold-down by down.
removing the two nuts with a 10
mm wrench. Then carefully slide 3. Remove the bulb by turning it one-
the battery toward the engine to quarter turn counterclockwise.
access the bulb.
CONTINUED
409
０７／０５／１７０９：５１：００３１ＳＪＡ６３００４１５
Lights
4. Insert the new bulb into the hole, Replacing a Front Turn Signal/ BULB SOCKET
and turn it one-quarter turn Front Parking Light Bulb
clockwise to lock it in place. 1. Remove the left or right side
engine compartment cover from
5. Push the electrical connector back the side you are working on by
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on carefully pulling the cover out (see
all the way. page 398 ).
6. Turn on the headlights to test the If you are replacing a driver’s side
new bulb. bulb, slide the battery toward the
engine to get more clearance (see
7. (Driver’s side) page 428 ).
Reinstall the battery in the reverse
order of removal, and reinstall the 2. Remove the socket from the
cover on the battery. headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
8. Reinstall the engine compartment
side cover. 3. Push the bulb in slightly, and turn
it counterclockwise.
410
０７／０５／１７０９：５１：１２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４１６
Lights
BULB SOCKET 4. Install the new bulb into the Replacing a Front Position/Side
socket. Marker Light Bulb
1. Remove the left or right side
5. Insert the socket back into the engine compartment cover (see
headlight assembly. Turn it page 398 ).
clockwise to lock it in place.
If you are replacing a driver’s side
6. Turn on the lights to make sure bulb, slide the battery toward the
the new bulb is working. engine to get more clearance (see
page 428 ).
7. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the battery and the 2. (Passenger’s side)
battery cover. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
On model without adaptive front remove the holding clip from the
Maintenance
lighting system 8. Reinstall the engine compartment windshield washer reservoir.
Pull the bulb straight out of its side cover.
socket.
CONTINUED
411
０７／０５／１７０９：５１：２５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４１７
Lights
SOCKET 5. Install the new bulb into the Replacing a Fog Light Bulb
socket. Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
6. Insert the socket back into the it by its plastic case, and protect the
headlight assembly. Turn it glass from contact with your skin or
BULB clockwise to lock it in place. hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
7. Turn on the lights to make sure clean cloth.
the new bulb is working.
8. (Driver’s side)
HOLDING CLIP Reinstall the battery and the Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
battery cover. perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
3. Remove the socket from the can cause the bulb to overheat and
headlight assembly by turning it (Passenger’s side) shatter.
one-quarter turn counterclockwise. Reinstall the windshield washer
reservoir.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. 9. Reinstall the engine compartment
side cover.
412
０７／０５／１７０９：５１：３７３１ＳＪＡ６３００４１８
Lights
BOLTS 5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,

and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Push the electrical connector back

onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
7. Turn on the fog lights to test the

BULB new bulb.
CLIP
CONNECTOR 8. Reinstall the two undercover bolts
on the side under cover and
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to 3. Remove the electrical connector tighten them securely. Put the
Maintenance
remove the two undercover bolts, from the bulb by pushing on the holding clip back on the side
and remove the holding clip with a tab and pulling the connector under cover and push on the
flat-tipped screwdriver. down. center until it locks (the center is
flush with the head).
2. Carefully push up the side under 4. Remove the bulb by turning it one-
cover into the bumper. quarter turn counterclockwise.
413
０７／０５／１７０９：５１：５０３１ＳＪＡ６３００４１９
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs

BOLTS SOCKETS
MOUNTING NUT
MAINTENANCE LID BULBS
TAIL LIGHT TRIM
1. Open the trunk lid, and remove 3. Carefully pry in the top or bottom 6. Determine which of the two bulbs
the left or right maintenance lid. edge of the trim with a small flat- is burned out: turn signal or back-
tipped screwdriver, and pull the up light.
2. Remove the mounting nut with an trim straight back.
8 mm wrench. 7. Remove the socket by turning it
4. Remove the two mounting bolts one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
with an 8 mm wrench.
8. Remove the burned out bulb by
5. Pull the taillight assembly straight pulling it straight out of its socket.
back out of the body.
414
０７／０５／１７０９：５２：０３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４２０
Lights, Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts
9. Install the new bulb in the socket Dust and Pollen Filter Cleaning the Seat Belts
by pushing it straight in the socket This filter removes the dust and
until it bottoms. pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the climate control LOOP
10.Reinstall the socket into the light system.
assembly. Turn it clockwise to
lock it in place. Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
11.Test the lights to make sure the maintenance message on the multi-
new bulb is working. information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
12.When reinstalling the taillight km) if you drive primarily in urban
assembly, align and pop the snap areas that have high concentrations
fasteners in place. Tighten the two of soot in the air, or if the flow from
Maintenance
mounting bolts and reinstall the the climate control system becomes If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
trim in place. less than usual. brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
13.Tighten the mounting nut securely, not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
and reinstall the maintenance lid. solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
415
０７／０５／１７０９：５２：１３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４２１
Floor Mats
DRIVER’S SIDE FLOOR MAT FRONT PASSENGER’S REAR PASSENGER’S FLOOR MAT
SIDE FLOOR MAT
Front HOOK
Front
Front
HOOK HOOK
The floor mats that came with your If you use a non-Acura floor mat, Make sure the rear floor mats are
vehicle hook over the floor mat make sure it fits properly and that it properly hooked to the floor mat
anchors. This keeps the floor mats can be used with the floor mat anchors. Your vehicle is equipped
from sliding forward, possibly anchors. Do not put additional floor with front passenger’s seat weight
interfering with the pedals, or mats on top of the anchored mats. sensors. If the rear passenger’s floor
backwards, making the front mat is on the seat rail of the front
passenger’s weight sensors passenger’s seat, the sensors will
ineffective. detect the decreased weight on the
If you remove a floor mat, make sure seat, and they may not work properly.
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
416
０７／０５／１７０９：５２：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４２２
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper HOLDING LOCATIONS COVER

blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
WIPER ARMS BLADE SCREWS
1. Adjust the windshield wiper arms 2. Push the end of the cover on the
Maintenance
to the winter position by holding blade assembly until the other end
both wiper arms as shown in the is pivoted out, and remove the
illustration at the same time (see cover.
page 139 ). Raise the wiper arms
off the windshield. 3. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by removing
the two screws from the arm.
Do not open the hood when the wiper

arms are raised, or you will damage
the hood and the wiper arms.
CONTINUED
417
０７／０５／１７０９：５２：３１３１ＳＪＡ６３００４２３
Wiper Blades
BLADE BLADE 6. Slide the new wiper blade into the

holder until the tabs lock.
7. Reinstall the blade assembly to the

wiper arm and tighten the two
screws securely. Reinstall the
cover by pushing it in.
8. Set the wiper arms back on the

windshield. Adjust the windshield
wipers to their previously parked
REINFORCEMENT position.
4. Remove the blade from its holder 5. Examine the new wiper blades. If
by grabbing the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
418
０７／０５／１７０９：５２：４５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４２４
Wheels, Tires
Wheels Tires Inflation Guidelines

Clean the wheels as you would the To safely operate your vehicle, your Keeping the tires properly inflated
rest of the exterior. Wash them with tires must be the proper type and provides the best combination of
the same solution, and rinse them size, in good condition with adequate handling, tread life, and riding
thoroughly. tread, and correctly inflated. comfort.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a The following pages give more Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
protective clear-coat that keeps the detailed information on how to take adversely affect handling and fuel
aluminum from corroding and care of your tires and what to do economy, and are more likely to
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with when they need to be replaced. fail from being overheated.
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff Overinflated tires can make your
brush can damage the clear-coat. To vehicle ride more harshly, are
clean the wheels, use a mild Using tires that are excessively more prone to damage from road
Maintenance
detergent and a soft brush or sponge. worn or improperly inflated can hazards, and wear unevenly.
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed. The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) will warn you when a tire
Follow all instructions in this pressure is low. See page 371 for
owner’s manual regarding tire information on the TPMS.
inflation and maintenance.
CONTINUED
419
０７／０５／１７０９：５２：５３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４２５
Tires
Even though your vehicle is If you check the pressure when the While tubeless tires have some
equipped with TPMS, we tires are hot [driven for several miles ability to self-seal if they are
recommend that you visually check (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 punctured, you should look closely
your tires every day. If you think a to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to for punctures if a tire starts losing
tire might be low, check it 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold pressure.
immediately with a tire gauge. reading. This is normal; do not
release air to match the cold
Use a gauge to measure the air pressure. The tires will be
pressure in each tire at least once a underinflated.
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose one to two psi (10 You should get your own tire
to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per pressure gauge and use it whenever
month. Remember to check the you check your tire pressures. This
spare tire at the same time. will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
Check the pressure in the tires when and not due to a variation between
they are cold. This means the vehicle gauges.
has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km).
Add or release air, if needed, to

match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page 421 .
420
０７／０５／１７０９：５３：０９３１ＳＪＡ６３００４２６
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures On models with the Michelin PAX Tire Inspection
The following charts show the system Every time you check inflation, you
recommended cold tire pressures for Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for should also examine the tires for
most normal and high-speed driving Normal Driving damage, foreign objects, and wear.
conditions. Front: 32 psi (220 kPa ,
245-680R460A 2.2 kgf/cm ) You should look for:
Tire Size/Type Cold Tire Pressure 102V Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa ,
P245/50R17 98V Front 2.1 kgf/cm ) Bumps or bulges in the tread or
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) side of the tire. Replace the tire if
Rear For convenience, the recommended you find either of these conditions.
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
Compact Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
T155/70D17 of the tire. Replace the tire if you
110M For additional technical information can see fabric or cord.
Maintenance
about your tires, see page 466 .
Excessive tread wear.
CONTINUED
421
０７／０５／１７０９：５３：１８３１ＳＪＡ６３００４２７
Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Service Life The last four digits of the TIN (tire
The service life of your tires is identification number) are found on
dependent on many factors, the sidewall of the tire and indicate
including, but not limited to, driving the date of manufacture (See Tire
habits, road conditions, vehicle Labeling on page 468 ).
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
Your tires have wear indicators you have annual inspections
molded into the tread. When the performed once the tires reach five
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 years old. It is also recommended
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the that all tires, including the spare, be
tread. This shows there is less than removed from service after 10 years
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on from the date of manufacture,
the tire. regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
422
０７／０５／１７０９：５３：３２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４２８
Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

In addition to proper inflation, Replace your tires with radial tires of
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front the same size, load range, speed
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire rating, and maximum cold tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer pressure rating (as shown on the
check the wheel alignment. tire’s sidewall).
Have your dealer check the tires if Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
you feel a consistent vibration while your vehicle can reduce braking
driving. A tire should always be ability, traction, and steering
rebalanced if it is removed from the accuracy. Using tires of a different
wheel. When you have new tires (For Non-directional (For Directional size or construction can cause the
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) ABS and vehicle stability assist
balanced. This increases riding system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
Maintenance
comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and
have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate Vehicles without the Michelin PAX
balance. the tires according to the System
maintenance messages displayed on Your vehicle is not designed for
the multi-information display. Move Michelin PAX system wheels or tires.
the tires to the positions shown in Use only the wheels and tires
Improper wheel weights can damage the illustration each time they are designated in this owner’s manual.
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use rotated. If you purchase directional Never mix conventional wheels or
only Acura wheel weights f or balancing. tires, rotate only front-to-back. tires with PAX system wheels or
tires.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
423
０７／０５／１７０９：５３：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３００４２９
Tires
It is best to replace all four tires at Wheels and Tires Winter Driving
the same time. If that is not possible Wheels: Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All
or necessary, replace the two front 17 x 8.0J AL (TPMS) Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
tires or two rear tires as a pair. weather tread design suitable for
Replacing just one tire can seriously On models with the Michelin PAX most winter driving conditions.
affect your vehicle’s handling. system
235 − 460A (TPMS) For the best performance in snowy
If you ever need to replace a wheel, or icy conditions, you should install
make sure the wheel’s specifications Tires: snow tires or tire chains. They may
match those of the original wheel P245/50R17 98V be required by local laws under
that came on your vehicle. certain conditions.
Replacement wheels are available at On models with the Michelin PAX
your Acura dealer. system Snow Tires
245-680R460A 102V If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
See page 466 for DOT tire quality tires of the same size and load range
Installing improper tires on your grading information, and page as the original tires. Mount snow
vehicle can affect handling and 468 for tire size explanation. tires on all four wheels. The traction
stability. This can cause a crash provided by snow tires on dry roads
in which you can be seriously may be lower than your original tires.
hurt or killed. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this There are no snow tires compatible
owner’s manual. with the PAX system.
424
０７／０５／１７０９：５３：５６３１ＳＪＡ６３００４３０
Tires
Tire Chains When installing cables, follow the

Mount tire chains on your tires when manufacturer’s instructions, and
required by driving conditions or mount them as tight as you can. Using the wrong chains, or not
local laws. Install them only on the Make sure they are not contacting properly installing chains, can
front tires. the brake lines or suspension. Drive damage the brake lines and
slowly with them installed. If you cause a crash in which you can
Because your vehicle has limited tire hear them coming into contact with be seriously injured or killed.
clearance, Acura strongly the body or chassis, stop and
recommends using the chain listed investigate. Remove them as soon as Follow all instructions in this
below, made by Security Chain you begin driving on cleared roads. owner’s manual regarding the
Company (SCC). selection and use of tire chains.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain

CH2612T
Maintenance
Tire chains cannot be used with a Traction devices that are the wrong
flat front tire. If a front tire goes flat size or improperly installed can
when a tire chain is installed on it, damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
remove the chain, and follow the suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
precautions described under driving if they are hitting any part of
Michelin PAX System (see page the vehicle.
426 ).
425
０７／０５／１７０９：５４：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３００４３１
Tires
Michelin PAX SystemTM There are no snow tires compatible Important Precautions
If equipped with the PAX system, and not all tire Never use a tire repair agent in a
Your vehicle is equipped with the chains are suitable for use on the PAX system tire, and never repair
Michelin PAX system which, PAX system tires. a PAX system tire by yourself.
together with the tire pressure Repair or replacement must be
monitoring system (TPMS), enables If you mount snow chains on your done by an Acura dealer or an
you to continue driving even if one or tires, use the chains recommended authorized Michelin PAX system
more of your tires loses its pressure. by Acura (see page 425 ). dealer.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle Do not replace the PAX system tires If you must continue driving with a
are specially designed for the PAX and wheels with conventional tires flat tire, follow all the procedures
system, and the PAX system is and wheels. Doing so would disable and precautions described on page
specifically designed and fine-tuned the PAX system and the tire 432.
for your vehicle. pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
and may void your new vehicle
Because of these reasons, use only warranty.
the wheels and tires designated in
this owner’s manual. Never mix PAX
system wheels or tires with
conventional wheels or tires.
426
０７／０５／１７０９：５４：１７３１ＳＪＡ６３００４３２
Checking the Battery
Check the terminals for corrosion (a If you need to connect the battery to
white or yellowish powder). To a charger, disconnect both cables to
remove it, cover the terminals with a prevent damaging your vehicle’s
solution of baking soda and water. It electrical system. Always disconnect
will bubble up and turn brown. When the negative (−) cable first, and
this stops, wash it off with plain reconnect it last.
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion. The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW If additional battery maintenance is operation.
needed, see your dealer or a
Check the condition of the battery qualified technician. A spark or flame can cause the
Maintenance
monthly by looking at the test battery to explode with enough
indicator window. The label on the WARNING: Battery posts, force to kill or seriously hurt you.
battery explains the test indicator’s terminals, and related accessories
colors. contain lead and lead compounds. Wear protective clothing and a
To see the label, remove the battery Wash your hands after handling. face shield, or have a skilled
cover (see page 428 ). technician do the battery
maintenance.
CONTINUED
427
０７／０５／１７０９：５４：２８３１ＳＪＡ６３００４３３
Checking the Battery
If your vehicle’s battery is If your vehicle’s battery is Removing the Battery Cover
disconnected or goes dead, all stored disconnected or goes dead, the audio
driving positions will be lost. To system may disable itself. The next UNLOCK
LOCK
store the driving positions again, see time you turn on the radio you will
the storing procedure on page 160 . see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset buttons to
On vehicles with navigation system enter the code (see page 241 ).
The navigation system will also
disable itself. The next time you turn If your vehicle’s battery is
on the ignition switch, the system disconnected or goes dead, the
will require you to enter a PIN power tilt and telescopic steering
before it can be used. Refer to the wheel system will be disabled. The
KNOB
navigation system manual. system needs to be reset after TAB
reconnecting the battery (see page
On vehicles without navigation system 148 ). 1. Turn the knob of the battery cover
The compass System will also to UNLOCK as shown in the
disable itself. The next time you turn illustration.
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Enter the four-
digit anti-theft security code (see
page 259 ). You will also need reset
the clock according to the
instruction of setting the clock (see
page 274 ).
428
０７／０５／１７０９：５４：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４３４
Vehicle Storage
2. Push the tabs and remove the If you need to park your vehicle for Block the rear wheels.
cover by pulling it up carefully. an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a
3. To reinstall the cover, put the tabs should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be
of the cover back to the original Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the
position properly. deterioration and makes it easier to tires are off the ground.
get your vehicle back on the road. If
4. Turn the knob of the cover to possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if
LOCK position as shown in the the vehicle is being stored
illustration. Fill the fuel tank. indoors).
Wash and dry the exterior Disconnect the battery.

completely.
Support the front wiper blade
Maintenance
Clean the interior. Make sure the arms with a folded towel or rag so
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are they do not touch the windshield.
completely dry.
To minimize sticking, apply a
Leave the parking brake off. Put silicone spray lubricant to all door
the transmission in Park. and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
CONTINUED
429
０７／０５／１７０９：５４：４７３１ＳＪＡ６３００４３５
Vehicle Storage
Cover the vehicle with a

‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the

engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
430
０７／０５／１７０９：５４：５２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４３６
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Driving with a Flat Tire ................ 432
common problems that motorists Compact Spare Tire....................... 435
experience with their vehicles. It Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 436
gives you information about how to If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 440
safely evaluate the problem and what Jump Starting ................................. 441
to do to correct it. If the problem has If the Engine Overheats ............... 444
stranded you on the side of the road, Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 447
you may be able to get going again. Charging System Indicator........... 447
If not, you will also find instructions Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 448
on getting your vehicle towed. Brake System Indicator ................ 449
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ..................................... 450
Fuses ............................................... 451
Fuse Locations ............................... 456
Emergency Towing ....................... 459
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 459

431
０７／０５／１７０９：５４：５９３１ＳＪＡ６３００４３７
Driving With a Flat Tire
Michelin PAX SystemTM

If equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Michelin PAX system. Since each
Michelin PAX system tire has an
inner support ring that allows it to
continue running without air, it may
be difficult to immediately judge
from its appearance if a tire is
punctured. Your vehicle is also
equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS), and this
system may be your first detection of
a flat tire. The TPMS monitors the air pressure page 421 ), it was probably a natural
of all four tires whenever the ignition loss of the air pressure and you can
switch is in the ON (II) position. It continue driving as before.
will immediately sense if a tire starts
to lose its pressure, and give you If the indicator and the message
warning with the low tire pressure/ come on again, you probably have a
TPMS indicator in the instrument flat tire. In this case, you will see a
panel and a ‘‘CHECK TIRE ‘‘PAX SYSTEM WARNING’’
PRESSURE’’ message on the multi- message on the multi-information
information display. If the indicator display.
and the warning message do not
come on again after you inflate the
tire to its correct air pressure (see
432
０７／０５／１７０９：５５：０９３１ＳＪＡ６３００４３８
With the PAX system tires, you can

drive up to about 125 miles (200 km)
even if one or more of your tires are
punctured. This allows you to drive
to the nearest Acura dealer or
authorized Michelin PAX system
dealer to have the tire(s) repaired.
If you get a flat tire, never try to

repair it yourself, and never replace a
flat tire with a compact spare tire.
Follow the instructions shown on the

multi-information display, and drive The above message shows that you If the display changes to the above
very carefully. are driving your vehicle on a flat tire, message, it means that ‘‘RUN FLAT
and should observe the ‘‘RUN FLAT DRIVING’’ is nearing the limit, and

DRIVING’’ speed limit of 50 mph you have to stop driving soon. Take
(80 km/h). Drive to your nearest your vehicle to the nearest Acura
Acura dealer or authorized Michelin dealer or authorized Michelin PAX
PAX system dealer, or call the PAX system dealer as soon as possible.
help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE
(1-877-729-8473).
CONTINUED
433
０７／０５／１７０９：５５：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００４３９
vehicle behind another vehicle with a Stop driving immediately when

rope or chain. Flat-bed equipment is you see a ‘‘RUN FLAT LIMIT
the only way to transport your STOP DRIVING’’ message on the
vehicle. multi-information display.
Continuous driving after this
Important Safety Precautions message will make it impossible to
Although your vehicle is capable of repair the tire.
run flat driving, you should always
observe the following: If you cannot find an Acura dealer or
an authorized Michelin PAX system
Do not drive faster than 50 mph dealer where you are driving, call the
(80 km/h). PAX help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE
(1-877-729-8473).
If you see the above message on the Drive carefully. Your vehicle may
multi-information display, you have handle differently from when the
reached the limit of run flat driving, tires are properly inflated,
and you should stop driving especially when cornering.
immediately. Be aware that if you
continue to drive, the noise and In its run flat mode, a PAX system
vibration level from the tire will tire is somewhat noisier than when
increase significantly, and the tire it is fully inflated, this is normal.
may no longer be repairable.
Call a professional towing service

who can transport your vehicle on
flat-bed equipment. Never tow your
434
０７／０５／１７０９：５５：３０３１ＳＪＡ６３００４４０
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Follow these precautions: INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced, Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can. This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
Check the inflation pressure of the surfaces. Use greater caution
compact spare tire every time you while driving.
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to: Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is Replace the tire when you can see
the same make and model. the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size

After the flat tire is replaced with and design tire, mounted on the
the spare tire, the low tire same wheel. The spare tire is not
pressure/TPMS indicator stays on. designed to be mounted on a regular
After several miles (kilometers) wheel, and the spare wheel is not
driving with the spare, this designed for mounting a regular tire.
indicator begins to flash, then
stays on again. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
display (see page 375 ).
435
０７／０５／１７０９：５５：４０３１ＳＪＡ６３００４４１
Changing a Flat Tire
Models without Michelin PAX System SPARE TIRE

TRUNK FLOOR
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it. The vehicle can easily roll off
Drive slowly along the shoulder until the jack, seriously injuring
you get to an exit or an area to stop anyone underneath.
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
TOOL CASE JACK
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 3. Open the trunk, and fold the trunk
non-slippery ground. Put the floor forward.
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake. 4. Take the tool case out of the spare
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch tire.
it.
5. Unscrew the wing bolt, and
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, remove the spacer cone. Then
and turn the ignition switch to the take the spare tire out of its well.
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
436
０７／０５／１７０９：５５：５２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４４２
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION
6. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn 7. Place the jack under the jacking 8. Use the extension and the wheel
with the wheel nut wrench. point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the
change. It is pointed to by a △ vehicle until the flat tire is off the

mark molded into the underside of ground.
the body. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack 9. Remove the wheel nuts, then
contacts the jacking point. Make remove the flat tire. Temporarily
sure the jacking point tab is place the flat tire on the ground
resting in the jack notch. with the outside surface of the
wheel facing up. You could scratch
the wheel if you put it face down.
CONTINUED
437
０７／０５／１７０９：５６：００３１ＳＪＡ６３００４４３
BRAKE HUB
10.Before mounting the spare tire, 11.Put on the spare tire. Put the 12.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
wipe any dirt off the mounting wheel nuts back on finger-tight, and remove the jack.
surface of the wheel and hub with then tighten them in a crisscross
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub pattern with the wheel nut wrench
carefully; it may be hot from until the wheel is firmly against
driving. the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
438
０７／０５／１７０９：５６：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３００４４４
SPACER CONE 16. Store the jack and tools in the tool
case. Place the tool case in the flat
tire.
Loose items can fly around the

interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools

WING BOLT securely before driving.
13.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 14.Place the flat tire face down in the
the same crisscross pattern. Have spare tire well. 17.Lower the trunk floor, then close
the wheel nut torque checked at the trunk lid.

the nearest automotive service 15.Wrap the spacer cone and spare
facility. tire wing bolt with cloth or paper, 18.Refer to Changing a Tire with
Tighten the wheel nuts to: and store them in the spare tire TPMS (see page 372 ).
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m) well.
439
０７／０５／１７０９：５６：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４４５
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t Nothing Happens or the Starter Turn the ignition switch to the
start falls into two areas, depending Motor Operates Very Slowly START (III) position. If the
on what you hear when you turn the When you turn the ignition switch to headlights do not dim, check the
ignition switch to the START (III) the START (III) position, you do not condition of the fuses. If the fuses
position: hear the normal noise of the engine are OK, there is probably
You hear nothing, or almost trying to start. You may hear a something wrong with the
nothing. The engine’s starter clicking sound, a series of clicks, or electrical circuit for the ignition
motor does not operate at all, or nothing at all. switch or starter motor. You will
operates very slowly. Check these things: need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
You can hear the starter motor Make sure the remote is with you, Emergency Towing on page 459 .
operating normally, or the starter inside the vehicle.
motor sounds like it is spinning If the headlights dim noticeably or
faster than normal, but the engine Check the transmission interlock. go out when you try to start the
does not start up and run. The transmission must be in Park engine, either the battery is
or neutral or the starter will not discharged or the connections are
operate. corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
Turn the ignition switch to the ON (see page 427 ). You can then try
(II) position. Turn on the jump starting the vehicle from a
headlights, and check their booster battery (see page 441 ).
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 441 .
440
０７／０５／１７０９：５６：３４３１ＳＪＡ６３００４４６
If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
The Starter Operates Normally There may be an electrical Jump Starting

In this case, the starter motor’s problem, such as no power to the Although this seems like a simple
speed sounds normal, or even faster fuel pump. Check all the fuses procedure, you should take several
than normal, when you turn the (see page 453 ). precautions.
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run. If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
Are you using the proper starting the problem. See Emergency A battery can explode if you do
procedure? Refer to Starting the Towing on page 459 . not follow the correct procedure,
Engine on page 347 . seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Are you using a properly coded
built-in key or remote? An Keep all sparks, open flames,
improperly coded built-in key or and smoking materials away
remote will cause the immobilizer from the battery.
system indicator in the instrument

panel to blink rapidly (see page
64 ). You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
441
０７／０５／１７０９：５６：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００４４７
Jump Starting
To Jump Start Your Vehicle: COVER

1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the

electrolyte inside can f reeze. BOOSTER BATTERY
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture. 3. Remove the battery cover (see The numbers in the illustration show
page 428 ), then remove the you the order to connect the jumper
2. Turn off all the electrical acces- secondary under-hood fuse box cables.
sories: heater, A/C, climate cover from the positive (＋) 4. Connect one jumper cable to the
control, stereo system, lights, etc. terminal on the battery. positive (＋) terminal on your
Put the transmission in Park, and vehicle’s battery. Connect the
set the parking brake. other end to the positive (＋)
terminal on the booster battery.
442
０７／０５／１７０９：５６：５５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４４８
Jump Starting
7. Start your vehicle. If the starter

motor still operates slowly, check
Connecting the jumper cable to the that the jumper cables have good
secondary under-hood f use box causes metal-to-metal contact.
the f uses blown.
8. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
9. Reinstall the secondary under-

5. Connect the second jumper cable hood fuse box cover over the
to the negative (−) terminal on positive (＋) terminal of the
the booster battery. Connect the battery, then reinstall the battery

other end to the grounding point cover.
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of Keep the ends of the jumper cables
the engine. away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
6. If the booster battery is in another disconnected. Otherwise, you may
vehicle, have an assistant start cause an electrical short.
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
443
０７／０５／１７０９：５７：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３００４４９
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running and
the midrange. If it climbs to the red Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
mark, you should determine the overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it
Do not open the hood if steam does, wait until the temperature
If your vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. gauge comes down to the midpoint,
take immediate action. The only then continue driving.
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
mark. Or you may see steam or Put the transmission in Park, and the red mark, turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the hood. set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
hazard warning lights. such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
Driving with the temperature gauge 2. If you see steam and/or spray so use caution. If you find a leak, it
pointer at the red mark can cause coming from under the hood, must be repaired before you
serious damage to the engine. turn off the engine. Wait until continue driving (see Emergency
you see no more signs of steam Towing on page 459 ).
or spray, then open the hood.
444
０７／０５／１７０９：５７：１４３１ＳＪＡ６３００４５０
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, 8. Using gloves or a large heavy 10.Put the radiator cap back on
check the coolant level in the cloth, turn the radiator cap tightly. Run the engine, and check
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant counterclockwise, without pushing the temperature gauge. If it goes
if the level is below the MIN mark. down, to the first stop. After the back to the red mark, the engine
pressure releases, push down on needs repair (see Emergency
7. If there was no coolant in the the cap, and turn it until it comes Towing on page 459 ).
reserve tank, you may need to add off.
coolant to the radiator. Let the 11.If the temperature stays normal,
engine cool down until the pointer 9. Start the engine, and set the check the coolant level in the
reaches the middle of the tempera- interior temperature to maximum radiator reserve tank. If it has
ture gauge, or lower, before check- (climate control to FULL AUTO at gone down, add coolant to the
ing the radiator. ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on
radiator up to the base of the filler tightly.
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
Removing the radiator cap you can add plain water.

while the engine is hot can Remember to have the cooling
cause the coolant to spray out, system drained and refilled with
seriously scalding you. the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
445
０７／０５／１７０９：５７：２１３１ＳＪＡ６３００４５１
Check Radiator System You can still drive your vehicle even
if this message appears on the multi-
information display, however you
should check the temperature gauge
while driving.
If you notice the temperature gauge

climbing to or above the red mark,
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Follow the instructions on pages
444 and 445 .
If there is a problem with the

radiator system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK RADIATOR SYSTEM’’ on
the multi-information display.
If you see this message, the engine

has probably overheated. You should
take your vehicle to a dealer, and
have it repaired as soon as possible.
446
０７／０５／１７０９：５７：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４５２
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road and shut Charging System Indicator
This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system
come on when the engine is warning lights. indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays when the engine is running, or if you
on, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING
OIL LEVEL’’ message on the multi- Open the hood, and check the oil SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, the oil pressure level (see page 333 ). An engine information display, the battery is
has dropped very low or lost very low on oil can lose pressure not being charged.
pressure. Serious engine damage is during cornering and other driving
possible, and you should take maneuvers. Immediately turn off all electrical
immediate action. accessories. Try not to use other
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the electrically operated controls such as
level back to the full mark on the the power windows. Keep the engine
dipstick (see page 399 ). running; starting the engine will
Running the engine with low oil discharge the battery rapidly.
pressure can cause serious mechanical 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil

damage almost immediately. Turn of f pressure indicator. If it does not go Go to a dealer or a service station
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get out within 10 seconds, turn off the where you can get technical
the vehicle stopped. engine. There is a mechanical assistance.
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
459 ).
447
０７／０５／１７０９：５７：４２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４５３
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, If the battery in your vehicle has
while driving, or if you see even though it may go off as you been disconnected or gone dead,
a ‘‘CHECK EMISSION continue driving, have the vehicle these codes may be erased. It can
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- checked by your dealer as soon as take several days of driving under
information display, it means one of possible. various conditions to set the codes
the engine’s emissions control again.
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in To check if they are set, turn the
your vehicle’s performance, it can If you keep driving with the ignition switch to the ON (II)
reduce your fuel economy and cause malf unction indicator lamp on, you can position, without starting the engine.
increased emissions. Continued damage your vehicle’s emissions The malfunction indicator lamp will
operation may cause serious damage. controls and engine. Those repairs may come on for 20 seconds. If it then
not be covered by your vehicle’s goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If you have recently refueled your warranties. If it blinks five times, the readiness
vehicle, the indicator coming on codes are not set. If possible, do not
could be due to a loose or missing Readiness Code take your vehicle for an emissions
fuel fill cap. You will also see a Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness test until the readiness codes are set.
‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message on codes’’ that are part of the on-board Refer to Emissions Testing for
the multi-information display. diagnostics for the emissions more information (see page 475 ).
Tighten the cap until it clicks at least systems. In some states, part of the
once (see page 331 ). Tightening the emissions testing is to make sure
cap will not turn the indicator off these codes are set. If they are not
immediately; it can take several days set, the test cannot be completed.
of normal driving.
448
０７／０５／１７０９：５７：５１３１ＳＪＡ６３００４５４
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada The brake system If the fluid level is low, take your Slow down by shifting to a lower
indicator normally vehicle to a dealer, and have the gear, and pull to the side of the road
comes on when brake system inspected for leaks or when it is safe. Because of the long
you turn the ignition switch to the worn brake pads. distance needed to stop, it is
ON (II) position and as a reminder to hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
check the parking brake. If you do However, if the brake pedal does not should have it towed and repaired as
not release the parking brake, the feel normal, you should take soon as possible (see Emergency
indicator will stay on, and you will immediate action. A problem in one Towing on page 459 ).
see a ‘‘RELEASE PARKING part of the system’s dual circuit
BRAKE’’ message on the multi- design will still give you braking at
information display. two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
If the brake system indicator comes the vehicle begins to slow down, and
on while driving, the brake fluid level you will have to press harder on the
is probably low. You will see a pedal.
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message on

the multi-information display. Press You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
lightly on the brake pedal to see if it SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
feels normal. If it does, check the information display.
brake fluid level the next time you
stop at a service station (see page
406 ).
CONTINUED
449
０７／０５／１７０９：５７：５９３１ＳＪＡ６３００４５５
Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
If you must drive the vehicle a short Opening the Fuel Fill Door
distance in this condition, drive Manually
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA

system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
LID RELEASE LEVER
If the fuel fill door release button To open the fuel fill door, pull the
does not work, use the release lever release lever rearward.
inside the left maintenance lid in the
trunk.
450
０７／０５／１７０９：５８：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３００４５６
Fuses
INTERIOR FUSE BOX INTERIOR FUSE BOX SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side Passenger’s side Driver’s side
NOTCH NOTCH FUSE BOX TAB
The fuses are located in five fuse To open the secondary fuse box lid,

boxes. The interior fuse boxes are push the tab in the direction as
located under the dashboard on the shown in the illustration.
driver’s and passenger’s side.
To remove the fuse box lid, put your

finger in the notch on the lid, pull it
toward you, and take it out of its
hinges.
CONTINUED
451
０７／０５／１７０９：５８：１５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４５７
Fuses
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

TAB
TAB
The primary under-hood fuse box is The secondary under-hood fuse box
in the engine compartment on the is on the battery. To open it, push
driver’s side. To open it, push the the tabs as shown.
tabs as shown.
To check the fuse box, remove the
battery cover first (see page 428 ).
452
０７／０５／１７０９：５８：２５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４５８
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE FUSE PULLER

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
456 , 457 , and 458 , or the diagram
on the fuse box lid, which fuse or
fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown BLOWN
fuses, and check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the the under-hood fuse box by under-hood fuse box and all the
headlights and all other looking through the top at the wire fuses in the interior fuse boxes by

accessories are off. inside. Removing these fuses pulling out each fuse with the fuse
requires a Phillips-head puller. The fuse puller is inside the
2. Remove the cover from the fuse screwdriver. primary under-hood fuse box.
box.
CONTINUED
453
０７／０５／１７０９：５８：３２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４５９
Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle 6. If the replacement fuse of the

BLOWN
without fixing the problem, and you same rating blows in a short time,
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse there is probably a serious
of the same rating or a lower rating electrical problem with your
from one of the other circuits with vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
the fuse puller provided in the under- that circuit, and have your vehicle
hood fuse box. Make sure you can checked by a qualified technician.
do without that circuit temporarily
(such as the accessory power socket
or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
5. Look for a blown wire inside the indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with fuse with one of the correct rating as
one of the spare fuses of the same soon as you can.
rating or lower.
Replacing a f use with one that has a

higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
454
０７／０５／１７０９：５８：４１３１ＳＪＡ６３００４６０
Fuses
If the fuse for the driving position page 274 ).

memory system is removed, all
stored driving positions will be lost. If the radio fuse is removed, the
To store the driving positions again, audio system will disable itself. The
see page 160 . next time you turn on the audio
system you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the
On vehicles with navigation system frequency display. Use the preset
If the navigation system fuse is buttons to enter the five-digit code
removed, the navigation system will (see page 241 ).
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system If the fuse for the power tilt
will require you to enter a PIN telescopic steering is removed, the
before it can be used. Refer to the system will be disabled. The system
navigation system manual. needs to be reset after reinstalling
the fuse (see page 148 ).
On vehicles without navigation system

If the compass system fuse is
removed, the compass system will
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Enter the four-
digit anti-theft security code (see
page 259 ). You will also need reset
the clock according to the
instruction of the clock setting (see
455
０７／０５／１７０９：５８：５３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４６１
Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 15 A Left headlight low beam 15 40 A Back-up, ACC

2 30 A Rear defroster coil 16 15 A Hazard
3 10 A Left headlight high beam 17 30 A ABS/VSA motor
4 15 A Small light 18 40 A ABS/VSA
5 10 A Right headlight high beam 19 40 A Drive by wire, LAF heater
6 15 A Right headlight low beam 20 (40 A) Option
7 7.5 A Back-up 21 40 A Heater motor
8 15 A FI ECU 22 70 A Passenger’s fuse box
9 30 A Wiper 120 A Battery
10 30 A Headlight washer＊ 23 50 A IG main
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX 11 20 A Fog lights 50 A Power window
12 7.5 A MG clutch
13 15 A Horn, Stop ＊: On Canadian models
14 40 A Rear defroster
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 50 A Radiator fan
456
０７／０５／１７０９：５９：０５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４６２
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Driver’s side No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 15 A Drive by Wire 17 20 A Passenger’s power seat sliding

2 15 A Ignition coil 18 15 A ACG
3 10 A Daytime running light 19 20 A Fuel Pump
4 15 A LAF heater 20 15 A IGN SOL
5 7.5 A Radio 21 10 A Meter
6 7.5 A Interior light 22 10 A SRS
7 10 A Back-up 23 7.5 A IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
8 20 A Door lock 24 20 A Left rear power window
9 20 A Accessory socket 25 20 A ETS (telescopic)
10 7.5 A Occupant position detection 26 20 A ETS (tilt)
SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX system 27 30 A Driver’s power window
Driver’s side 11 7.5 A Wiper 28 20 A Moonroof
12 7.5 A Tire pressure monitoring system 29 7.5 A Adaptive Front Lighting

13 20 A Passenger’s power seat reclining System
14 20 A Driver’s power seat sliding 30 7.5 A Air Conditioner
15 10 A Power lumbar support 31 7.5 A e-pretensioner
16 20 A Driver’s power seat reclining 32 10 A ACC
33 (7.5 A) Option
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 7.5 A Starter diag.

2 7.5 A Starter signal
457
０７／０５／１７０９：５９：１２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４６３
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s side No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 30 A SH-AWD 6 20 A Heated seats

2 30 A Premium amplifier 7 7.5 A Interior lights
3 30 A Passenger’s power window Passenger’s automatic seat
4 30 A Driver’s automatic seat belt 8 30 A belt tensioner/
tensioner/e-pretensioner e-pretensioner
5 20 A Right rear power window 9 7.5 A Air conditioner
458
０７／０５／１７０９：５９：２４３１ＳＪＡ６３００４６４
Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Emergency Towing If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck COVER

If your vehicle needs to be towed, If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
call a professional towing service or mud, or snow, call a towing service
organization. Never tow your vehicle to pull it out (see the previous
with just a rope or chain. It is very column).
dangerous.
For very short distances, such as Push
The only way you can safely tow freeing the vehicle, you can use the
your vehicle is with flat-bed detachable towing hook that mounts
equipment. The operator will load on the anchor in the front bumper.
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform To use the towing hook:
them a flat-bed is required. 1. Remove the cover from the front
bumper by pushing the right

corner edge of the cover with a
finger until the cover comes out as
Towing with only two tires on the shown in the illustration.
ground will damage parts of the
all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle
should be transported on a f lat-bed
truck or trailer.
CONTINUED
459
０７／０５／１７０９：５９：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４６５
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
COVER WHEEL NUT WRENCH
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use

the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
TETHER
The cover is attached to the bumper 2. Remove the towing hook and
with a tether. wheel nut wrench from the tool
case in the spare tire.
3. Screw the towing hook into the

hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
460
０７／０５／１７０９：５９：３８３１ＳＪＡ６３００４６６
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 462 Emissions Controls........................ 472
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 464 The Clean Air Act ...................... 472
your vehicle, and the location of DOT Tire Quality Grading Crankcase Emissions Control
identification numbers. It also (U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 466 System..................................... 472
includes information you should Treadwear .................................. 466 Evaporative Emissions Control
know about your vehicle’s tires and Traction....................................... 466 System..................................... 472
emissions control systems. Temperature .............................. 467 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Tire Labeling .................................. 468 Recovery ................................. 472
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 473
(TPMS) − Required Federal PGM-FI System ..................... 473
Explanation............................. 470 Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 473
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 473
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 473
Replacement Parts..................... 473
Three Way Catalytic
Converters .................................. 474
Emissions Testing ......................... 475
461
０７／０５／１７０９：５９：４３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４６７
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
U.S. vehicle is shown.
462
０７／０５／１７０９：５９：４８３１ＳＪＡ６３００４６８
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into ENGINE NUMBER

the engine block. It is on the front
left, below the valve cover.
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission.
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
463
０７／０５／１７１０：００：０９３１ＳＪＡ６３００４６９
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 193.6 in (4,917 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 72.7 in (1,847 mm) 19.4 US gal (73 )
Height 57.1 in (1,451 mm) Engine Change＊1 1.59 US gal (6.0 )
Wheelbase 110.2 in (2,800 mm) coolant Total 2.27 US gal (8.6 )
Track Front 62.0 in (1,576 mm) Engine oil Change＊2
Rear 62.4 in (1,585 mm) Including filter 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Without filter 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Weights Total 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Automatic Change 2.9 US qt (2.7 )
to the driver’s doorjamb. transmission Total 7.6 US qt (7.2 )
fluid
Seating Capacities Rear differential fluid
Total 5 SH-AWD Change 0.77 US qt (0.73 )
Front 2 differential Total 0.79 US qt (0.75 )
Rear 3 case
SH-AWD Change 2.8 US qt (2.7 )
Air Conditioning clutch case Total 3.3 US qt (3.1 )
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) Transfer Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 )
Charge quantity 15.8−17.60 oz (450−500 g) assembly Total 0.48 US qt (0.45 )
Lubricant type ND-OIL8 fluid
Windshield U.S. vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
washer Canadian 6.9 US qt (6.5 )
reservoir vehicles
＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.58 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
464
０７／０５／１７１０：００：３８３１ＳＪＡ６３００４７０
Specifications
Lights Engine
Headlights＊1 (High Beam) 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Type SOHC VTEC V-6 gasoline engine
Front turn signal/parking lights 12 V − 24/2.2 CP (Amber) Bore x Stroke 3.54 x 3.58 in (89 x 93 mm)
12 V − 21 W (Amber)＊2 Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
Front side marker 12 V − 3 CP (5W) Compression ratio 11.0 : 1
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W (Amber) Spark plugs NGK: IZFR6K11
Back-up light 12 V − 21 W DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
Fog lights 12 V − 55 W (H11)
License plate lights 12 V − 5W Alignment
Ceiling lights Front 12 V − 8W Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Rear 12 V − 8W Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
Vanity mirror lights 12 V − 2W Camber Front −0°8’
Door courtesy lights 12 V − 2 CP Rear −1°15’
Trunk light 12 V − 5W Caster Front 2°10’
＊1 : Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge Tires
tube (D2S). Size Front/Rear P245/50R17 98V
＊2 : On model without adaptive front lighting system 245-680R460A 102V ＊1
Spare T155/70D17 110M
Battery Pressure Front 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Capacity 12 V − 55 AH/5 HR Rear 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
12 V − 72 AH/20 HR Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) ＊2
Fuses ＊1 : Michelin PAX system model

Interior See page 453 and 454 or the fuse ＊2 : If equipped
label attached to the inside of
each fuse box cover.
Under-hood See page 452 or the fuse box
cover.
465
０７／０５／１７１０：００：４８３１ＳＪＡ６３００４７１
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between tread shoulder and depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
466
０７／０５／１７１０：００：５３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４７２
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
467
０７／０５／１７１０：０１：０８３１ＳＪＡ６３００４７３
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle Tire Size 98 − Load index (a numerical code
have a number of markings. Those Whenever tires are replaced, they associated with the maximum
you should be aware of are described should be replaced with tires of the load the tire can carry).
below. same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of V − Speed symbol (an
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE what each component means. alphabetical code indicating
(1) the maximum speed rating).
P245/50R17 98V
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
P − Vehicle type (P indicates The tire identification number (TIN)
passenger vehicle). is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
245 − Tire width in millimeters. TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
50 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its DOT B97R FW6X 2202
width).
(1) DOT − This indicates that the tire
R − Tire construction code (R meets all requirements of
indicates radial). the U.S. Department of
(4) (3) (2) Transportation.
17 − Rim diameter in inches.
(1) Tire Size B97R − Manufacturer’s
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure identification mark.
(4) Maximum Tire Load
468
０７／０５／１７１０：０１：２５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４７４
Tire Labeling
FW6X − Tire type code. PAX SystemTM Tire Labeling 102 −Load index (a numerical code
If equipped associated with the maximum
2202 − Date of manufacture. The PAX system tires have different load the tire can carry).
Year markings from conventional tire
Week markings. Following is an example of V −Speed symbol (an
PAX system tire size with an alphabetical code indicating
Maximum Tire Pressure explanation of what each component the maximum speed rating).
Max Press − The maximum air means.
pressure the tire can
hold. 245-680R460A 102V
Maximum Tire Load 245 −Tire width in millimeters.

Max Load − The maximum load the
tire can carry at 680 −Outside diameter of the tire in
maximum air pressure. millimeters.
R −Tire construction code (R

indicates radial)
460 −Nominal diameter at the rim
seat in millimeters.
A −Symmetric
469
０７／０５／１７１０：０１：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４７５
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if As an added safety feature, your Driving on a significantly under-
provided), should be checked vehicle has been equipped with a tire inflated tire causes the tire to
monthly when cold and inflated to pressure monitoring system (TPMS) overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the inflation pressure recommended that illuminates a low tire pressure Under-inflation also reduces fuel
by the vehicle manufacturer on the telltale efficiency and tire tread life, and may
vehicle placard or tire inflation affect the vehicle’s handling and
pressure label. stopping ability.
(If your vehicle has tires of a when one or more of your tires is Please note that the TPMS is not a
different size than the size indicated significantly under-inflated. substitute for proper tire
on the vehicle placard or tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
inflation pressure label, you should Accordingly, when the low tire responsibility to maintain correct tire
determine the proper tire inflation pressure telltale illuminates, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
pressure for those tires.) should stop and check your tires as not reached the level to trigger
soon as possible, and inflate them to illumination of the TPMS low tire
the proper pressure. pressure telltale.
470
０７／０５／１７１０：０１：３９３１ＳＪＡ６３００４７６
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
with a TPMS malfunction indicator variety of reasons, including the
to indicate when the system is not installation of replacement or
operating properly. The TPMS alternate tires or wheels on the
malfunction indicator is combined vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
with the low tire pressure telltale. functioning properly.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for Always check the TPMS malfunction
approximately one minute and then telltale after replacing one or more
remain continuously illuminated. tires or wheels on your vehicle to
This sequence will continue upon ensure that the replacement or
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long alternate tires and wheels allow the
as the malfunction exists. TPMS to continue to function
properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
471
０７／０５／１７１０：０１：５０３１ＳＪＡ６３００４７７
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act crankcase ventilation valve routes
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ them from the crankcase back to the
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile intake manifold. They are then
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that drawn into the engine and burned.
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls Evaporative Emissions Control
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain System
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. tank, an evaporative emissions
ment. Under certain conditions of Scheduled maintenance is on pages control canister filled with charcoal
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC 374 and 394 . adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ canister while the engine is off. After
＊
Carbon monoxide does not contri- In Canada, Acura vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
bute to smog creation, but it is a with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
poisonous gas. requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
472
０７／０５／１７１０：０２：０３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４７８
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Ignition Timing Control System Replacement Parts

The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount designed and certified to work
ignition timing control, exhaust gas of HC, CO, and NOx produced. together in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s System remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Acura replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that system takes some of the exhaust equivalent for repairs. Using lower
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
evaporative emissions control of NOx produced when the fuel is The emissions control systems are
systems. burned. covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converters tion.
multiport fuel injection. are in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: air intake, chemical reactions, they convert HC,
engine control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
473
０７／０５／１７１０：０２：１４３１ＳＪＡ６３００４７９
Three Way Catalytic Converters
The three way catalytic converters A defective three way catalytic

contain precious metals that serve as converter contributes to air pollution,
catalysts, promoting chemical and can impair your engine’s per-
reactions to convert the exhaust formance. Follow these guidelines to
gasses without affecting the metals. protect your vehicle’s three way
The catalytic converters are referred catalytic converters.
to as three-way catalysts, since they
act on HC, CO, and NOx. Always use unleaded gasoline.
Replacement units must be original Even a small amount of leaded
Acura parts or their equivalent. gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
The three way catalytic converters THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER way catalytic converters
must operate at a high temperature ineffective.
for the chemical reactions to take
place. They can set on fire any Keep the engine well maintained.
combustible materials that come
near them. Park your vehicle away Have your vehicle diagnosed and
from high grass, dry leaves, or other repaired if it is misfiring, back-
flammables. firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
474
０７／０５／１７１０：０２：２５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４８０
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that 4. Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for an the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the 5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by hold it there until the temperature
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following. gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
systems. These codes are erased scale (about 3 minutes).
when the battery is disconnected, 1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
and set again only after several days but not completely, full (around 6. Without touching the accelerator
of driving under a variety of 3/4). pedal and let the engine idle for 20
conditions. seconds.
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
CONTINUED
475
０７／０５／１７１０：０２：３１３１ＳＪＡ６３００４８１
Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled 8. Then drive in city/suburban

major highway where you can traffic for at least 10 minutes.
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph When traffic conditions allow, let
for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the vehicle coast for several
the highway in D. Do not use the seconds without using the
cruise control. When traffic allows, accelerator pedal or the brake
drive for 90 seconds without pedal.
moving the accelerator pedal.
(Vehicle speed may vary slightly; 9. Stop the vehicle, turn off the
this is okay.) If you cannot do this ignition switch, and leave it off for
for a continuous 90 seconds 30 minutes.
because of traffic conditions, drive
for at least 30 seconds, then repeat If the testing facility determines the
it two more times (for a total of 90 readiness codes are still not set, see
seconds). your dealer.
476
０７／０５／１７１０：０２：３５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４８２
Warranty and Client Relations
Client ServiceInformation ............ 478

Warranty Coverages ..................... 479
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 480
Authorized Manuals ...................... 481

477
０７／０５／１７１０：０２：４６３１ＳＪＡ６３００４８３
Client Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are U.S. Owners: In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
trained professionals. They should American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Islands:
be able to answer all your questions. Acura Client Services Vortex Motor Corp.
If you encounter a problem that your Mail Stop 500-2N-7E Bella International
dealership does not solve to your 1919 Torrance Blvd. P.O. Box 190816
satisfaction, please discuss it with Torrance, CA 90501-2746 San Juan, PR 00919-0816
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager Tel: (800) 382-2238 Tel: (787) 620-7546
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way. Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
CLIENT RELATIONS us this information:
If you are dissatisfied with the RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
decision made by the dealership’s Honda Canada Inc. Vehicle identification number
management, contact the Acura 715 Milner Avenue (see page 462 )
Client Services Office. Toronto, ON Name and address of the dealer
M1B 2K8 who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9 Mileage on your vehicle
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Your name, address, and tele-
Toronto (416) 287-4776 phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
478
０７／０５／１７１０：０３：０１３１ＳＪＡ６３００４８４
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. coverage for a replacement battery
Please read your warranty booklet purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty − for details.
covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Limited Warranty − provides

systems, and accessories, against − all exterior body panels are coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and covered for rust-through from the chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. inside for the specified time period vehicle.
with no mileage limit.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Accessory Limited Warranty − all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two Acura accessories are covered under 2008 Acura warranty information
warranties cover your vehicle’s this warranty. Time and mileage booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time, limits depend on the type of for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are accessory and other factors. Please coverages. Your vehicle’s original
conditional. Please read your read your warranty manual for tires are covered by their
warranty booklet for exact details. manufacturer. Tire warranty
information. information is in a separate booklet.
Replacement Parts Limited
Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty − covers all Acura Canadian Owners
Warranty − this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Please refer to the 2008 warranty
to 100 % credit toward a replacement materials and workmanship. manual that came with your vehicle.
battery.
479
０７／０５／１７１０：０３：０７３１ＳＪＡ６３００４８５
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect 1-888-327-4236
should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administration (NHTSA), in addition However, NHTSA cannot become Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
to notifying American Honda Motor involved in individual problems Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
Co., Inc. between you, your dealer, or You can also obtain other
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
480
０７／０５／１７１０：０３：２０３１ＳＪＡ６３００４８６
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Service Manual:

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online: repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
Go online at www. helminc. com for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356. Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
Publication Form Description troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
Form Number in your vehicle.
61SJA03 2005-2008 Acura RL Service Manual
61SJA03EL 2005-2008 Acura RL Body Repair Manual:
Authorized Manuals
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
61SJA30 2005 Model Series Acura RL of damaged body parts.
Body Repair Manual
31SJA630 2008 Acura RL Owner’s Manual
31SJA810 2008 Acura RL Navigation System Manual
31SJAM30 2008 Acura RL Maintenance Journal
31SJAQ30 2008 Acura RL Quick Start Guide
ACU-R Order Form for Previous Years
Indicate Year and Model Desired
481
０７／０５／１７１０：０３：２３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４８７
482
０７／０５／１７１０：０３：３０３１ＳＪＡ６３００４８８
Index
A Auto Control Mode, Starting Belts, Seat ................................... 10, 21

Engine ......................................... 347 Beverage Holders .......................... 190
Accessories..................................... 337 Automatic Climate Control........... 205 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ........ 308
ACCESSORY (Ignition Switch Automatic Lighting........................ 141 Booster Seats ................................... 53
Position) ...................................... 151 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 23 Brakes
Accessory Power Sockets............. 192 Automatic Speed Control.............. 277 Anti-lock Brake System
AcuraLink ....................................... 299 Automatic Transmission............... 349 (ABS) ...................................... 359
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Capacity, Fluid ........................... 464 Break-in, New Linings .............. 328
Indicator ...................................... 280 Checking Fluid Level ................ 404 Fluid ............................................ 406
Operation .................................... 282 Shifting ........................................ 349 Parking ........................................ 187
Adaptive Front Lighting System Shift Lever Position System Indicator .................. 63, 449
(AFS) ........................................... 143 Indicators ................................ 349 Wear Indicators ......................... 358
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 399 Shift Lever Positions ................. 349 Braking System.............................. 358
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 11, 27 Shift Lock Release ..................... 354 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 328
Air Conditioning............................. 198 Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 238 Brightness Control,
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 421 Instruments ................................ 145
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 328 B Brights, Headlights ....................... 140
Antifreeze ....................................... 402
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Battery
Indicator ................................ 64, 359 Charging System
Operation .................................... 359 Indicator............................ 62, 447
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 241 Jump Starting ............................. 441
Anti-theft Steering Column Maintenance ............................... 427
INDEX
Lock ............................................. 151 Cover ........................................... 428
Ashtrays .......................................... 193 Specifications ............................. 465
Audio System ................................. 207 Before Driving ............................... 327 CONTINUED
I
０７／０５／１７１０：０３：３６３１ＳＪＡ６３００４８９
Index
Bulb Replacement When to....................................... 387 Collision Mitigation Brake System

Back-up Lights ........................... 414 Charging System Indicator........... 447 (CMBS)
Fog Lights .................................. 412 Checklist, Before Driving ............. 346 Indicator ...................................... 366
Front Position Lights ................ 411 Child Safety ...................................... 38 Operation .................................... 361
Front Side Marker Lights......... 411 Booster Seats ............................... 53 Compact Spare Tire....................... 435
Headlights .................................. 408 Child Seats .................................... 45 Compass System ............................ 242
Specifications ............................. 465 Important Safety Reminders ...... 38 Console Compartment .................. 191
Turn Signal Lights ..................... 411 Infants ........................................... 43 Consumer Information.................. 478
Built-in-key ...................................... 164 Larger Children ........................... 52 Controls, Instruments and .............. 59
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 408 LATCH.......................................... 47 Coolant
Risks with Airbags....................... 39 Adding ......................................... 402
C Small Children.............................. 44 Checking ..................................... 333
Tethers.......................................... 51 Proper Solution .......................... 402
Capacities Chart............................. 464 Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 39 Temperature Gauge .................... 70
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56 Child Seats ........................................ 44 Crankcase Emissions Control
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 339 LATCH.......................................... 47 System......................................... 472
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51 Cruise Control Indicator ................. 65
CD Care .......................................... 235 Childproof Door Locks ................. 154 Cruise Control Operation ............. 277
CD Error Message ........................ 234 Cleaning Cup Holders.................................... 190
CD Changer.................................... 223 Seat Belts .................................... 415
Ceiling Lights ................................. 196 Client Service Office ..................... 478
Certification Label ......................... 462 Climate Control System ................ 198
Chains, Tires .................................. 425 Clock, Setting the .......................... 274
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 436 CO in the Exhaust ......................... 472
Changing Oil Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 347
How to ......................................... 400
II
０７／０５／１７１０：０３：４３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４９０
Index
Customize Settings .......................... 81 Directional Signals......................... 140 Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 145
ACC Setup .................................... 89 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 358 Jump Starting ............................. 441
Door/Window Setup ................. 122 Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 401 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 447
KEYLESS ACCESS Setup ........ 108 Doors Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 448
Lighting Setup............................ 115 Locking and Unlocking ............. 152 Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Meter Setup .................................. 94 Lockout Prevention ................... 152 Manually ................................. 450
Position Setup ............................ 103 Monitor Indicator .................. 13, 79 Overheated Engine ................... 444
Setting to Default ......................... 85 Power Door Locks ..................... 152 Towing ........................................ 459
Wiper Setup ................................ 133 DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ......... 466 Emergency Brake .......................... 187
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7 Emergency Flashers ..................... 145
D Driver’s ID ........................................ 81 Emergency Towing ....................... 459
Driving ............................................ 345 Emergency Trunk Opener ........... 154
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii Economy ..................................... 336 Emissions Controls........................ 472
Dashboard .................................... 4, 60 Driving Position Memory Emissions Testing ......................... 475
Daytime Running Lights............... 142 System......................................... 160
Indicator ........................................ 65 Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 415
Dead Battery .................................. 440
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 480 E
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 146
Defrosting the Windows ............... 204 Economy, Fuel ............................... 334
Differential Fluid ........................... 464 Emergencies................................... 431
Dimensions ..................................... 464 Battery, Jump Starting .............. 441
Dimming the Headlights .............. 140 Brake System Indicator ............ 449
INDEX
Dipstick Changing a Flat Tire ................. 436
Automatic Transmission........... 404 Charging System Indicator ...... 447
Engine Oil ................................... 333 Checking the Fuses................... 453 CONTINUED
III
０７／０５／１７１０：０３：４９３１ＳＪＡ６３００４９１
Index
Engine Features .......................................... 197 Opening the Fuel Fill Door

Check Starting System ............. 348 Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 329 Manually ................................. 450
Compartment Covers ................ 398 Filters Oxygenated ................................ 329
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 70 Dust and Pollen .......................... 415 Tank, Refueling ......................... 329
If It Won’t Start .......................... 440 Oil ................................................ 400 Tighten Fuel Cap ....................... 330
Malfunction Indicator Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 145 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 453
Lamp ................................. 62, 448 Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 436
Oil life .......................................... 387 Floor Mats ...................................... 416 G
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 62, 447 Fluids
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 399 Automatic Transmission........... 404 Gas Mileage Improving................. 335
Overheating................................ 444 Brake ........................................... 406 Gasoline .......................................... 328
Specifications ............................. 465 Power Steering........................... 406 Gauge ............................................ 70
Speed Limiter ............................. 354 Windshield Washer ................... 404 Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 66
Starting........................................ 347 Fog Lights ...................................... 142 Octane Requirement ................. 328
Engine Speed Limiter.................... 354 Four-way Flashers ......................... 145 Tank, Refueling ......................... 329
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 328 Front Airbags ............................. 11, 29 Gas Station Procedures................. 329
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 472 Front Seat ....................................... 155 Gauges .............................................. 70
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 56 Adjusting..................................... 155 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 70
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Heaters........................................ 178 Fuel ................................................ 70
System......................................... 473 Airbags .................................... 11, 29 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Air Ventilation ............................ 179 Rating) ........................................ 380
Belts by ......................................... 19 Fuel .................................................. 328 Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 349
Fill Door and Cap....................... 329 Glove Box ....................................... 189
F Gauge ............................................ 70 GPS initialization ............................ 260
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 66 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Fan, Interior.................................... 200 Octane Requirement ................. 328 Rating) ........................................ 380
IV
０７／０５／１７１０：０３：５５３１ＳＪＡ６３００４９２
Index
H I Lights On ...................................... 64
Low Fuel ....................................... 66
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 408 Identification Number, Vehicle.... 462 Low Oil Pressure ................. 62, 447
HandsFreeLink , Bluetooth ....... 308 Ignition Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Hazard Warning Flashers............. 145 Keys............................................. 149 Indicator............................ 67, 371
Headlights Switch .......................................... 151 Malfunction (MIL) .............. 62, 448
Adaptive Front Lighting System Timing Control System ............. 473 Message ........................................ 68
(AFS)....................................... 143 Immobilizer System....................... 150 Seat Belt Reminder ............... 21, 62
Aiming ......................................... 408 Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Security System ................... 69, 276
Automatic Lighting ................... 141 Indicators .......................................... 62 SH-AWD ....................................... 66
Daytime Running Lights .......... 142 ABS (Anti-lock Brake Side Airbag Off ............................ 63
High Beam Indicator ................... 65 System) ............................. 64, 359 SRS ................................................ 63
Lights On Indicator ..................... 64 Adaptive Front lighting Turn Signal and Hazard
Low Beams, Turning on ........... 140 System (AFS) ................... 69, 143 Warning .................................... 64
Reminder Chime........................ 140 Brake (Parking and Brake VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) ... 65
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 408 System) ............................. 63, 449 VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)
High beams, Turning on ........... 140 Charging System ................. 62, 447 Activation.......................... 65, 377
Washer＊＊ .................................... 138 Collision Mitigation Brake Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 61
Head Restraints ............................. 156 System (CMBS)............... 69, 365 Infant Restraint ................................ 43
Heated Mirror ................................ 159 Cruise Control .............................. 66 Infant Seats ....................................... 43
Heater, Seat .................................... 178 Electronically Controlled Power Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 347 Steering System (ECPS)......... 68 Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 419
HomeLink Universal Fog Light ...................................... 65 Inside Mirror .................................. 158
INDEX
Transceiver................................. 295 High Beam .................................... 65 Inspection, Tire .............................. 422
Hood, Opening the ........................ 331 Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 64
Horn ............................................ 5, 136 Keyless Access System ...... 68, 176 CONTINUED
V
０７／０５／１７１０：０４：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３００４９３
Index
Instrument Panel ............................. 61 Lights Owner’s Maintenance

Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 145 Bulb Replacement ..................... 408 Checks .................................... 394
Interface Dial ................. 199, 207, 299 Indicator ........................................ 61 Safety........................................... 386
Interior Lights ................................ 196 Position ....................................... 140 Sub Items .................................... 396
Introduction ......................................... i Turn Signal ................................. 140 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 448
Load Limit ...................................... 379 Memory, Driving Position ............ 160
J LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 151 Message Display .............................. 78
Locks Message Indicator ........................... 68
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 437 Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 151 Meters, Gauges ................................ 70
Jack, Tire ........................................ 436 Childproof Door ......................... 154 Methanol in Gasoline .................... 328
Jump Starting ................................. 441 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 329 Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 159
Glove Box ................................... 189 Modifications.................................. 337
K Power Door ................................ 152 Modifying Your Vehicle................ 338
Trunk .......................................... 153 Moonroof ................................. 183-186
Keys ................................................. 149 Trunk Pass-through Cover ....... 157 MP3 ................................................. 230
Keyless Access System................. 163 Low Coolant Level ......................... 333 Multi-Information Display .............. 71
Keyless Access Remote ................ 164 Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 66
Keyless Memory Settings ............ 170 Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 62, 447 N
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 464
L Luggage, Storing ........................... 339 Neutral Gear Position.................... 350
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 328
Label, Certification ........................ 462 M NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Lane Change, Signaling ................ 140 Numbers, Identification ................ 462
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................... 22 Maintenance ................................... 385
Lights On Indicator ......................... 64 Main Items ................................. 395
Minder......................................... 387
VI
０７／０５／１７１０：０４：１１３１ＳＪＡ６３００４９４
Index
O Park Gear Position......................... 350 Radio/CD Sound System .............. 207

Parking ............................................ 357 Readiness Codes ............................ 448
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 328 Parking Brake ................................ 187 Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 414
Odometer .......................................... 72 Parking Brake and Brake Rear View Mirror........................... 158
Odometer, Trip ................................ 72 System Indicator .................. 63, 449 Rear Window Defogger ................ 146
Oil Parking Over Things that Burn ... 474 Reclining the Seat Backs .............. 155
Change, How to ......................... 400 PAX System .................................... 426 Reminder Indicators ........................ 62
Change, When to ....................... 387 PGM-FI System.............................. 473 Remote ............................................ 163
Checking Engine ....................... 333 Power Door Locks ......................... 152 Replacement Information
Life, Engine ................................ 387 Power Socket Locations................ 192 Engine Oil and Filter ................. 400
Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 447 Power Windows ............................. 181 Fuses ........................................... 451
Selecting Proper Viscosity Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 19 Light Bulbs ................................. 408
Chart ....................................... 399 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 Schedule ..................................... 387
ON (Ignition Switch Position) ...... 151 Additional Safety Precautions .... 20 Tires ............................................ 419
Onboard Refueling Vapor Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19 Wiper Blades .............................. 417
Recovery ..................................... 472 Protecting Children ......................... 38 Replacing Seat Belts After a
Outside Mirrors ............................. 158 Protecting Infants ........................ 43 Crash ............................................. 25
Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 73 Protecting Larger Children ........ 52 Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 333
Overheating, Engine ..................... 444 Protecting Small Children .......... 44 Restraint, Child ................................ 38
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 394 Using Child Seats with Reverse Gear Position................... 350
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 328 Tethers...................................... 51 Reverse Tilt Door Mirror ............. 159
Using LATCH .............................. 47 Rearview Camera........................... 326
P Roof Rack ....................................... 342
INDEX
R Rotation, Tire ................................. 423
Paddle Shifters ............................... 351
Panel Brightness Control ............. 145 Radiator Overheating .................... 444 CONTINUED
VII
０７／０５／１７１０：０４：１６３１ＳＪＡ６３００４９５
Index
S Security System ............................. 276 Spare Tire

Sequential Sports Shift Mode ...... 351 Inflating ....................................... 435
Safety Belts................................. 10, 21 Paddle Shifters ........................... 351 Specifications ............................. 465
Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 480 Serial Number ................................ 462 Specification Charts ...................... 464
Safety Features .................................. 9 Service Intervals ............................ 387 Speed Limiter ................................. 354
Airbags .......................................... 11 Service Manual, Purchasing＊....... 481 Spotlights ........................................ 196
Seat Belts ...................................... 10 Service Station Procedures .......... 329 SRS, Additional Information........... 26
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 57 Super Handling-All Wheel Drive Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
Safety Messages ............................... iii (SH-AWD) .............................. 356 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34
Satellite Digital Radio＊ .................. 217 Torque Distribution Monitor ... 356 How Your Airbags
Seat Belts .................................... 10, 21 Indicator ........................................ 66 Work ............................. 29, 32, 34
Additional Information ................ 21 Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 349 SRS Components ......................... 26
Automatic Seat Belt Shift Lock Release ......................... 354 SRS Service................................... 36
Tensioners ................................ 23 Side Airbags ............................... 11, 32 SRS Indicator.............................. 34, 63
Cleaning ...................................... 415 How the Side Airbag off START (Ignition Switch
e-pretensioner .............................. 24 Indicator Works ....................... 35 Position) ...................................... 151
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 17, 22 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32 Starting the Engine........................ 347
Maintenance ................................. 25 Side Curtain Airbags ................. 11, 34 Auto Control Mode.................... 347
Reminder Indicator and How Your Side Curtain In Cold Weather at High
Beeper ................................. 21, 62 Airbags Work ........................... 34 Altitude ................................... 347
System Components.................... 21 Side Marker Lights, Bulb With a Dead Battery ................. 441
Use During Pregnancy................ 19 Replacement in .......................... 411 Steam Coming from Engine ......... 444
Seat Heaters ................................... 178 Signaling Turns .............................. 140 Steering Wheel
Seat Position Memory ................... 160 Snow Tires ...................................... 424 Adjustments ............................... 147
Seat Ventilation＊＊ .......................... 179 Sound System ................................. 207 Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 151
Seats, Adjusting the ....................... 155 Position Memory ....................... 160
VIII
０７／０５／１７１０：０４：２２３１ＳＪＡ６３００４９６
Index
Steering Wheel Buttons/ Tilt/Telescopic Steering Snow ............................................ 424

Switches ...................................... 136 Wheel .......................................... 147 Specifications ............................. 465
Stereo Sound System .................... 207 Timing Belt ..................................... 407 Tools, Tire Changing .................... 436
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 429 Tire Chains ..................................... 424 Torque Distribution Monitor
Sun Visors ....................................... 192 Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 436 (SH-AWD) .................................. 356
Supplemental Restraint Tire Pressure Monitoring System Towing
System................................. 11, 26 (TPMS) ........................... 372, 470 A Trailer ...................................... 379
Servicing ....................................... 36 Monitoring Tire Pressure Equipment and Accessories ..... 380
SRS Indicator.......................... 34, 63 Reading ................................... 419 Weight Limit .............................. 379
System Components.................... 26 TPMS System Warning ............ 371 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
Synthetic Oil ................................... 400 Tires ................................................ 419 System) ................................... 371
Air Pressure ............................... 421 Required Federal
T Chains ......................................... 424 Explanation............................. 470
Checking Wear .......................... 421 Warning Message...................... 375
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 431 Compact Spare ........................... 435 Trailer Loading .............................. 379
Technical Descriptions DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 466 Trailer Towing Tips....................... 382
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 466 Inflation ....................................... 419 Transmission
Emissions Control Systems ...... 472 Inspection ................................... 421 Checking Fluid Level,
Three Way Catalytic Labeling .............................. 468, 469 Automatic ............................... 404
Converters .............................. 474 Low Tire Pressure Fluid Selection............................ 405
Temperature Gauge ........................ 70 Indicator............................ 67, 371 Identification Number............... 462
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 206 Michelin PAX System ............... 426 Shifting the Automatic .............. 349
Temperature, Outside ..................... 73 Pressure Monitor....................... 373 Treadwear .............................. 422, 435
INDEX
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 51 Pressure Monitor System ......... 371 Trip Meter ........................................ 72
Three Way Catalytic Replacing .................................... 423
Converters .................................. 474 Rotating....................................... 422 CONTINUED
IX
０７／０５／１７１０：０４：３０３１ＳＪＡ６３００４９７
Index
Trunk............................................... 153 Viscosity, Oil................................... 399 Operation .................................... 137

Emergency Opener ................... 154 Voice Control System.................... 265 Summer/Winter Position ......... 139
Opening the ................................ 153 WMA ............................................... 230
Open Monitor Indicator ........ 13, 79 W Worn Tires ..................................... 421
Turn Signals ................................... 140 Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 459
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
U Warning Labels, Location of .......... 57 X
Warranty Coverages ..................... 479
Unexpected, Taking Care Washer, Windshield XM Satellite Radio＊ ....................... 217
of the ........................................... 431 Checking the Fluid Level ......... 404
＊
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 466 Operation .................................... 137 : U.S. only
＊＊
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 328 Wheels : Canada only
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 401 Adjusting the Steering .............. 147
Alignment and Balance ............. 423
V Compact Spare ........................... 435
Nut Wrench ................................ 437
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 340 Windows
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 464 Auto Reverse .............................. 182
Vehicle Identification Number..... 462 Operating the Power ................. 181
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Rear, Defogger .......................... 146
System..................................... 377 Windshield
VSA Activation Indicator .... 65, 377 Cleaning ...................................... 137
VSA Off Switch .......................... 378 Defroster .................................... 201
VSA System Indicator ......... 65, 377 Washers ...................................... 137
Vehicle Storage .............................. 429 Wipers, Windshield
VIN .................................................. 462 Changing Blades ........................ 417
X
０７／０５／１７１０：０４：３３３１ＳＪＡ６３００４９８
０７／０５／１７１０：０４：３７３１ＳＪＡ６３００４９９
０７／０５／１７１０：０４：３９３１ＳＪＡ６３００５００
０７／０５／１７１０：０５：０４３１ＳＪＡ６３００５０１
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Rear Differential Fluid: Brake Fluid:

Premium unleaded gasoline, Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
pump octane number of 91 or Transmission Fluid) preferred, or DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
higher. a DEXRON III ATF as a DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
temporary replacement. replacement (see page 406 ).
Fuel Tank Capacity:
19.4 US gal (73 ) Capacity: Tire Pressure (measured cold):
SH-AWD differential case Front:
Recommended Engine Oil: 0.77 US qt (0.73 ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
API Premium grade 5W-20 SH-AWD clutch case
detergent oil (see page 399 ). 2.8 US qt (2.7 ) Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Oil change capacity (including Transfer Assembly Fluid:
filter): SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity Spare Tire Pressure:
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) hypoid gear oil, API service 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Power Steering Fluid:
Transmission Fluid) (see page Honda Power Steering Fluid
404 ). preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 406 ).

Acura RL 2008 Manual de Servicio

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Acura RL 2008 Manual de Servicio

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 RL

OWNER This owner’s manual should be

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the

California Proposition 65 Warning

Event Data Recorders

Service Diagnostic Recorders

A Few Words About Safety

Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 4

Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 345

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 481

Contents Before Driving Technical Information

Your Vehicle at a Glance

DRIVER’S FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL CEILING MIRROR CONTROL

Your Vehicle at a Glance

PADDLE SHIFTERS INSTRUMENT WINDSHIELD HAZARD WARNING

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

You’ll find many safety (see pages 38 − 55 ). Control Your Speed

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Your vehicle has door monitor

Driver and Passenger Safety

See pages 38 − 42 for important

When one or more doors are not

Protecting Adults and Teens

Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats

Locking the doors also helps prevent

See page 152 for how to lock the

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

Reclining a seat-back so that the

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Make sure all seat belts are

If necessary, pull up on the belt again

Protecting Adults and Teens

Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

This will reduce the risk of injuries

Protecting Adults and Teens

Additional Safety Precautions Keep your hands and arms away

Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on

Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

If no obstructions are found, have